Skip to main content

Full text of "The histories of Brazil"

See other formats


|S DOCUMENTS  AND  NARRATIVES 

CONCERN \JG  THE 

DISCOVERY  AND  O)'U'Y 
£>  OF  LATIN    ^/i^Ii^CA 


CO 


PUBLISHED  BY 

THE  CORTES  SOCIETY 

NEW  YORK 


DOCUMENTS  AND  NARRATIVES 

CONCERNING  THE 

DISCOVERY  AND   CONQUEST 
OF  LATIN  AMERICA 


PUBLISHED   BY 

THE  CORTES  SOCIETY 

NEW  YORK 


NUMBER  FIVE 
VOLUME  II 


MAP  OF  BRAZIL  FROM  THE  ESCORIAL  MS. 


The  Histories 
of  Brazil 


By  PERO  de  MAGALHAES 


now  translated  into  English  for  the  first  time 
and  annotated  by 

JOHN  B.  STETSON,  JR. 

with 

a  facsimile  of  the  Portuguese  original 
1576 


The  Cortes  Society 

NEW  YORK 
1922 


Edition  limited  to  2JO  copies 
of  which  ten  are  on  Japan  paper 

r^"    '""'** 

This  copy  is  Number .......T.... 


Contents   of  Volume   II 

THE  TRANSLATION  OF  THE  HISTORIA 

PAGE 

LICENSES  TO  PRINT 10 

THE  POEMS  OF  CAMOES 11 

LETTER  OF  DEDICATION 16 

PROLOGUE 18 

CHAPTER  I.  How  THE  PROVINCE  WAS  DIS- 
COVERED, AND  THE  REASON  FOR  CALLING 
IT  SANCTA  CRUZ  AND  NOT  BRAZIL 20 

CHAPTER  II.  IN  WHICH  THE  LOCATION  AND 
QUALITIES  OF  THE  PROVINCE  ARE  DES- 
CRIBED    25 

CHAPTER  III.  OF  THE  CAPTAINCIES  AND 
SETTLEMENTS  OF  THE  PORTUGUESE  IN 
THE  PROVINCE 31 

CHAPTER  IV.     OF    THE     GOVERNMENT     OF 

\\ 

THE  INHABITANTS  OF  THE  CAPTAINCIES  AND 

OF  THEIR  MODE  OF  LIVING 40 

CHAPTER  V.  ABOUT  THE  PLANTS,  FOOD- 
STUFFS AND  FRUITS  IN  THE  PROVINCE 43 

CHAPTER  VI.     ABOUT    THE    ANIMALS     AND 

POISONOUS  REPTILES  OF  THE  PROVINCE.  .         53 


PAGE 

CHAPTER  VII.  ABOUT  THE  BIRDS  OF  THE 
PROVINCE 65 

CHAPTER  VIII.  ABOUT  SOME  OF  THE  NOTE- 
WORTHY FISH,  WHALES  AND  AMBERGRIS 
OF  THOSE  PARTS 72 

CHAPTER    IX.    ABOUT  A  MARINE  MONSTER  ' 
THAT  WAS  KILLED  IN  THE  CAPTAINCY  OF 
SAO  VICENTE  IN  THE  YEAR  1564 79 

CHAPTER  X.  ABOUT  THE  NATIVES  OF  THE 
PROVINCE:  THEIR  CONDITION  AND  CUSTOMS, 
AND  HOW  THEY  ARE  GOVERNED  IN  PEACE.  .  83 

CHAPTER  XI.    ABOUT  THE  WARS  THEY  HAVE 

WITH    ONE   ANOTHER   AND   THE   MANNER    IN 
WHICH    THEY    ARE    WAGED 93 

CHAPTER  XII.  ABOUT  THE  DEATH  THEY 
METE  OUT  TO  THEIR  CAPTIVES  AND  THE 
CRUELTIES  THEY  PRACTISE  UPON  THEM  . . .  102 

CHAPTER  XIII.  OF  THE  RESULTS  OBTAINED 
THERE  BY  THE  FATHERS  OF  THE  COMPANY 
IN  SPREADING  THEIR  DOCTRINE 113 

CHAPTER  XIV.  ABOUT  THE  GREAT  RICHES 
WHICH  THEY  EXPECT  IN  THE  REGION  OF 
THE  Sertao. . .  117 


THE  TRANSLATION  OF  THE  T RAT  ADO 

PAGE 

INTRODUCTION 125 

DEDICATION 127 

PROLOGUE 129 

FIRST  PART. 

CHAPTER  I.    THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  TAMARACA       131 

CHAPTER  II.    THE   CAPTAINCY  OF  PERNAM- 
BUCO 132 

CHAPTER  III.    THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  BAHIA  DE 
TODOS  LOS  SANTOS 134 

CHAPTER  IV.    THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  ILHEOS..       137 
CHAPTER  V.     OF    A    RACE    OF    ABORIGINES 

WHICH  IS   FOUND  IN  THIS   CAPTAINCY 139 

CHAPTER  VI.    THE    CAPTAINCY    OF    PORTO 
SEGURO 142 

CHAPTER  VII.    THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  SPIRITO 
SANCTO 143 

CHAPTER  VIII.    THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  Rio  DE 
JANEIRO 145 

CHAPTER  IX.    THE     CAPTAINCY     OF     SAN 
VICENTE  .  147 


SECOND  PART. 

PAGE 

CHAPTER  I.    THE  RANCHES 149 

CHAPTER  II.    THE  CUSTOMS  OF  THE  COUNTRY     152 
CHAPTER  III.    THE  QUALITY  OF  THE  SOIL  . .       154 

CHAPTER  IV.  THE  FOOD-STUFFS  OF  THE 
COUNTRY 158 

CHAPTER  V.    THE  GAME  OF  THE  COUNTRY  .       160 

CHAPTER  VI.  OF  THE  FRUITS  OF  THE 
COUNTRY 162 

CHAPTER  VII.  ON  THE  CONDITION  AND  CUS- 
TOMS OF  THE  INDIANS  OF  THE  COUNTRY.  . .  165 

CHAPTER  VIII.    THE  WILD  BEASTS  OF  THE 

COUNTRY 176 

CHAPTER  IX.  OF  THE  COUNTRY  CERTAIN 
MEN  OF  THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  PORTO  SEGURO 
WENT  TO  DISCOVER  AND  WHAT  THEY  FOUND 
IN  IT 180 

NOTES  TO  VOLUME  II 189 

SOME  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL  REMARKS 237 

GENERAL  INDEX 255 


'History  of  the  Province 
*— '     of  Santa  Cruz 

which  we  commonly  c 


dMagalba.es  ck  Ciandavo,  aeaicateato  the, 
•ff  _.  •? 


offllalaca  anaother  regions  ofSouthernjndia. 


Approbation 


I  have  read  the  present  work  of  Pero  de  Magal- 
haes,  at  the  order  of  the  gentlemen  of  the  Council 
General  of  the  Inquisition,  and  it  does  not  contain 
anything  contrary  to  our  Holy  Catholic  Faith,  nor  to 
good  morals;  on  the  contrary,  many  things  well  worth 
reading.  Today,  the  loth  of  November,  15/5. 

Francisco  de  Gouvea 

In  accordance  with  the  above  certificate,  the  book 
may  be  printed  and  the  original  shall  be  returned  with 
one  of  the  printed  copies  to  this  council,  and  this  de- 
cision shall  be  printed  at  the  beginning  of  the  book 
together  with  the  above  certificate.  At  Evora  the  loth 
of  November.  By  order  of  Manuel  Antunez,  Secretary 
of  the  Council  General  of  the  Holy  Office  of  the 
Inquisition  in  the  year  157$. 

Lido  Anriquez  Manuel  de  Coadros 


To  the  most  honourable  Lord 

DOM  LIONIS  PEREIRA,  verses  in  the  tercet 

form  upon  the  book  which  Pero  deMagalhaes 

offered  him  in  dedication,  by 

Luis  de  Camocs. 


When  finished  lay  the  tale,  telling  the  story 
Where  in  brief  compass  raises  he  to  fame 
The  land  of  Sancta  Cruz,  lacking  in  glory, 

In  thought  Magalhdes  pondered  for  a  name 

Whose    patronage     would    shine,     wreck     thereby 

choosing 
For  carping  critics  who  might  dare  declaim. 

Thus  searching  far  and  late,  ivorn  with  his  musing, 
Sweet  sleep  o'ercame  him,  lulling  him  to  rest, 
E'er  fiery  Sol  could  rise,  daylight  diffusing. 

And  to  his  dreams  appeared,  for  battle  dressed, 
The  mighty  Mars,  furious  lance  aligning, 
Whose     flashings     blanch     the     cheek     by     dread 
oppressed. 

His  deep  voice  spoke,  rough  as  some  threat  designing. 
"Unjust  it  is  this  warrior's  tale  you  plan 
Whence  fame  your  brows  may  seek,  laurel  confining, 

Should' st  other  dedication  have  than  can 

Throughout   the   whole   wide   world   win   all   those 
prizes 


12  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

Given  for  deeds  in  arms  by  admiring  man." 

Scarce  the  words  uttered,  when  Apollo  rises 
(He  who  the  flaming  chariot  guides  each  day) 
From  the  opposing  side  and  thus  advises, 

"Magalhaes,  Mars  through  terrors  would  you  sway 
And  drive  you  to  his  will,  chilled  by  his  thunders. 
Through  me  alone  will  wisdom  you  display. 

A  learned  man,  so  great  Thalia's  wonders 
Are  trusted  to  him,  and  my  science  true, 
Can  be  thy  sole  defense,  free  from  all  blunders. 

'Tis  just  for  learning  Prudence  this  should  do, 

Because  crass  art  of  arms,  coarse  with  its  lewdness, 
Can  ne'er  the  road  of  eloquence  pursue." 

Thus  spake  the  Shining-One,  soft'ning  the  rudeness 
Of  the  Warrior-God  through  soothing  tone 
Swept  from  his  harp  by  art  invoked  with  shrewdness. 

But  Mercury,  the  Messenger,  alone 

Composer  of  doubts,  the  Caduceus-Bearer, 
The  symbol  of  that  power  all  must  own, 

Decides  to  reconcile  these  claims  lest  error 
May  enemies  make  of  the  heavenly  two, 
By  reasons  loved  of  both,  and  hence  the  fairer. 

He  spake,  "How  many  deathless  heroes  true, 
Both  of  the  Golden  Age  and  of  this  living, 
Were  symbols  of  Bellona's  stress  in  thew; 

And  yet  whose  skill  in  arms  equalled  in  giving 
Allegiance  unto  eloquence.    For  all 
The  Muses  surely  bless  men  in  war  striving. 

Nor  Alexander,  nor  did  Caesar  fall 

From  quests  of  intellect  in  battle-smother, 
While  oft  do  armies  march  to  learning's  call. 

A  book  within  one  hand — steel  in  the  other! 
The  first  to  rule  and  teach,  the  second  strike; 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  13 

Far  more  is  won  by  craft  than  force  her  brother! 
And  since  'tis  so,  ye  seek  a  hero,  like 

To  one  Apollo  loves,  gifted  in  letters, 

Yet  skilled  through  Mars  in  use  of  sword  and  pike. 
Such  can  I  name  you,  one  whose  strength  enfetters 

Knowledge  and  valour  bound  in  single  breast. 

'Tis  Dom  Lionis,  peer  among  our  betters. 
For  infant  promise  seen,  the  Muses  blest, 

Those  sisters  nine,  him  in  their  bosoms  bedded, 

Put  their  immortal  milk  at  his  behest, 
And  thus  to  him  desires  Olympic  wedded, 

Through  arts  and  science  nurtured  to  be  great 

And  grasp  that  moral  strength  which  they  inbredded. 
Next  in  the  exercise  of  arms  did  Fate 

Cast  his  heroic  part,  under  the  morning 

Stars  of  the  far  east,   on  red  war   to   wait. 
Therein  ripe  chivalry,  noblest  adorning, 

The  like  true  Christians  seek,  all  pure  and  stern, 

Did  he  display  to  men,  less  than  this  scorning. 
Time  rolled.    As  valiant  captain  him  discern 

Ruling  the  Golden  Chersonese?  where  ever 

He  holds  the  feeble  walls  at  each  new  turn, 
When  the  infant  settlement  faced  the  clever 

Assault  of  Achean  forces  which  long 

To  feed  on  other's  blood.    'Gainst  that  endeavour, 
O  Mars,  did  he,  your  chosen,  prove  so  strong, 

Battle  so  bravely,  punish  them  so  throughly, 

A  routed  remnant  homeward  gladly  throng. 
Then  left  he  the  new  kingdom,  guarded  duly: 

Yet  his  successes  his  return  compel. 

And  so,  again,  to  rule  choose  they  him  newly; 
A  governour  whose  strength  they  know  full  well. 

He  was  so  kindly  just,  friends  are  recalling; 


14  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

I 

So  swift  to  bring  defeat  his  foes  retell. 

So  love  and  hatred  wait,  he  both  inthralling, — 
Aflame  with  hope  are  love's  imaginings, 
While  hate  broods  silent  on  a  threat  appalling 

Which  the  returning  hero  with  him  brings — 
The  doom  of  banishment,  creeping  the  nearer, 
From  Indie's  seas  to  endless  wanderings! 

And  can  there  be  a  case  justice  makes  clearer? 
The  favour  and  the  help  high  heaven  can  give 
On  him  will  be  outpoured,  held  daily  dearer. 

This  truth  is  certain,  clear.  O  Gods  who  live 
Forever,  choose  this  hero,  ^vho  can  rightly 
True  patronage  for  Magalhaes  contrive." 

Thus  Mercury  each  case  to  each  bound  tightly; 
And  thus  Apollo  and  red  Mars  agreed; 
And  thus  the  dream  was  ended  appositely. 

0  famous  ruler,  from  that  vision  freed, 

Comes  Magalhaes  to  lay  this  tale  before  you, 
Where  brain  and  brawn  unite  in  deathless  deed. 

True  genius  here  can  cast  its  glamour  o'er  you, 
Rare  information  give  and  justify 
Benign  reception  as  he  would  implore  you. 

Since  if  you  patronage  to  him  deny 

Bright  intellect  will  fall  to  depths  the  blacker, 
May  you  to  him  the  same  defense  supply 
As  held  the  walls  of  elsewise  lost  Malacca. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  15 


Sonnet  to  Dom  Lionis,  on  the  victory  he 
obtained  over  the  King  of  Achem2 
in  Malacca,  by  Luis  de  Camoes 

Ye  nymphs  of  the  Gangetic  jungles,  praise 
Whom  crimson-robed  Aurora,  with  her  light, 
Defended  from  the  sons  of  ebon  night, 

A  hero  worthy  of  your  sweetest  lays. 

The  daring  sons  of  Golden  Chersonese 
Fell,  dusky  horde,  erupted  for  the  fight 
To  oust  from  their  dear  chosen  nest  a  might 

More  favoured  than  by  Fortune's  fickle  ways. 

When  lo!  a  lion  bold,  unknown  to  fear, 
He  with  his  scanty  band  of  warriors  turned 

Their  strength  to  weakness  and  to  death's  impasse. 
Thus  sing,  0  Nymphs,  with  voices  sweet  and  clear, 
How  brave  Lionis  in  Malacca  earned 

Such  praise  as  Greece  ne'er  gave  Leonidas! 


16  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 


LETTER  OF  PERO  DE  MAGALHAES  TO  THE  MOST 
ILLUSTRIOUS  DOM  LIONIS  PEREIRA 

By  this  small  tribute  which  I  offer  you,  Illustrious 
Sir,  from  the  first  fruits  of  my  feeble  knowledge,  you 
will  recognize  to  some  extent  the  desire  I  have  to 
testify,  within  the  limits  of  my  power,  to  at  least  a 
small  part  of  what  is  due  the  renowned  fame  of  your 
heroic  name.  And  this,  not  only  because  of  the  dis- 
tinction of  the  most  noble  blood  and  famous  stock 
from  which  you  take  your  origin,  but  as  well  because 
of  the  merits  of  the  trophies  of  the  great  victories  and 
very  fortunate  experiences  which  have  been  your  lot 
in  those  parts  of  the  Orient,  where  God  deigned  to 
favour  you  with  so  generous  a  hand,  that  I  fear  my 
entire  life  will  not  suffice  to  voice  the  smallest  portion 
of  your  praises.  As  all  these  reasons  do  so  impel  me, 
and  as  I  conceive  no  other  thing  to  be  so  acceptable 
to  persons  of  high  minds  as  the  reading  of  books,  by 
means  of  which  they  reach  the  secrets  of  all  sciences, 
and  mortals  see  their  names  made  famous  and  per- 
petuated on  earth  in  undying  fame,  I  have  determined 
to  choose  you,  Sir,  among  all  gentlemen  of  the  world, 
to  whom  to  dedicate  this  short  history.  I  hope  you  will 
take  pleasure  in  perusing  it  with  attention,  and  in  tak- 
ing it  benignly  under  your  protection;  because  it  is 
new  and  because  I  wrote  it  as  an  eye-witness;  because 
I  know  what  particular  affection  you  have  for  things 
of  the  spirit;  and  because  I  am  certain  that  the  exer- 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  17 

cise  of  learning  will  be  no  less  acceptable  to  you  than 

the  exercise  of  arms.    Hence  I  feel  certain  that  I  shall 

be  able  to  publish  in  all  security  this  little  undertaking, 

and  to  spread  it  throughout  the  world  without  any 

apprehensions,  having  as  a  sponsor  you,  Honoured  Sir, 

whose  person  may  God  preserve,  and  whose 

life    and    estate    may    He    increase 

through    long    and    happy 

years. 


18  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 


PROLOGUE  TO  THE  READER. 

The  principal  reason  which  impelled  me  to  write 
the  present  history  and  to  print  it  was  that  no  one,  up 
to  the  present,  has  undertaken  it,  although  seventy  odd 
years  have  already  passed  since  the  discovery  of  that 
Province.  Its  history,  I  believe,  was  buried  in  such 
silence,  more  because  the  Portuguese  attached  little 
importance  to  that  Province  than  because  there  was  a 
lack  of  gifted  and  inquiring  persons  there  who  could 
have  written  it  in  better  style  and  more  fully  than  I. 
However,  since  foreigners  hold  it  in  higher  esteem 
and  know  its  peculiarities  more  thoroughly  than  we 
(the  Portuguese  have  many  times  already  driven  the 
foreigners  out  of  it  by  force  of  arms)*  it  seems  a 
fitting  and  necessary  thing  that  our  own  people  should 
have  the  same  information,  especially  so  that  all  those 
who  live  in  poverty  in  these  Kingdoms  might  have  no 
hesitancy  in  choosing  it  for  their  own  support;  for  the 
land  itself  is  so  favourable  to  all  who  seek  it,  that  it 
will  give  shelter  and  relief  to  all,  no  matter  how  poor 
or  destitute  they  may  be.  In  this  country  there  are 
also  things  worthy  of  great  admiration  and  so  notable 
that  it  would  seem  carelessness  and  want  of  inquisitive- 
ness  on  our  part,  should  we  not  mention  them  in  some 
narrative,  and  so  perpetuate  them,  as  was  the  custom 
among  the  ancients  who  let  no  event  escape  from  being 
fully  put  down  in  history,  and  who  did  not  even  neglect 
mentioning  things  of  far  less  importance  than  those 
-which  we  find  here  [in  Brazil],  things  that  still  live 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  19 

among  us,  and  will  live  forever.  And  if  the  ancient 
Portuguese,  as  well  as  the  moderns,  had  cared  more 
for  writing,  many  of  our  antiquities  which  are  lack- 
ing today  would  not  have  been  lost,  nor  would  there 
be  such  profound  ignorance  of  numerous  things  in 
the  investigation  of  which  many  scholars  have  worn 
themselves  out,  and  have  searched  through  a  great 
number  of  volumes  without  succeeding  in  uncovering 
or  reconstructing  such  facts  as  they  actually  happened. 
Hence  it  was  that  the  Greeks  and  Romans  considered 
all  other  nations  barbarians;  and  in  truth  they  were 
justified  in  so  naming  them,  for  they  were  so  little 
solicitous  and  ambitious  of  glory,  that  by  their  own 
negligence  they  allowed  many  deeds  to  perish  which, 
had  they  commemorated  them,  would  have  made  them 
immortal.  Thus,  since  writing  is  the  very  life  of 
memory,  and 


to  which  we  should  all  aspire,  as  far  as  we  are  entitled 
^to^it,  I,  moved  by _such  reasons,  decided- to  write  this 
short  history,  for  the  adornment  of  which  I  shall  not 
seek  exquisite   epithets  or   beautiful  language  which 
eloquent  orators  are  wont  to  use,  in  order  to  enhance  ) 
their  work  with  the  artifice  of  words.    I  shall  attempt 
to  write  only  according  to  truth,  in  a  clear  and  easy  , 
style,  as  my  feeble  intelligence  will  dictate,  with  a  de-  > 
sire  to  please  all  who  seek  information.    For  this  rea-  v 
son,  may  I  be  pardoned  the  failings  which  will  be 
noticed.    I  speak  to  the  discreet  readers  who  are  dis- 
posed to  forgive  with  genuine  solicitude;  from 
fools  and  the  malicious  I  well  know  that 
I  shall  not  escape,  as  it  is  certain 
that  they  will  spare  no 
one. 


20  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 


CHAPTER  I. 

How  THE  PROVINCE  WAS  DISCOVERED,  AND  THE 

REASON  FOR  CALLING  IT  SANCTA 

CRUZ  AND  NOT  BRAZIL 

In  the  reign  of  that  very  Catholic  and  Serene 
Prince,  King  Dom  MANUEL,4  a  fleet  was  pre- 
pared for  India,  of  which  Pedralvarez  Cabral5 
went  as  commander-in-chief  (capitam  mor),  this 
being  the  second  expedition  undertaken  by  the 
Portuguese  to  that  part  of  the  Orient.  The  fleet 
sailed  from  the  city  of  Lisbon  the  ninth  of  March 
of  the  year  1500.6  After  they  arrived  among  the 
Cape  Verde  Islands  (for  here  they  planned  to  get 
fresh  water),  a  storm  broke  out,  which  prevented 
taking  on  water  and  separated  some  of  the  vessels 
of  the  fleet.  When  fair  weather  came  again  the 
fleet  was  reunited,  and  proceeded  to  the  high 
seas,  to  avoid  the  Guinea  calms7  which  might 
hinder  their  voyage,  and  to  be  able  easily  to 
double  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.8  They  travelled 
a  month  in  this  circuitous  course  with  favourable 
winds,  when  they  came  upon  the  coast  of  this 
Province;  along  which  they  sailed  all  of  that  day, 
it  appearing  to  every  one  to  be  a  large  island,  for 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  21 

they  had  no  Pilot  or  other  person  who  had  any 
knowledge  of  it,  or  any  one  who  presumed  that 
there  might  be  a  continent  in  that  part  of  the 
Occident.  They  anchored  that  afternoon  in  a 
place  on  the  island  which  seemed  to  them  most 
suitable,  where  they  soon  had  sight  of  the  natives 
on  shore ;  whose  appearance  caused  them  no  little 
wonder,  for  they  were  different  from  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Guinea,  and  according  to  the  general  im- 
pression, different  from  any  people  they  had  ever 
seen.  They  being  at  anchor  in  the  place  I  men- 
tion, such  a  storm  arose  that  night  that  they  were 
obliged  to  weigh  anchor;  and  in  a  wind  which 
quartered  their  course,  they  were  forced  to  run 
along  the  coast  until  they  came  to  an  open  harbour 
of  deep  water,  which  they  entered,  and  to  which 
they  then  gave  the  name,  which  it  bears  today, 
Porto  Seguro,  for  it  had  given  them  shelter,  and 
had  safeguarded  them  from  the  dangers  of  the 
tempest  they  had  experienced.  The  next  day, 
Pedralvarez  and  most  of  the  crew  went  ashore 
where  high  mass  was  celebrated  and  a  sermon 
preached:  and  the  Indians  of  the  land,  who  were 
grouped  about,  listened  very  quietly  to  every- 
thing, imitating  all  the  acts  and  ceremonies  they 
saw  us  perform.  Thus  they  knelt  and  beat  their 
breasts,  as  though  they  had  the  light  of  Faith,  or 


22  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

as  though  in  some  way  there  had  been  revealed  to 
them  the  great  and  ineffable  mystery  of  the  Most 
Holy  Sacrament.9  By  this  action  they  showed 
clearly  that  they  were  disposed  to  receive  Chris- 
tian Doctrine  at  any  time  it  could  be  declared  to 
them,  inasmuch  as  they  were  people  who  were 
not  impeded  by  a  belief  in  idols,  and  who  pro- 
fessed no  other  law  which  might  conflict  with 
ours,  as  will  be  seen  later  in  the  chapter  dealing 
with  their  customs.  Then  Pedralvarez  sent  a 
ship10  with  the  news  to  the  King,  Dom  Manuel, 
which  news  was  received  with  much  pleasure  and 
satisfaction:  and  from  that  time  on  he  began  to 
send  more  ships  to  those  regions;11  and  so,  little 
by  little,  the  country  was  explored,  and  [ever] 
more  was  learned  about  it,  until  finally  the 
country  was  entirely  divided  into  Captaincies 
and  settled  in  the  way  it  is  today.  To  come  back 
to  Pedralvarez,  its  discoverer.  After  spending 
some  days  there,  taking  on  water  and  waiting  for 
suitable  weather  before  departing,  he  wished  to 
give  a  name  to  the  Province  he  had  so  recently 
discovered ;  so  he  ordered  a  Cross  to  be  raised  on 
the  highest  branch  of  a  tree,  whither  it  was  lifted 
with  great  solemnity,  and  many  benedictions  by 
the  Priests  whom  he  had  brought  in  his  company, 
and  the  name  of  Sancta  Cruz  was  given  to  the 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  23 

land^tfor^Holy  Mother  Church  was  celebrating 
the  feast  of  the  Holy  Cross  that  very  day  (it  being 
the  third  of  May).12  This  event  is  not  lacking  in 
mystery,  for  the  Order  and  Knighthood  of  Christ 
in  the  Kingdom  of  Portugal  wear  as  insignia  a 
cross  upon  the  breast;  and  so  it  pleased  Him 
(Christ)  that  that  land  should  be  discovered  on 
this  holy  day  when  such  a  name  might  be  given 
,itj  because  it  [the  land]  was  destined  to  be 
possessed  by  the  Portuguese,  and  to  remain  an 
inherited  property  under  the  custody  of  the  Grand 
Mastership  of  this  very  Order  of  Christ.13  Hence 
it  does  not  seem  reasonable  that  this  name  should 
be  withdrawn  from  it,  nor  that  we  should  forget 
it  so  universally  for  another  which  an  ill-advised 
public  gave  it  after  the  dye-wood  began  to  be  ex- 
ported to  the  Kingdom  [of  Portugal].  We  call 
it  brazil  because  the  wood  is  red  and  resembles 
hoTTJSius,1*  and  thus  the  land  got  the  name  of 
Brazil.  But  in  order  that  in  this  respect  we  may 
vex  the  Devil  who  has  laboured  so  hard  and  is 
still  labouring  to  efface  the  memory  of  the  Holy 
Cross  and  to  exile  it  from  the  hearts  of  men  (the 
Cross  by  means  of  which  we  were  redeemed  and 
delivered  from  the  power  of  his  tyranny),  let  us 
restore  the  name  and  call  it  "Province  of  Sancta 
Cruz,"  as  in  the  beginning.  (That  illustrious 


24  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

and  famous  writer,  Joao  de  Barros,  in  his  First 
Decade,  dealing  with  this  discovery,  shows  that 
it  was  first  so  called).15  For  in  truth  it  is  more 
estimable,  and  sounds  better  to  our  ears  as  Chris- 
tian folk,  to  hear  the  name  of  the  rood  upon 
which  the  mystery  of  our  Redemption  took  place, 
than  of  the  tree  which  serves  for  no  other  uses 
than  the  dyeing  of  cloth,  or  similar  purposes. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  25 


CHAPTER  II. 

IN  WHICH  THE  LOCATION  AND  QUALITIES 
or  THE  PROVINCE  ARE  DESCRIBED. 

The  Province  of  Sancta  Cruz  is  situated  in 
that  great  America,  one  of  the  four  parts  of  the 
world.  It  begins  two  degrees  south  of  the 
Equator  and  thence  extends  southwards  to  forty- 
five  degrees.  Thus  part  of  it  lies  in  the  torrid 
zone  and  part  in  the  temperate.  The  shape  of  the 
Province  is  like  that  of  a  harp,  the  coast-line  on 
the  north  side  running  from  east  to  west  and 
parallel  to  the  Equator.  On  the  south  it  is 
bounded  by  other  provinces  of  America,  peopled 
and  owned  by  heathen  nations  with  whom  so  far 
we  have  no  communication.  On  the  east  it  is 
bounded  by  the  African  Ocean  and  lies  directly 
opposite  the  Kingdoms  of  Congo  and  Angola  as 
far  as  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  On  the  west  it 
is  bounded  by  the  very  Tiigh  peaks  of  the  Andes 
and  the  slopes  of  Peru,  which  are  so  high  above 
the  land  that  it  is  said  even  the  birds  have  diffi- 
culty in  passing  over  them.  Until  now,  men 
coming  from  Peru  to  this  Province18  have  been 
able  to  find  only  one  route,  and  that  is  so  rough 
that  some  persons  perish  crossing  over,  by  falling 


26  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

from  the  narrow  path  they  are  following,  and 
their  dead  bodies  fall  to  a  depth  so  far  below  the 
living  that  they  can  not  see  them,  even  if  they  are 
disposed  to  give  them  burial.  This  Province  _  of 
Sancta  Cruz  lacks  these  and  other  extremes;  for 
although  it  is  so  large,  there  are  neither  such 
mountains  (there  are  great  numbers  of  them) 
nor  deserts  nor  marshes  which  can  not  be  crossed 
with  ease.  Apart  from  this,  the  Province,  with- 1 
out  contradiction,  is  the  most  suitable  of  all  the1-! 
provinces  of  America  for  mankind,  because 
usually  the  air  is  good  and  the  soil  most  fertile, 
and  [the  land  is]  of  the  most  delightful  and 
pleasing  appearance  to  human  sight.  The  fact 
that  it  is  so  healthful  and  free  from  sickness  is 
because  of  the  winds  that  generally  blow  over  it, 
from  the  northeast  or  south  and  sometimes  from 
the  east  or  east-southeast.  As  all  these  come 
from  off  the  sea,  the  air  is  so  pure  and  well 
tempered,  that  not  only  does  it  do  no  harm,  but 
on  the  contrary  restores  and  prolongs  human 
life."  The  viragao19  begins  about  noon  and 
lasts  till  daylight;  then  it  stops  because  of  the 
moisture  from  the  earth  which  checks  it.  When 
day  breaks  the  sky  is  usually  covered  with  mist, 
for  the  many  thickets  attract  all  this  moisture. 
And  during  this  period  a  gentle  wind  blows  from 
off  the  land  until  the  sun  calms  it  with  its  rays 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  27 

and  the  accustomed  sea  breeze  starts,  the  day 
becomes  clear  and  mild,  and  the  ground  remains 
clean  and  free  from  all  exhalations. 

The  aspect  of  the  Province  is  very  delectable 
and  refreshing  to  a  great  degree:  the  whole  of  it 
is  covered  with  lofty  thick  woods,  and  is  watered 
with  many  delightful  streams,  with  which  all  the 
land  is  abundantly  supplied;  it  is  always  green 
with  the  same  temperature  of  spring  that  April 
and  May  offer  us  here  [in  Portugal].  For  this 
reason  they  do  not  have  the  colds  or  frosts  of 
winter  to  injure  the  plants  as  they  injure  our 
plants.  In  a  word,  Nature  has  so  acted  in  respect 
to  all  things  in  the  Province,  and  has  so  moder- 
ated the  air,  that  one  is  never  aware  of  excessive 
cold  or  heat. 

There  is  an  infinite  number  of  springs  in  the 
country,  the  waters  of  which  form  many  great 
rivers  which  flow  into  the  Ocean,  either  on  the 
north  or  the  east  coast.  Some  of  them  rise  in  the 
midst  of  the  sertao™  and  wind  through  long  and 
tortuous  channels  in  search  of  the  Ocean,  where 
their  currents  drive  away  the  salt  water  with  vio- 
lence and  enter  the  Ocean  with  such  impetus  that 
it  is  difficult  and  dangerous  to  navigate  those 
waters.  The  principal  and  most  famous  of  the 
rivers  of  those  regions  is  the  River  of  the  Ama- 
zons20 which  flows  northward  into  the  ocean  one 


28  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

half-degree  south  of  the  Equator,  and  whose 
mouth  is  about  thirty  leagues  across.  In  the 
mouth  of  this  river  are  many  islands  which  divide 
it  into  many  channels ;  it  rises  in  a  lake  about  one 
hundred  leagues  from  the  South  Sea  [Pacific]  at 
the  foot  of  the  mountain  ranges  of  Quito,  in  the 
province  of  Peru,  whence  several  Castillian  expe- 
ditions have  embarked,  which  navigated  down- 
stream and  succeeded  in  entering  the  Ocean  half 
a  degree  from  the  Equator,  a  distance  of  six  hun- 
dred leagues  in  a  straight  line,  but  actually  more, 
counting  the  turns  the  river  itself  makes. 

Another  very  large  river,  fifty  leagues  to  the 
east  of  this  one,  also  empties  north,  and  is  called 
the  Maranhao  River.2*  There  are  many  islands 
in  it:  one  of  them  in  the  middle  of  the  bar  is  in- 
habited by  aborigines,  and  alongside  any  kind  of 
boat  may  anchor.  The  mouth  of  this  river  is 
seven  leagues  across,  and  so  much  salt  water 
enters  it  that  for  fifty  leagues  up  into  the  sertao 
it  is  no  more  nor  less  than  an  arm  of  the  sea, 
whither  one  can  navigate  among  the  islands  with- 
out any  hindrance.  Here  there  empty  two  rivers 
which  rise  in  the  sertao;  up  one  of  them  some 
Portuguese  sailed  on  a  voyage  of  discovery  in 
the  year  '35;22  they  proceeded  up  it  two  hundred 
and  fifty  leagues,  until  they  could  go  no  farther 
because  of  the  narrowness  of  the  river  and  the 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  29 

shallowness  of  the  water  which  would  no  longer 
float  the  boats.  Of  the  other  river  no  explora- 
tion was  made,  so  that  today  the  source  of  neither 
is  known. 

"Another  very  noteworthy  river  flows  east- 
ward into  the  same  Ocean  and  is  called  Sao 
Francisco :  its  mouth  is  located  in  ten  and  a  third 
degrees  and  may  be  half  a  league  wide.  This 
river  flows  into  the  sea  so  proudly  and  with  such 
fury  that  the  tide  never  reaches  its  mouth,  but 
only  represses  the  water  a  little;  three  leagues 
out  to  sea  the  water  is  fresh.  It  flows  toward  its 
mouth  from  the  south  to  the  north;  within  it  is 
very  deep  and  clear,  and  it  can  be  navigated  for 
sixty  leagues,  as  has  already  been  done.  From 
there  on  one  can  not  go,  on  account  of  a  very 
great  waterfall  at  that  point,  over  which  the  sheet 
of  water  rushes  from  a  great  height.  And  above 
this  fall  the  river  itself  runs  underground  and 
comes  up  again  a  league  away;  when  there  are 
floods,  the  river  overflows  and  washes  away  the 
earth.  This  river  rises  in  a  very  large  lake  which 
is  in  the  middle  of  the  country,  where  they  say 
are  many  towns  whose  inhabitants  (according  to 
report)  have  great  possessions  of  gold  and  pre- 
cious stones.23  Another  very  large  river,  one  of 
the  most  marvellous  in  the  world,  empties  into 
the  sea  on  the  east  coast  in  latitude  thirty-five:  it 


30  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

is  called  Rio  da  Prata,  and  has  a  width  of  forty 
leagues  where  it  enters  the  Ocean;  and  the  fprce 
of  this  fresh  water,  which  carries  the  drainage  of 
all  the  slopes  of  Peru,  is  so  great  that  sailors 
drink  fresh  water  before  they  can  see  the  land 
whence  it  comes.  Two  hundred  and  seventy 
leagues  up  this  river,  there  stands  a  city  settled 
by  Castillians  which  is  called  Ascengao  (Asun- 
cion).24 It  is  navigable  up  to  this  point  and  for 
many  leagues  farther.  Up  in  the  interior  there 
pours  into  this  river  another  called  Paragoahi, 
which  rises  also  in  that  very  same  lake  as  the  Sao 
Francisco  which  has  already  been  [mentioned].26 

Besides  these,  there  are  many  other  rivers 
on  the  coast,  large  ones  and  small  ones,  and 
many  gulfs,  bays  and  arms  of  the  sea,  which  I 
do  not  wish  to  name  because  my  intention  was  to 
choose  only  noteworthy  facts,  the  principal  ones, 
of  that  land  and  to  speak  of  them  in  detail,  so 
that  I  should  not  be  charged  with  prolixity,  but 
should  satisfy  all  with  brevity. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  31 

CHAPTER  III. 

Or  THE  CAPTAINCIES  AND  SETTLEMENTS  OF 
THE  PORTUGUESE  IN  THE  PROVINCE. 

This  Province  contains  eight  Captaincies 
settled  by  the  Portuguese,  as  one  proceeds  south- 
ward from  the  Equator,26  each  one  having  fifty 
leagues  of  coast-line  or  thereabouts,  separated 
from  one  another  by  lines  drawn  parallel  with 
the  Equator  from  east  to  west;  they  are  contained 
between  the  Ocean  and  the  Line  of  Demarcation27 
of  the  Kings  of  Portugal  and  Castille.  And  to 
each  of  these  Captaincies  the  King,  Dom  Joao 
III,  desirous  of  establishing  the  Christian  Re- 
ligion in  those  regions,  chose  and  sent  for  govern- 
ing each  one  of  them  a  vassal  of  noble  blood  and 
ability  in  whom  he  had  confidence.28  They  built 
their  cities  along  the  coast  in  those  places  which 
seemed  to  them  most  convenient  and  suitable  for 
those  who  were  to  live  there.29  All  these  Cap- 
taincies are  now  well  peopled,  and  in  the  more 
important  places  there  are  garrisons  with  much 
heavy  artillery  to  defend  and  protect  them  from 
enemies  coming  from  the  sea,  as  well  as  from  the 
land.  Near  the  towns  were  many  Indians  when 
the  Portuguese  first  began  to  colonize;  but  be- 


32  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

cause  these  same  Indians  revolted  against  them, 
and  committed  many  acts  of  treachery,  the  Gov- 
ernours  and  Captains  of  the  land  destroyed  them 
little  by  little,  and  killed  off  a  great  many  of 
them;  others  fled  into  the  sertao,  and  thus  the 
land  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  towns  is  un- 
occupied by  aborigines.  However,  some  villages 
of  the  Indians  remained  in  the  neighbourhood, 
those  who  were  peaceful  and  friendly  with  the 
Portuguese  inhabitants.  \In  order  that  I  may 
mention  all  [the  Captaincies]  in  the  present 
chapter,  I  shall  in  passing  name  only  the  first 
Captains  to  conquer  them,  and  name  specifically 
the  towns,  sites,  and  ports  where  the  Portuguese 
reside,  giving  them  in  order  as  they  lie  from  north 
to  south,  as  follows : 

The  first  and  most  ancient  is  called  Ta- 
maraca,  which  took  its  name  from  a  small  island 
where  the  first  settlement  was  situated.  Pero 
Lopez  de  Sousa  was  he  who  first  conquered  it  and 
freed  it  from  the  French,  in  whose  possession  it 
was  when  he  came  there  to  settle :  this  is  an  island 
whose  inhabitants  are  separated  from  the  main- 
land by  an  arm  of  the  sea  which  surrounds  it  and 
into  which  empty  several  streams  from  the  sertao. 
There  are  two  bars  parallel  with  the  coast  and  the 
island  between  them:  over  one  of  the  bars  any 
large  ship  may  pass  and  come  to  anchor  close 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  33 

to  the  town  which  is  only  about  half  a  league  off. 
The  north  bar  may  be  used  as  well  by  ships  of 
smaller  size ;  because  of  its  shallowness  it  will  not 
admit  the  larger  ones.  North  of  the  island,  this 
Captaincy  possesses  many  broad  and  luxuriant 
fields,  where  in  these  days  there  are  large  ranches ; 
and  its  population  will  increase  and  flourish  with 
as  much  prosperity  as  that  of  any  of  the  other 
Captaincies,  if  the  Captain  himself,  Pero  Lopez,30 
will  reside  there  a  few  years  more  and  not  leave 
the  colony  unprotected  during  the  time  it  is  being 
settled. 

The  second  Captaincy  which  follows  next  is 
called  Paranambuco:31  this  Duarte  Coelho  con- 
quered. He  built  his  principal  town  on  a  height 
visible  from  the  sea  lying  five  leagues  from  the 
island  of  Tamaraca,  in  eight  degrees  latitude.  It 
is  called  Olinda  and  is  one  of  the  noblest  and 
most  populous  cities  of  those  regions.  Five 
leagues  inland  there  is  another  town  called 
Igarogu,  which  has  for  another  name  Villa  dos 
Cosmos.  And  besides  the  inhabitants  of  these 
towns  there  are  many  others  who  are  scattered 
about  on  the  sugar  mills  and  ranches,  here  as  in 
the  other  Captaincies,  all  the  surrounding  terri- 
tory being  settled.  The  soil  here  is  of  the  best 
and  the  inhabitants  have  cultivated  it  more  than 
in  any  of  the  other  Captaincies  of  the  Province; 


34  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

for  the  inhabitants  are  much  favoured  and  aided 
by  the  Indians  of  the  land  from  among  whom 
they  get  an  infinite  number  of  slaves  with  whom 
they  work  their  farms.  The  principal  reasons 
why  the  population  is  continuously  growing  are 
that  the  Captain  himself,  who  conquered  the 
country,  has  made  a  continuous  sojourn  there, 
and  that  it  is  visited  by  more  ships  from  Portu- 
gal, as  it  is  nearer  to  it  than  any  of  the  other  Cap- 
taincies farther  down  the  coask.  A  league  south 
of  Olinda  is  a  reef  or  low  line  of  rock  which  is 
the  port  where  the  ships  enter.  The  debarcation 
takes  place  on  the  beach  and  also  on  the  bank  of 
a  small  river  which  runs  close  to  the  town  itself. 

The  third  Captaincy  going  south  is  that  of 
Bahia  de  Todos  os  Sanctos,  belonging  to  the  King 
our  Master.  There  reside  the  Governour,  the 
Bishop  and  the  Ouvidor  Geral32  for  the  whole 
coast.  The  first  Captain  to  conquer  it  and  to  be- 
gin the  colonization  was  Francisco  Pereira  Cou- 
tinho;33  he  was  overwhelmed  by  the  Indians  in  a 
great  war  they  waged  against  him,  the  impetus 
of  which  he  could  not  withstand,  so  many  were 
the  enemies  who  leagued  against  the  Portuguese 
everywhere  in  those  regions.  Afterwards  it  was 
once  more  restored  and  colonized  by  Thome  de 
Sousa,  the  first  Governour  General  in  those  parts. 
And  from  then  on  the  inhabitants  kept  steadily 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  35 

increasing  in  number  as  well  as  in  their  posses- 
sions. So  that  today  the  Captaincy  of  Todos  os 
Sanctos  has  more  Portuguese  citizens  than  any 
other  Captaincy  of  the  Province,  j  There  are 
three  populous  and  noble  cities,)near  one  another, 
located  one  hundred  leagues  from  the  cities  of 
Paranambuco,  in  thirteen  degrees  latitude.  The 
principal  one,  where  the  Governour  of  the  land 
and  the  other  nobility  live,  is  the  City  of  Salvador.^ 
Another  one  is  near  the  bar  and  is  called  Villa 
Velha,  {he  first  settlement  located  in  the  Cap- 
taincy. J  After  Thome  de  Sousa  became  Gover- 
nour, he  built  the  city  of  Salvador  a  little  more 
than  half  a  league  away,  as  that  was  a  fitter  and 
more  appropriate  location  for  the  inhabitants  of 
the  country.  Four  leagues  inland  there  is  another 
city  called  Paripe  which  is  also  an  incorporated 
city  like  the  others.*}  All  these  settlements  are 
located  on  the  shore  of  a  large  and  beautiful  bay 
where  any  ships,  no  matter  how  large,  may  enter 
with  security:  it  is  three  leagues  wide  and  navi- 
gable fifteen  leagues  inland.  There  are  many 
islands  in  it  of  remarkable  soil.  It  is  much  cut 
up  into  arms  and  coves  of  which  the  inhabitants 
make  use  to  go  in  small  boats  to  their  ranches. 

The  fourth  Captaincy,  that  of  Ilheos,  was 
given  to  Jorge  de  Figueiredo  Correa,  a  nobleman 
of  the  household  of  the  King  our  Master;  by  his 


36  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

order  it  was  colonized  by  Ifoao  Dalmeida,  who 
built  his  town  thirty  leagues  from  Bahia  de 
Todos  os  Sanctos,  in  latitude  fourteen  and  two- 
thirds  degrees.  It  is  a  very  pretty  and  populous 
city,  on  a  slope  in  sight  of  the  sea,  beside  a  river 
which  ships  enter.  This  river  also  is  divided 
inland  into  many  branches  by  the  sides  of  which 
the  inhabitants  of  the  whole  country  have 
the  cultivated  fields  of  their  estates;  they  move 
about  in  boats  and  dugouts  as  in  the  Bahia 
de  Todos  os  Sanctos. 

>•% 

The  fifth  Captaincy  is  known  as  Porto  Se- 
guro  and  was  conquered  by  Pero  do  Campo  Tou- 
rinho.  j  There  are  two  settlements  located  thirty 
leagued  from  those  of  Ilheos,  in  sixteen  and  a  half 
degrees :  between  them  runs  a  river  with  a  reef  at 
its  mouth  forming  a  harbour  where  ships  enter. 
The  principal  town  is  in  two  sections,  one  on 
(  the  crest  of  a  steep  cliff  facing  north,  above  the 
\  sea,  the  other  on  the  plain  beside  the  river.  The 
other  town  is  named  Sancto  Amaro,  and  is  one 
league  south  of  the  river.  Two  leagues  to  the 
north  of  this  reef  is  another  one,  [behind  which] 
lies  the  harbour  the  fleet  entered  when  the  dis- 
covery of  the  Province  was  made.  And  because 
at  that  time  the  name  of  Porto  Seguro  was  given 
it,  as  I  have  related  above,  the  Captaincy  took  the 
same  name  and  is  called  Porto  Seguro. 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  37 

r~ 

The  sixth  Captaincy  is  that  of  Spirito 
Sancto,  conquered  by  Vasco  Fernandez  Coutinho. 
The  town  is  located  on  a  little  island  about  sixty 
leagues  from  the  towns  of  Porto  Seguro,  in  lati- 
tude twenty  degrees.  This  island  lies  in  a  very 
broad  river,  about  a  league  above  the  bar,  up  in 
the  sertao :  in  this  river  they  take  an  infinite  num- 
ber of  fish,  and  on  shore  an  infinite  quantity  of 
game,  with  which  the  inhabitants  are  always 
sufficiently  supplied.  This  is  the  most  fertile 
Captaincy  and  the  best  provided  of  all  on  the 
coast  with  the  products  of  the  soilA 

The  seventh  Captaincy  is  that  of  Rio  de 
Janeiro,35  which  Mem  de  Sa  conquered,  and,  hav- 
ing engaged  in  perilous  combats,  he  freed  it  by 
force  of  arms  from  the  French  who  were  occupy- 
ing it,  he  being  the  Governour  General  of  those 
parts.  There  is  a  noble  city  there  of  many  in- 
habitants called  Sao  Sebastiao  which  is  seventy- 
five  leagues  from  Spirito  Sancto,  in  latitude 
twenty-three  degrees.  This  town  is  built  near  the 
bar  along  an  arm  of  the  sea,  which  enters  seven 
leagues  inland  and  is  five  across  in  the  widest 
place,  and  at  its  mouth,  where  it  is  narrowest, 
only  a  third  of  a  league.  In  the  middle  of  the  bar 
there  is  a  flat  rock  fifty-six  fathoms36  long  and 
twenty-six  wide,  on  which  a  fort  may  be  built  to 
insure  the  defense  of  the  country.  The  bar  is  one 
of  the  safest  and  best  in  those  regions,  and  any 


38  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

ship  may  enter  or  leave  it  in  any  weather  without 
fear  or  danger.  The  soil  of  this  Captaincy  is  of 
the  best,  and  better  fitted  to  enrich  the  inhabitants 
than  any  other  soil  in  the  Province:  J  do  not  be- 
lieve that  any  one  who  goes  out  there  with  that 
hope  will  be  deceived. 

The  last  Captaincy  is  that  of  Sao  Vicente,37 
conquered  by  Martim  Affonso  de  Sousa.  There 
are  four  towns  in  it;  two  of  them  are  situated  on 
an  island  which  an  arm  of  the  sea,  resembling  a 
river,  separates  from  the  mainland.  These  two 
towns  are  forty-five  leagues  from  Rio  de  Janeiro, 
in  latitude  twenty-four  degrees.  This  arm  of  the 
sea  which  surrounds  the  island  has  two  bars,  one 
at  each  end.  One  of  them  is  shallow,  and  not 
very  wide,  where  only  small  craft  may  enter;  be- 
side it  is  built  the  oldest  of  the  towns,  called  Sao 
Vicente.38  A  league  and  a  half  from  the  other 
bar  (which  is  the  main  one  where  large  ships  or 
craft  of  any  description  enter  when  they  come 
Ao  this  Captaincy)  is  located  the  other  town  called 
Sanctos. )  Here,  because  it  is  the  port  of  call,  live 
the  Captain  or  his  lieutenant,  and  the  other  offi- 
cials of  the  council  and  government.  Five  leagues 
south  there  is  another  settlement  called  Hitan- 
haem.  There  is  another  twelve  leagues  inland 
named  Sao  Paulo,  which  the  Fathers  of  the  Com-'; 
pany  [Jesuits]  founded,  where  there  are  many 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  39 

inhabitants,  the  greater  portion  of  them  born  of 
native  Indian  mothers  and  Portuguese  fathers. 
There  is  also  a  similar  island  to  the  north  sepa- 
rated from  the  mainland  by  another  arm  of  the 
sea  which  joins  the  first  one :  on  its  bar  there  are 
two  fortresses,  well  equipped  with  artillery,  one 
on  each  side  to  defend  this  Captaincy  from  the 
Indians  and  sea-pirates.39  Formerly  they  used 
the  bar  as  a  point  of  embarcation  and  here  their 
enemies  used  to  inflict  great  damage  upon  the  in- 
habitants. 

There  are  many  other  towns  in  all  these 
Captaincies,  besides  those  I  mention,  where  many 
Portuguese  dwell;  of  these  I  do  not  wish  to  speak 
here,  for  it  is  my  intention  to  indicate  only  the 
most  renowned,  where  there  are  officers  of  justice 
and  which  are  self-governing  just  like  any  town 
or  city  in  this  Kingdom. 


40  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

CHAPTER  IV. 

OF  THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  INHABITANTS 

OF  THE  CAPTAINCIES  AND  OF  THEIR 

MODE  OF  LIVING. 

(  From  the  time  the  Province  of  Sancta  Cruz 
was  peopled  by  the  Portuguese,  all  the  territory 
was  under  one  jurisdiction,  over  which  the  Gov- 
ernour General  presided  on  behalf  of  the  King 
our  Master,  with  power  over  the  other  .Captains 
who  lived  [one]  in  each  Captaincy.4^}  But  as  the 
Captaincies  were  far  away  from  one  another  and 
increasing  rapidly  in  population,  the  country  has 
now  been  divided  into  two  jurisdictions ;  namely, 
one  established  in  the  Captaincy  of  Porto  Seguro 
in  the  north  and  the  other  in  Spirito  Sancto  in 
the  south;41  and  in  each  one  of  them  presides  a 
Governour  with  equal  power.  ,  The  Governour  of 
the  north  lives  at  Bahia  de  Todos  os  Sanctos  and 
the  other  one  of  the  south  at  Rio  de  Janeiro.  And 
so  each  is  located  in  the  centre  of  his  jurisdiction, 
in  order  that  the  inhabitants  may  be  better  and 
more  conveniently  governed.  To  come  to  the 
mode  of  living  and  the  sustenance  of  the  inhabi- 
tants. As  for  the  dwellings,  they  are  continually 
building  better  and  more  costly  houses;  for  at 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  41 

first  there  were  none  in  the  country  but  one-story 
mud  huts42  with  roofs  of  palm  leaves.  Now  they 
build  two-story  dwellings  of  stone  and  mortar, 
with  tiled  roofs  and  wainscotted  like  those  of  this 
country.  There  are  long  and  beautiful  streets  of 
them  in  most  of  the  towns  I  have  named.  And 
thus  before  long  (according  as  the  population 
increases)  it  is  expected  there  will  be  many  sump- 
tuous edifices  and  churches,  which  will  add  dis- 
tinction to  the  country.  The  majority  of  the  in- 
habitants who  are  scattered  throughout  these  Cap- 
taincies, in  fact  nearly  all  of  them,  hold  their 
lands  in  allotments43  given  and  bestowed  upon 
them  by  the  Captains  and  Governours  of  the 
country.  The  first  thing  they  try  to  obtain  is 
slaves  to  work  the  farms;  and  any  one  who  suc- 
ceeds in  obtaining  two  pairs  or  a  half-dozen  of 
them  (although  he  may  not  have  another  earthly 
possession)  has  the  means  to  sustain  his  family 
in  a  respectable  way;  for  one  fishes  for  him,  an- 
other hunts  for  him,  and  the  rest  cultivate  and 
till  his  fields,  and  consequently  there  is  no  ex- 
pense for  the  maintenance  of  his  slaves  or  of  his 
household.44^  From  this,  one  may  infer  how  very 
extensive  are  the  estates  of  those  who  own  two 
hundred  or  three  hundred  slaves,  for  there  are 
many  colonists  who  have  that  number  or  more. 
The  inhabitants,  for  the  most  part,  are  on  very 


42  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

good  terms  with  one  another  and  are  happy  to  be 
of  assistance  to  one  another  with  their  slaves,  and 
to  relieve  the  poor  who  have  just  settled  in  the 
country.  That  is  a  universal  custom  in  these 
regions:  and  they  perform  many  other  pious  acts, 
so  that  all  have  a  competency  and  there  are  no 
beggars  who  go  from  door  to  door  asking  alms 
as  in  this  country  [Portugal]. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  43 


CHAPTER  V. 

ABOUT  THE  PLANTS,  FOOD-STUFFS  AND  FRUITS 
IN  THE  PROVINCE. 

There  is  such  an  abundance  and  such  va- 
riety of  plants,  fruits  and  herbs  in  this  Province, 
of  which  one  could  point  out  so  many  peculiari- 
ties, that  it  would  be  an  endless  task  to  write 
about  them  here  or  to  give  a  detailed  account  of 
the  properties  of  them  all.  Therefore  I  shall 
mention  only  a  few  in  particular,  principally 
those  whose  properties  and  fruits  are  advan- 
tageous to  the  Portuguese.  First,  I  shall  describe 
that  plant  and  root  from  which  the  inhabitants 
obtain  sustenance  and  which  they  eat  in  place  of 
bread.  The  root  is  call  mandidca™  [manioc] 
and  the  plant  from  which  it  grows  is  about  the 
height  of  a  man.  This  plant  is  not  very  thick 
and  the  stalks  have  many  joints ;  when  they  want 
to  plant  a  field  of  it,  they  cut  it  into  pieces,  which 
they  put,  like  graft  stalks,  into  the  ground  after 
it  has  been  tilled,  and  from  them  new  shoots  put 
forth;  each  of  these  cuttings  produces  three  or 
four  roots  or  more  (according  to  the  quality  of  the 
soil  in  which  they  plant  it)  which  take  from  nine 
to  ten  months  to  grow;  except  in  Sao  Vicente, 


44  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

where  it  takes  three  years  because  the  ground  is 
colder  [than  to  the  north].  The  roots  at  the  end 
of  this  period  have  become  very  large  like  the 
inhames  [yams]  of  Sao  Thome,  although  most 
of  them  are  long  and  curved  like  the  horn  of  an 
ox.  After  they  have  reached  their  growth  in  this 
way,  if  the  inhabitants  do  not  then  wish  to  pull 
them  up  to  eat,  they  cut  off  the  plant  at  its  stalk, 
and  the  roots  will  remain  five  or  six  months  under 
ground  in  perfect  condition  without  spoiling:  in 
Sao  Vicente  they  will  keep  twenty  or  thirty  years*6 
in  the  same  way.  As  soon  as  they  pull  them  up, 
they  put  them  to  soak  in  water  for  three  or  four 
days,  and  after  they  are  soaked  they  thoroughly 
mash  them.  This  done,  they  put  the  paste  into 
long  narrow  bags  which  they  make  of  narrow 
withes  woven  as  in  a  basket;  and  in  this  they 
squeeze  out  the  juice  so  that  none  drips,  for  the 
juice  is  so  poisonous  and  the  venom  so  powerful, 
that  if  a  person  or  any  animal  whatsoever  drank 
it,  he  would  die  instantly.  After  they  have  cured 
it  in  this  way  they  put  it  in  an  earthen  vessel  over 
a  fire;  an  Indian  woman  keeps  stirring  it  until 
the  heat  of  the  fire  has  dispelled  all  the  moisture 
and  it  becomes  dry  and  is  ready  to  eat,  this 
process  consuming  about  half  an  hour.  This  is 
the  food  they  call  farinha  do  pdo  [wood-flour] ; 
with  it  the  inhabitants  and  natives  are  nourished. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  45 

They  have  two  kinds  of  flour,  one  called,  fwinha 
de  guerra  [war-flour]  and  the  other  farinha 
fresco,  [fresh  flour].  War-flour  is  made  of  the 
same  root ;  after  it  is  dried  it  is  toasted  so  that  it 
will  keep  more  than  a  year  without  spoiling.  The 
fresh  flour  is  more  delicate  and  of  better  flavour; 
but  it  will  keep  only  two  or  three  days,  after 
which  it  spoils.  They  make  from  this  same 
mandioca  another  food  which  they  call  beijus; 
these  are  like  obreas  [wafers],  only  thicker  and 
whiter,  and  some  are  flat  like  filhos"  [pancakes]. 
They  are  much  used  by  the  inhabitants  of  the 
country  (principally  those  of  Bahia  de  Todos  os 
Sanctos)  because  they  are  more  tasty  and  more 
easily  digested  than  the  flour. 

There  is  another  species  of  mandioca  which 
has  different  qualities,  called  aipim,  from  which, 
in  some  Captaincies,  they  make  bolos*s  [a  kind 
of  bread]  which  surpass  in  flavour  the  fresh 
bread  of  Portugal.  The  juice  of  this  root  is  not 
poisonous  like  the  juice  of  the  other,  and  will 
harm  no  living  thing  even  if  it  be  drunk.  They 
also  eat  this  root  roasted  like  batata  [sweet  po- 
tatoes] or  inhame  and  it  has  a  good  flavour. 
Aside  from  this  there  is  much  milho  zaburro 
[maize],  from  which  they  make  a  very  white 
bread ;  and  much  rice,  and  many  species  of  beans 
and  other  vegetables,  all  in  great  plenty. 


46  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

There  is  another  plant  in  that  Province 
which  came  from  the  island  of  Sao  Thome,  the 
fruit  of  which  helps  to  nourish  many [.people  in 
the  region.49  This  plant  is  very  tender.- and  not 
very  tall;  it  has  no  branches  but  only  leaves 
which  are  six  or  seven  palms  long.  The  fruit  is 
called  bananas  [banana] :  these  are  shaped  like 
cucumbers  and  grow  in  bunches;  some  of  them 
are  so  large  as  to  contain  one  hundred  and  fifty 
or  more.  And  many  times  the  weight  is  so  great 
that  it  breaks  the  stalk  of  the  plant  in  the  middle. 
At  the  proper  time  they  gather  the  bunches,  and 
a  few  days  later  they  ripen.  After  they  have  been 
gathered  they  cut  down  the  plant,  for  it  bears  only 
once;  but  soon  suckers  shoot  out  from  the  same 
root  and  grow  up  like  the  others.  This  fruit  is 
very  savoury  and  one  of  the  best  of  the  country; 
it  has  a  skin  like  that  of  a  fig  (but  thicker)  which 
they  throw  away  when  they  eat  it :  but  when  over- 
indulged in,  it  causes  injury  to  the  health  and 
produces  fever. 

There  are  some  very  tall  trees  in  those  re- 
gions called  zabucaes™  [Brazilian  nuts],  on 
which  grows  a  cup-like  fruit  the  size  of  a  large 
cocoanut,  of  the  same  shape  as  a  Hindu  jar. 
These  cups  are  exceeding  hard  and  are  full  of 
very  sweet  and  tasty  nuts;  the  mouths  are  at  the 
lower  end  and  covered  with  flaps  [tapadoiras],61 


v  OF  SANTA  CRUZ  47 

which  really  do  not  look  as  if  grown  by  Nature 
but  as  though  made  by  human  industry.  And 
when  the  nuts  are  ripe,  these  flaps  fall  off  and 
the  nuts  themselves  begin  to  drop  out  one  at  a 
time  until  not  one  remains  in  the  cup. 

There  is  another  fruit  in  this  region  better 
still,  the  most  prized  by  the  inhabitants  of  all 
fruits;  jit  grows  on  a  humble  plant  near  the 
ground  f*  this  plant,  like  the  aloes  plant,  has 
spines.  They  call  this  fruit  ananazes52  [pine- 
apple] ;  they  grow  like  artichokes,  and  naturally 
resemble  pine-cones,  being  of  the  same  size  or  a 
little  larger.  When  ripe  they  have  a  very  sweet 
odour,  and  are  eaten  pared  and  cut  in  slices. 
They  are  so  savoury  that  in  every  one's  opinion 
there  is  no  fruit  in  Portugal  which  surpasses  them 
in  flavour.  And  therefore  jthe  inhabitants  strive 
harder  to  obtain  them,  and  hold  them  in  greater 
esfe'em  than  any  other  fruit  in  the  country^ 

There  is  another  fruit  which  grows  in  the 
thick  wood,  on  trees  like  pear-trees-or  apple-trees : 
it  is  like  peros  repinaldos*3  [a  variety  of  apple] 
in  form,  and  is  very  yellowy  They  call  it  cajus** 
[cashew] :  it  is  very  juicy, "and  is  eaten  in  hot 
weather  for  refreshment  as  it  is  very  cool  by  na- 
ture, and  it  would  be  astonishing  if  it  did 
one  harm  even  if  used  to  excess.)  On  the  point 
of  each  fruit  there  grows  a  nut  the  size  of  a  chest- 


48  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

nut  and  the  shape  of  a  bean :  this  sprouts  first  and 
grows  at  its  extremity  like  a  bloom.  The  shell  is 
very  bitter,  and  the  nut  when  roasted  is  very  hot 

and  more  tasteful  than  an  almond. 

r~~~^ 

There  are  in  the  Province  many  different 
varieties  of  fruit,  accessible  to  all;  they  are  so 
abundant  that  many  people  travelling  in  the  in- 
terior live  on  them  for  days  without  any  other 
sustenance.  The  fruits  I  am  describing  are  the 
ones  which  the  Portuguese  hold  in  highest  esteem 
and  consider  the  best  in  the  country.  ^  There  are 
some  Portuguese  fruits  which  grow  in  those  re- 
gions; namely,  many  varieties  of  melons,  cucum- 
bers, pomegranates,  and  figs  of  several  species; 
there  are  many  grape-vines  which  produce  grapes 
two  or  three  times  a  year:  all  fruits  are  so  abun- 
dant because  there  are  no  frosts  (as  I  have  said) 
to  do  them  any  harm.J  Of  cedrats,  citrons,  limes, 
lemons  and  oranges  there  is  an  infinite  number, 
because  these  thorny  trees  thrive  well  in  the  coun- 
try and  multiply  faster  than  others,  j 

Besides  the  trees  which  produce  these  fruits 
„  without    any    cultivation,    and    the    food-stuffs, 
(    there  are  others  which  the  inhabitants  raise  on 
their     farms;    namely,    sugar-cane    and    cotton 
plants  which  are  the  principal  crops"6f  the  region, 
in  the  cultivation  of  which  they  all  help  one  an- 
other and  gain  much  profit  in  all  the  Captaincies, 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  49 

especially  in  that  of  Paranambuco  where  nearly 
thirty  sugar  mills  have  been  built,  and  nearly  as 
many  at  Bahia  de  Salvadpr:  from  each  of  these 
there  is  a  large  yield  of  sugar  every  year,  and  a 
big  crop  of  cotton,  more,  without  comparison, 
than  in  any  of  the  other  Captaincies.  L  There  is 
also  much  brazil-wood  in  these  Captaincies,  on 
which  the  inhabitants  make  a  large  profit]]  it  is 
quite  evident  that  [this  wood  is  produced  by  the 
heat  of  the  sun,  JJnd  grows  under  the  influence 
of  its  rays;  because  it  is  found  only  in  the  torrid 
zone,  and  the  nearer  it  grows  to  the  Equinoctial 
Line,  the  better  it  is  and  the  finer  the  dyej  That 
is  the  reason  why  there  is  none  of  it  in  the  Cap- 
taincy of  Sao  Vicente,  or  south  of  it. 

There  is  a  species  of  tree  in  the  forests  of 
the  Captaincy  of  Paranambuco  called  copaiba,™ 
from  which  they  get  a  balsam  that  is  very  health- 
ful and  exceedingly  useful  in  many  kinds  of  sick- 
ness; it  has  especially  good  effect  in  illnesses 
that  come  from  chills,  and  draws  out  all  pain, 
however  serious,  in  a  very  short  space  of  time. 
For  bruises  or  wounds  of  any  kind,  it  has  the  same 
virtue,  for  as  soon  as  it  is  applied  to  them  they 
hastily  heal  without  a  scar,  in  such  a  way  that 
it  is  the  exception  to  be  able  to  discern  where 
[the  wounds]  have  been;  and  in  this  respect  they 
have  an  advantage  over  all  other  medicines. 


50  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

This  oil  is  not  easily  found  in  these  trees  at  all 
seasons  of  the  year;  nor  do  they  attempt  to  look 
for  it,  except  in  summer  which,  is  the  .season  when 
the  trees  produce  it  abundantly.  When  they  wish 
to  obtain  it,  they  make  cuts  or  holes  in  the  trunks 
of  the  trees,  from  which  the  predous  liqudr  ex^ 
udes  little  by  little  from  the  heart  of  the  tree. 
Nevertheless  they  do  not  find  it  in_all  -the- trees, 
but  only  in  some  of  them  which  for  that  reason 
they  call  female;  those  which  lack  it  they  call 
male;  and  in  this  respect  only  is  the  difference 
in  the  two  varieties;  for  in  size  and  appearance 
one  cannot  distinguish  one  from  the  other.  Most 
of  these  trees  are  found  with  the  bark  scratched 
by  animals,  which  instinctively  seek  them  as  a 
cure  for  their  wounds,  when  they 'are" Injured  or 
bitten  by  some  other  wild  animal.  There  is  an- 
other tree,  different  from  these,  in  the  Captaincies 
of  Ilheos  and  Spirito  Sancto  which  they"  call 
caborahiba,™  from  which  they  extract  another 
balsam: 'this  exudes  from  the  bark  of  the  tree 
and  smells  most  sweet.  It  also  is  advantageous 
for  the  same  infirmities,  and  those  who  obtain  it 
hold  it  in  great  esteem  and  sell  it  for  a  high  price ; 
because,  aside  from  the  fact  that  the  trees  are  very 
scarce,  those  who  seek  them  run  great  risks  from 
hidden  enemies  who  infest  the  forest  in  that  re- 
gion and  spare  no  one  whom  they  encounter. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  51 

Moreover,  there  is  a  certain  tree  in  the  Cap- 
taincy of  Sao  Vicente,  which  is  called  in  the 
language  of  the  Indians  obird  paramaqaci^ 
which  means  "wood  for  ills" :  three  drops  only  of 
the  sap  serves  amply  as  a  purge  and  an  emetic. 
If  any  one  swallow  a  quantity  such  as  [might  be 
contained]  in  the  shell  of  a  nut,  he  will  die  with- 
out delay. 

Of  the  other  plants  and  herbs  which  yield 
no  fruit,  and  of  whose  uses  nothing  is  known, 
many  things  might  be  written ;  but  I  shall  not , 
mention  them  here,  for  it  is  my  intention  (as  I  Or  c 
have  said  before)  only  to  give  data  of  the  things  ^^ 
which  benefit  the  inhabitants  of  the  country.  I 
shall  mention  only  a  very  noteworthy  one,  whose 
qualities  when  known  will,  I  believe,  cause  much 
wonderment  everywhere.  It  is  called  the  herya_ 
viva  [literally  and  actually  "sensitive plant"]  and 
has  some  resemblance  to  dog-briar.  When  any 
one  touches  it  with  his  hands  or  with  any  other 
object  whatsoever,  it  instantly  recoils  and  shrivels, 
in  such  a  way  that  one  would  say  it  seemed  a  liv- 
ing creature  annoyed  and  insulted  by  the  touch. 
And  after  it  has  become  calmer,  as  though  the 
insult  had  been  forgotten,  once  more  it  opens 
little  by  little  until  it  is  again  as  sturdy  and  green 
as  before.  This  plant  must  have  some  very  great 
virtue  hidden  from  us,  the  effect  of  which  will 


52  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

probably  not  be  less  worthy  of  admiration.  For 
we  know  that  of  all  the  plants  which  God  created, 
each  one  has,  in  the  field  of  usefulness,  a  special 
power  which  causes  certain  operations  for  which 
it  was  created :  how  much  greater  virtue  then  has 
this  one  which  I  wish  especially  to  point  out  as 
being  so  strange  and  different  from  all  other 
plants.58 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  53 


CHAPTER  VI. 

ABOUT  THE  ANIMALS  AND  POISONOUS 
REPTILES59  OF  THE  PROVINCE. 

As  this  Province  is  of  great  extent  and  for 
the  most  part  uninhabited  and  filled  with  very  tall 
trees  and  dense  thickets,  it  is  not  to  be  wondered 
at  that  there  should  be  a  vast  diversity  of  animals 
and  fierce  poisonous  reptiles:  even  among  us 
[Portuguese],  with  the  ground  cultivated  and 
thickly  settled,  yery_large  snakes  grow  in  the 
brambles,  and  they  tell  many  notable  stories  about 
them.  There  are  other  reptiles  and  harmful 
animals  which  may  be  found  scattered  in  the 
heaths  and  thickets ;  although  the  inhabitants  kill 
them  at  every  opportunity,  they  have  not  been 
able  to  exterminate  them,  as  we  know.  How 
much  more  then  [is  this  to  be  expected]  within 
the  Province,  where  the  climate  and  the  quality  of 
the  land  breezes  are  no  less  conducive  to  their 
propagation  than  is  the  ground  itself  with  its 
many  thickets,  as  I  have  mentioned,  favourable 
to  their  rearing.  Although  Nature  had  dispersed 
great  quantities  of  foul  insects  and  animals 
throughout  the  land,  there  were  no  domestic  ani- 
mals there  when  the  Portuguese  began  to  settle. 


54  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

But  after  they  had  become  acquainted  with  the 
country  and  had  recognized  the  profits  to  be  made 
out  of  stock-raising,  they  began  to  bring  horses60 
and  mares  from  Cape  Verde  Island,  so  that  today 
the  raising  of  this  stock  has  become  general 
throughout  all  the  Captaincies  of  the  Province. 
There  is  also  a  great  quantity  of  cattle  which  was 
brought  from  the  same  island  to  those  parts,  cows 
and. oxen  being  especially  abundant;  and  they  are 
increasing  rapidly  on  account  of  the  good  pastur- 
age. /The  other  animals  found  in  this  land  are 
naturally  wild;  and  there  are  some  strange  ones 
that  have  never  been  seen  in  any  other  country, 
which  I  shall  now  describe  here,  beginning  first 
with  those  that  are  eaten  here  and  with  whose 
flesh  the  inhabitants  are  abundantly  supplied  in 
all  the  Captaincies. 

There  are  many  deer;  and  a  great  variety 
of  the  hog  species;  namely,  the  wild  boar  as  in 
this  country;  and  others,  smaller,  whfch  have 
the  navel  on  the  back,61  of  which  a  very  large 
number  are  killed.  And  there  are  others  that  are 
eaten  that  are  bred  on  land  but  can  go  in  the 
water;  they  run  very  little  because  their  hind  feet 
are  long  and  their  front  ones  short ;  so  that  Nature 
has  provided  them  with  the  ability  to  go  under 
water  in  order  to  preserve  their  lives;  they  dive 
under  water  every  time  they  see  any  one  or  any- 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  55 

thing  that  frightens  them.62  And  their  meat,  as 
well  as  that  of  the  others,  is  very  savoury,  and  so 
wholesome  that  it  is  given  to  the  sick,  for  it  is 
beneficial  for  all  ailments  and  does  harm  to  no 
one. 

There  are  animals  which  they  call  antas 
[tapir]  shaped  like  a  mule  but  not  so  large,  with  a 
narrower  muzzle  and  a  long  upper  lip  like  an 
elephant's  trunk.  Their  ears  are  round  and  their 
tails  not  very  long:  they  are  ashy-grey  on  the 
body  and  white  on  the  belly.  These  antas  go  to 
pasture  only  at  night,  and  as  soon  as  dawn  ar- 
rives, they  hide  themselves  in  swampy  growth  or 
in  any  concealed  places  they  can  find,  and  there 
they  remain  the  whole  day,  hidden  like  night- 
birds  to  whom  daylight  is  hateful,  until  dusk 
again,  when  once  more  they  go  out  to  feed,  as  is 
their  custom.  The  meat  of  these  animals  has  the 
flavour  of  beef  which  it  resembles  in  all  particu- 
lars.]- 

(There  is  another  animal  about  the  size  of 
the  hare  called  cotia  [coati]  ;63  and  it  resembles 
it  in  appearance  and  flavour.  These  cotms  are 
reddish-brown  and  have  small  ears  and  a  tail 

so  short  that  it  can  scarcely  be  seenr~\ 

C-^ 
There  are  other  larger  ones  known  as  pacas, 

which  have  a  round  muzzle  and  are  about  the 
build  of  a  cat  with  a  tail  like  the  cotia.  They  are 


56  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

greyish  and  mottled,  spotted  with  white  over  the 
whole  body.  When  they  wish  to  stew  them  for 
eating,  they  take  off  the  hair  as  in  the  case  of  a 
sucking  pig,  and  do  not  skin  them,  because  the 
hide  is  very  tender  and  savoury;  the  meat  thereof 
is  also  tasty  and  one  of  the  best  in  the  country. 
There  is  another  remarkable  animal,  which,  in 
my  judgment,  is  the  strangest  of  all  animals  that 
have  been  seen  up  to  the  present  time.  They  are 
called  tatus  [armadillos]  and  are  about  the  size 
of  a  sucking  pig ;  they  have  a  shell  like  that  of  a 
tortoise  which  is  divided  into  many  jointed  plates, 
so  arranged  that  they  look  like  an  armoured 
horse.  They  have  a  long  tail  covered  with  the 
same  shell ;  their  muzzle  is  like  that  of  a  sucking 
pig,  although  somewhat  sharper,  and  nothing 
projects  beyond  the  shell  save  the  head.  They 
have  short  legs  and  live  in  burrows  like  rabbits. 
The  meat  of  these  animals  is  the  best  and  most 
prized  of  any  in  the  land,  and  the  flavour  is  al- 
most like  [that  of]  chicken. 

There  are  also  rabbits  like  those  of  our  own 
country,  from  whose  appearance  they  differ  in 
no  respect.  1 

Finally,  all  the  inhabitants  have  access  to 
them,  as  well  as  to  all  other  varieties  of  game 
which  I  have  mentioned,  and  they  can  kill  any- 
where as  much  of  it  as  they  desire,  with  little 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  57 

effort,  for  they  are  not  restricted  by  game  laws  as 
in  Portugal;  and  a  single  Indian  (if  he  be  a  good 
hunter)  is  enough  to  furnish  a  household  with 
meat  from  the  forest;  and  scarcely  a  day  passes 
without  his  killing  either  a  pig  or  a  deer,  or  some 
of  the  other  animals  I  have  mentioned. 

There  are  other  wild  animals  in  the  Prov- 
ince, which  are  harmful  to  game  as  well  as  to  the 
cattle  of  the  inhabitants :  they  are  called  tigres 
[  tigers J^  although  there  most  people  call  them 
ongas  [jaguars] ;  but  some  people,  who  have 
seen  tigers  elsewhere  and  recognize  them,  affirm 
that  they  are  such.  These  animals  naturally 
resemble  cats  from  which  they  differ  in  one  point 
only,  their  size,  for  some  are  as  large  as  a  calf 
and  others  are  smaller.  Their  coats  are  of  many 
distinct  colours,  to  wit,  streaked  with  white,  brown 
or  black.  When  they  are  hungry,  they  enter  the 
corrals  and  kill  many  heifers  or  young  bullocks, 
which  they  carry  off  to  the  forest  to  eat:  they  do 
the  same  to  any  animal  they  may  encounter.  And 
consequently,  when  they  are  very  famished,  they 
will  attack  a  man.^)  In  that  region  they  are  so 
daring,  that  the  following  happened:  an  Indian 
climbed  a  tree  to  escape  from  one  of  these  animals 
which  was  pursuing  him,  and  the  tiger  waited 
at  the  foot  of  the  tree,  and  was  not  frightened 
away  by  the  people  who  hurried  to  the  scene  from 


58  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

the  village  in  response  to  the  cries  of  the  Indian; 
in  spite  of  all  their  attempts  he  [the  tiger] 
remained  very  securely  guarding  his  victim,  until 
nightfall  when  the  people  went  home  not  daring 
to  attack  the  tiger,  telling  the  Indian  to  stay 
where  he  was  and  the  tiger  would  get  tired  of 
waiting.  And  when  they  came  in  the  morning, 
they  found  nothing  but  the  bones  of  the  Indian 
(whether  he  had  wished  to  descend,  thinking  the 
tiger  had  gone,  or  whether  he  had  happened  ac- 
cidentally to  fall,  or  however  it  had  occurred  [is 
not  known]  ).64  On  the  other  hand,  when  they  are 
satiated,  they  are  very  cowardly  and  so  pusillani- 
mous, that  any  dog  who  runs  at  them  is  enough 
to  put  them  to  flight;  and  sometimes  they  are  so 
harried  with  fear  that  they  climb  a  tree  and  there 
allow  themselves  to  be  shot  with  arrows  without 
any  resistance.  T*  Finally,  excessive  satiety  not 
only  dissipates  prudence,  courage,  and  the  wit  of 
mankind,  but  also  among  the  brute  beasts  it 
weakens  and  incapacitates  the  use  of  their  natural 
powers  even  when  they  are  in  need  of  using  them 

in  the  defense  of  their  lives.    •& 

"j  /^ 

&/  There  is  in_that  country  another  species  of 
animal  called  (cerigoes  [opossum],  which  are 
greyish  and  about  the  size  of  a  fox :  they  have  an 
opening  lengthwise  in  their  bellies  so  arranged 
that  there  is  a  pouch  on  each  side65  in  which  they 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  59 

carry  their  young.  And  each  young  one  has  a 
teat  in  its  mouth  which  it  never  lets  go  until  it  is 
weaned.  Of  these  animals  it  is  affirmed  that  they 
never  conceive  the  young  in  the  belly  but  only  in 
these  pouches,  because  of  all  that  have  been 
taken  none  have  been  pregnant,  Moreover,  aside 
from  this,  there  are  other  very  likely  conjectures, 
[according  to  which]  it  is  considered  impossible 
for  them  to  bear  young  as  all  other  animals 
do  (according  to  the  laws  of  Nature). 

^/  A  certain  animal  is  found  also  in  those  parts 
which  is  callecK  perguiga™  [sloth]  (of  about  the 
same  size  as  these  [the  cerigoes] )  ;  it  has  an  ugly 
face  and  claws  almost  as  long  as  a  finger.  It  has 
on  the  back  of  the  head  a  long  shock  of  hair  which 
covers  its  neck;  and  it  walks  always  with  its 
belly  on  the  ground,  without  ever  standing  on 
its  feet  like  other  animals;  and  thus  it  moves 
about  with  such  halting  steps  that,  even  if  it 
crawls  with  the  utmost  effort  for  fifteen  days,  it 
will  not  get  farther  than  a  stone's  throw.  Its  food 
is  the  leaves  of  trees  and  in  these  it  spends  most 
of  the  time:  jt  needs  at  least  two  days  to  climb  a 
tree  and  as  long  to  come  down.  And  even  though 
they  kill  them  with  clubs  and  other  animals  pur- 
sue them,  they  never,  move  more  rapidly  at  one 
time  than  at  another,  j 


60  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

V  There  is  another  species  of  animal  in  that 
land  called  1  tamendods  [ant-eater]  which  are 
about  the  size  of  sheep :  they  are  grey  and  have  a 
very  long  muzzle,  narrow  underneath;  their 
mouth  is  not  wide  like  the  mouth  of  other  animals 
but  is  so  narrow  that  it  will  scarcely  admit  two 
fingers.  They  have  a  very  thin  tongue  which  is 
almost  three  palms  in  length.  The  females  have 
two  teats  on  the  breasts  like  a  woman,  and  an 
udder  is  located  at  the  back  of  the  neck,  between 
the  shoulder-blades,  from  which  the  milk  runs 
down  to  the  teats  where  the  young  suck.  Also 
each  one  has  two  finger  nails  on  each  paw  as  long 
as  the  middle  finger,  and  broad,  shaped  like  a 
gouge.  They  also  have  a  very  silky,  long-haired 
tail,  as  long  almost  as  that  of  a  horse^  All  the 
extremes  found  in  these  animals  are  necessary  to  , 
preserve  their  life;  for  they  eat  nothing  but  ants. 
And  as  this  is  the  case,  they  go  and  scratch  in  the 
ant-hills  where  the  ants  are:  when  the  ants  are 
aroused,  they  stick  out  their  tongue  and  lay  it 
where  they  have  been  scratching,  and  as  fast  as 
it  is  covered  with  ants  they  draw  it  into  their 
mouth,  and  they  keep  on  doing  this  until  they  are 
satiated.  When  they  wish  to  shelter  themselves 
or  to  hide  from  anything,  they  raise  their  tail 
over  their  back  and  under  the  long  silky  hair  they 
are  entirely  covered  so  no  part  of  them  is  visible. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  61 

/  There  are  many  monkeysJn  the  land  and  of 
many  species,  as  is  already  known:  and  because 
they  are  so  well  known  everywhere,  I  shall  not 
particularize  here  very  extensively  on  their  char- 
acteristics. I  shall  treat  only  in  a  few  brief 
words  of  one  thing  about  them  which  among 
others  deserves  mention. 

./There  is  a  red  variety  not  very  large  which 
gives  forth  a  very  sweet  scent,  perceptible  to  any 
one  who  approaches  them,  and  if  one  strokes 
them  with  the  hand  or  they  happen  to  be  sweating 
the  odour  is  much  stronger  and  is  perceptible  to 
every  one  in  the  vicinity.  Of  these  there  are  very 
few  in  the  land  and  they  are  found  only  far  in- 
land, in  the  sertao. 

There  is  a  black  variety  larger  than  these, 
which  have  a  beard  like  a  man:  they  are  so  bold 
that  it  often  happens  when  the  Indians  hit  one 
of  them  that  he  will  pull  the  arrow  out  of  his  own 
body  with  his  hands  and  hurl  it  back  at  the  one 
who  shot  it.  By  nature  they  are  very  brave  and 
the  most  untractable  of  all  the  varieties  of  the 
region. 

There  are  two  very  small  varieties  of  mon- 
key on  the  coast  not  much  larger  than  a  weasel; 
namely,  one  kind  quite  tawny  and  the  other 
greyish,  which  are  commonly  called  sagois 
[saguin].67  The  tawny  ones  have  a  very  fine 


62  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

coat  and  resemble  a  lion,  both  in  the  face  and  in 
the  shape  of  the  body:  they  are  very  beautiful 
and  are  found  only  in  Rio  de  Janeiro. j  The 
greyish  ones  are  found  to  the  northward  in  all 
the  other  Captaincies.  They  are  also  much 
prized,  but  they  are  not  so  pleasing  to  the  eye  as 
the  former.  Both  kinds  are  so  tender  and  deli- 
cate by  nature  that  when  they  take  them  from 
their  native  habitat  to  ship  them  to  this  Kingdom, 
as  soon  as  they  reach  a  colder  atmosphere  nearly 
all  die,  and  it  is  a  wonder  if  any  one  survives 
[the  voyage]. 

Back  in  the  forest  also  there  are  many  large 
snakes  of  different  species,  which  the  Indians 
call  by  different  names  according  to  their  pecu- 
liarities, v  There  are  some  in  the  land  so  im- 
measurably large68  that  they  can  swallow  a  deer 
or  any  other  similar  animal  whole~-  But  this  is 
not  so  astonishing,  since  we  can  see  in  our  own 
country  today  rather  small  snakes  which  will 
swallow  a  hare  or  a  rabbit  in  the  same  way,  al- 
though they  have  a  gullet  which  at  sight  seems 
little  larger  than  one's  finger:  and  when  they 
swallow  these  animals  it  dilates  and  gives  in 
such  a  way  that  the  whole  animal  passes  within 
and  they  keep  on  swallowing  until  it  arrives  at 
the  stomach,  as  is  well  known  among  us.  How 
much  more  likely  then  that  these  of  which  I  speak 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  63 

will  find  less  difficulty,  on  account  of  their  great 
size,  in  swallowing  any  animal  on  earth,  no  mat- 
ter how  large.  , 

There  are  others  of  another  species,  not  so 
large  as  the  former,  but  more  poisonous.89  They 
carry  at  the  end  of  their  tail  something  like  a 
rattle,  and  wherever  they  go  they  keep  on  sound- 
ing it;  and  whoever  hears  this  takes  care  to  pro- 
tect himself  from  them.  Besides  these,  there  are 
many  others  of  different  species  (which  I  do  not 
enumerate,  for  fear  of  being  prolix)  which  are 
for  the  most  part  so  harmful  and  poisonous 
(especially  those  they  call  gerardcas  [-vipers]) 
that,  if  a  person  is  bitten,  it  is  marvellous  if  he 
escapes;  and  the  longest  time  he  will  survive  is 
twenty-four  hours. 

There  are  also  some  very  large  lizards  in  the 
fresh  water  lakes  and  rivers,  whose  testicles  have 
an  odour  more  fragrant  than  musk;  and  whatso- 
ever clothing  they  touch,  the  scent  will  remain  in 
it  for  several  days.70 

There  are  in  that  Province  many  other  ani- 
mals and  venomous  reptiles  of  which  I  shall  not 
treat,  for  they  are  so  many  and  in  such  wealth  of 
varieties  that  it  would  be  a  long  narrative  just  to 
name  them  here  and  to  catalogue  their  character- 
istics, there  being,  as  I  say,  such  an  infinite  num- 


64  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

her  of  them  in  those  regions,  where  on  account  of 
the  nature  of  the  soil  and  of  the  climate,  one  could 
not  expect  otherwise.  Because  the  winds  which 
proceed  from  inland  become  infected  with  the  de- 
cay of  plants,  grasses  and  swamps,  which  are 
fertilized  by  the  influence  of  the  sun  which  plays 
so  large  a  part  in  these  things:  thus  are  created 
very  poisonous  animals  which  are  to  be  found  in 
the  maritime  regions  and  back  in  the  sertao  in 
innumerable  quantities,  as  I  have  already  indi- 
cated. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  65 


CHAPTER  VII. 

ABOUT  THE  BIRDS  OF  THE  PROVINCE. 

Among  all  things  that  may  be  mentioned  in 
the  present  history,  the  most  pleasing  and  beau- 
tiful offered  to  human  sight  is  the  great  variety 
of  delicate  and  brilliant  colours  of  the  countless 
birds  which  breed  in  the  Province:  because  these 

•e»-J 

are  of  such  diversity,  (1  shall  speak  only  of  the 
ones  about  which  something  [interesting]  may  be 
noted,  or  of  the  ones  most  esteemed  by  the  Portu- 
guese and  Indians  who  live  thereri 


There  are  in  the  Province  very  handsome 
birds  of  prey  of  many  species;  namely,  eagles, 
falcons,  hawks,  and  others  of  divers  kinds  and 
colours  which  have  the  same  characteristics.  The 
eagles  are  very  large  and  powerful;  and  they 
swoop  down  with  such  fury  on  any  bird  or  animal 
they  wish  to  seize,  that  sometimes  one  may  be  seen 
so  intently  pursuing  its  prey  that  it  will  strike 
against  the  house  of  a  colonist,  and  there  fall  in 
sight  of  all  the  people  without  being  able  to  rise 
again.  ^  The  Indians  of  the  country  are  accus- 
tomed to  take  the  young  [eagles]  when  very 
small  and  raise  them  in  cages,  so  that  when  they 
are  grown  they  can  use  their  feathers  to  bedeck 


66  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

themselves.;  The  falcons  are  like  those  of  this 
country,  but  there  is  one  variety  whose  feet  are 
so  covered  with  feathers,  and  so  velvety,  that  one 
can  scarcely  see  the  claws.  They  are  so  swift 
that  it  would  be  a  miracle  for  any  bird  or  prey  to 
escape  them,  once  it  is  attacked.  The  hawks  are 
also  very  quick  and  powerful,  especially  the  small 
variety,  which,  numerous  as  merlins,  will  attack 
a  partridge  and  carry  it  off  in  their  talons.  And, 
furthermore,  they  are  so  daring,  that  it  often  hap- 
pens when  they  are  after  a  bird,  they  will  pounce 
upon  it  right  before  people,  and  will  not  with- 
draw nor  let  go,  however  much  one  tries  to 
frighten  them.  The  other  kinds  of  birds  in  the 
region,  those  edible,  of  which  the  inhabitants 
avail  themselves,  are  the  following.  \ 

There  is  a  certain  variety  called  macucagods 
which  are  black  and  larger  than  hens :  they  have 
three  layers  of  meat  on  the  breast,71  and  are  fat 
and  tender;  thus  the  inhabitants  hold  them  in 
much  esteem,  for  they  are  very  savoury,  more  so 
than  any  fowls  which  are  eaten  among  us.3 

There  is  another  variety  almost  as  large 
which  they  call  iacu  [ocus]72  and  which  we  call 
galhinas  do  mato  [forest-hens].  They  are  grey 
and  black  and  have  a  white  circle  on  their  head, 
and  a  red  neck.^jMany  of  them  are  killed  because 
they  are  very  savoury,  for  they  are  among  the 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  67 

best  birds  of  the  forest.  -There  are  also  in  the 
country  many  perdizes  [partridges],  pombas 
[pigeons],  and  rolas  [doves],  as  in  Portugal, 
and  many  patos  [ducks]  and  adens  [wild 
ducks]73  in  the  lakes  and  rivers  of  the  coast:  3 
there  are  many  other  birds  of  different  species 
which  are  no  less  tasty  and  wholesome  than  the 
[varieties]  eaten  among  us  [in  Portugal]  and 
held  in  most  esteem. 

The  parrots  of  those  regions  are  of  many 
kinds  and  very  beautiful,  for  some  have  already 
been  seen  here  [Portugal].  The  best  of  all, 
which  are  rarely  found  in  the  country,  are  very 
large,  larger  than  falcons,  and  are  called  ana- 
purus.  These  parrots  are  of  many  variegated 
colours,  and  breed  in  the  depths  of  the  sertao: 
after  they  are  captured  they  become  so  tame,  that 
they  lay  their  eggs  in  the  houses  and  adapt  them- 
selves more  to  living  with  mankind  than  does 
any  other  bird  whatsoever,  however  tame  or  do- 
mestic it  may  be.  And  for  this  reason  they  are 
held  in  so  much  esteem  in  those  parts  that  among 
the  Indians  they  have  the  same  value  as  two  or 
three  slaves:  so,  the  Portuguese  as  well,  when 
they  are  able  to  obtain  them,  hold  them  in  the 
same  esteem,  because  they  are  extremely  beau- 
tiful and  adornedjas  I  have  said  with  brilliant 
and  delicate  colours^  so  that  they  exceed  in  mag- 


68  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

nificence  all  the  other  birds  of  the  country.  There 
are  others  almost  as  large  as  these,  called  ca- 
mindes,™  which  are  all  blue  except  for  a  few 
yellow  feathers  in  the  wings.  These  also  are  very 
beautiful,  and  esteemed  of  great  value  by  any 
one  who  obtains  them. 

There  are  others  in  the  depths  of  the  sertao, 
about  the  same  size,  called  ardras  [macaws], 
which  are  red,  with  a  few  yellow  feathers;  their 
wings  are  blue  and  they  have  a  very  long  beau- 
tiful tail^  There  are  smaller  ones  which  speak 
more  readily  and  better  than  all  others,  and  it  is 
this  species  which  are  there  called  the  true  par- 
rots. It  is  these  the  Indians  bring  down  from  the 
forests  as  merchandise  to  barter  with  the  Portu- 
guese. They  are  about  the  size  of  pigeons,  bright 
green  with  the  head  almost  entirely  yellow,  and 
with  red  shoulders.  There  is  another  variety  on 
the  coast,  among  the  Portuguese,  of  the  same 
size,  which  are  called  coricas:  they  are  entirely 
covered  with  dark  green  feathers,  and  have  a 
blue  head  the  colour  of  rosemary.  Of  this  variety 
of  parrots  there  are  more  in  that  country  than  of 
crows  or  starlings  here;  they  are  not  esteemed  so 
much  as  the  others  because  they  frequently  play 
truant,  and  aside  from  this  they  speak  with  diffi- 
culty and  at  the  price  of  much  patience.  But 
when  they  do  speak  they  surpass  all  the  others, 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  69 

and  are  accordingly  prized.  And  that  is  why  the 
Indians  of  the  land  are  accustomed  to  pluck  the 
feathers  while  young,  and  to  dye  the  birds  with 
the  blood  of  a  certain  toad  to  which  they  add  other 
ingredients :  and  when  the  feathers  grow  out  once 
more  they  are  exactly  the  colour  of  the  real  ones. 
Thus  it  often  happens  that  the  Indians  deceive 
people  by  selling  them  for  the  true  species.  ^  There 
are  also  some  very  small  parrots  which  come  from 
the  sertao,  a  little  larger  than  sparrows,  which 
they  call  tuyns  [parakeets] :  Nature  covers  them 
with  very  fine  green  feathers  of  a  solid  colour; 
their  beaks  and  feet  are  white  and  their  tails  very 
long.  These  talk  also  and  are  very  pretty  and 
extremely  pleasing.^]  There  are  others  on  the 
coast  about  the  size Toi  blackbirds,  which  they 
call  marcandos :  they  have  a  very  large  head  and 
a  large  thick  beak;  these  also  are  green,  and  talk, 
like  all  the  others. 

There  are  some  notable  birds  also  in  those 
parts  besides  those  to  which  I  have  referred,  of 
which  I  shall  make  mention:  now  I  shall  treat 
especially  of  the  ^sea-birds  called  goards  [red 
ibis] :  these  are  atfout  the  size  of  gulls.  The  first 
feathers  with  which  Nature  clothes  them  are 
white  without  any  mixture,  and  extremely  fine. 
After  a  period  of  about  two  years,  they  moult,  and 
another  coat  appears,  this  time  very  fine  and  all 


70  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

grey.  After  the  same  lapse  of  time  they  again 
moult,  when  they  are  covered  with  black  without 
mixture.  After  a  certain  time  they  change  again, 
and  their  new  feathers  are  red,  ipf  the  finest  pure 
crimson  to  be  seen  anywhere,  and  in  this  [coat] 
they  finish  their  days.75 

There  are  certain  birds  found  inland  in  the 
Captaincy  of  Paranambuco,  twice  the  size  of  the 
galos  do  Peru  [turkey] :  they  are  greyish,  and 
have  on  their  heads  above  the  beak  a  very  sharp 
spur  like  a  horn,  striped  dark  brown  and  white, 
the  length  of  which  is  about  a  palm,  and  three 
similar  ones  on  each  wing  but  somewhat  smaller, 
namely,  one  at  the  shoulder,  one  at  the  middle 
joint,  and  the  other  at  the  wing  tip.  These  birds 
have  a  beak  like  [that  of]  the  eagle  and  thick, 
very  long  feet.  They  have  callosities  on  their 
knees  as  large  as  big  fists.  When  they  fight  with 
other  birds  they  turn  sideways  so  as  to  aid  them- 
selves with  all  the  arms  that  Nature  has  given 
them  for  their  defense.76 

There  is  another  variety  of  bird  in  those 
parts  whose  name  is  well  known  to  all  here 
[Portugal] :  they  are  more  like  terrestrial  animals 
than  birds,  for  the  reason  which  I  shall  presently 
mention ;  however,  as  they  are  really  bircls  and  as 
such  should  be  described,  for  they  have  a  bird- 
like  appearance,  I  shall  not  fail  to  mention  them 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  71 

here,  as  I  have  all  the  other  [birds].  They  are 
called  Jiemas1'1  [emus] ;  they  are  as  heavy  as  a 
large  sheep,  and  have  legs  which,  from  the 
shoulder  where  they  join  the  wings,  are  as  long  as 
the  height  of  a  man.  Their  neck  is  excessively 
long  and  their  head  is  no  larger  than  that  of  a 
goose;  they  are  variegated  grey,  white  and  black, 
on  the  body;  they  have  beautiful  feathers  which 
here  [Portugal]  it  is  our  custom  to  wear  on  hats 
and  caps,  especially  gallants  and  those  who  pro- 
fess the  military  art.  Like  any  other  animal  of 
the  field,  these  birds  feed  on  grass,  and  never 
rise  off  the  ground  nor  fly  like  other  birds,  but 
only  spread  their  wings  and  beat  the  air  with 
them  as  they  run  along  the  ground;  therefore 
they  frequent  only  the  prairies  where  they  are  not 
hindered  with  brush  or  trees,  but  can  run  and  fly 
in  the  manner  I  state. 

Of  the  innumerable  other  species  of  birds 
in  those  regions,  which  Nature  has  clothed  with 
many  fine  colours,  I  might  also  make  mention 
here:  but  as  my  principal  intent  in  the  present 
history  was  only  to  be  brief,  and  to  eschew  those 
things  for  which  I  might  be  accused  of  prolixity 
by  those  who  are  little  interested  (as  I  have 
already  said),  I  wish  to  particularize  only  the 
most  notable  things,  and  to  pass  over  in  silence 
the  others  which  deserve  less  attention. 


72  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

ABOUT  SOME  OF  THE  NOTEWORTHY 

FISH,  WHALES  AND  AMBERGRIS 

OF  THOSE  PARTS. 

There  is  such  abundance  of  savoury,  whole- 
some fish  caught  both  in  the  high  seas  and  in  the 
rivers  and  bays  of  that  Province,  in  the  advan- 
tages of  which  the  inhabitants  of  all  the  Cap- 
taincies generally  participate,  that  the  abundance 
of  fish  alone  would  be  sufficient  to  sustain  them 
amply,  even  if  there  were  no  meat  or  any  other 
kind  of  game,  as  enumerated  above.  Without 
considering  the  great  variety  of  fish  which  ordi- 
narily do  not  differ  in  appearance  from  those  of 
hereabouts  [Portugal],  I  shall  treat  now  in  par- 
ticular of  a  certain  species  which  they  have  in 
those  parts  and  which  they  call  peixes  bois™  [sea- 
cows]  :  they  are  so  large  that  the  largest  weigh 
forty  or  fifty  arrobas.79  They  have  a  muzzle  like 
[that  of  ]  a  cow,  and  two  stubby  fins  with  which 
they  swim,  similar  to  arms.  The  females  have 
two  teats  with  the  milk  of  which  they  nourish 
their  young.  Their  tail  is  wide,  blunt  and  not 
very  long.  They  have  no  resemblance  to  fish, 
save  that  their  skin  seems  like  that  of  a  tuninha 
[dolphin]!  These  fish  for  the  most  part  are 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  73 

found  in  the  rivers  or  bays  of  the  coast,  usually 
where  a  river  or  stream  runs  into  the  salt  water, 
because  they  stick  their  heads  out  of  water  and 
graze  upon  the  herbs  which  grow  in  such  places, 
and  they  eat  also  the  leaves  of  a  tree  which  is 
called  mangues  [mangrove]  of  which  there  are 
many  along  the  banks  of  the  rivers.  The  inhabi- 
tants of  the  country  kill  them  with  harpoons,  and 
also  they  take  some  of  them  in  weirs,  for  they 
swim  into  such  places  with  the  flood  tide,  and 
with  thejebb  go  back  again  to  the  sea  whence  they 
came.  _This  fish  is  exceedingly  tasty  and  seems 
exactly  like  beef,  in  appearance  as  well  as  in 
flavour;  roasted  there  is  no  difference  from  loin 
of  pork.  It  is  also  cooked  with  cabbage  and  is 
stewed  as  beef,  and  no  one  who  eats  [of  it]  would 
take  it  for  fish  unless  he  knew  beforehand. 

There  is  another  fish  which  they  callcam- 
boropins  which  are  about  the  size  of  atuns  [tunny 
~fish] .  These  fish  have  very  hard  scales,  larger  than 
[those  of]  other  fish:  these,  too,  they  kill  with  har- 
poons, and  when  they  desire  to  catch  them  they 
go  out  on  a  point  [of  land]  or  a  rock,  or  other 
similar  place  adapted  to  the  purpose.  And  a  good 
fisherman,  (so  that  he  may  not  waste  his  shot) 
when  he  sees  them  coming  lets  them  pass  by, 
and  waits  until  they  are  in  a  position  so  that  he 
can  harpoon  them  from  behind ;  thus  the  harpoon 


74  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

enters  the  fish,  despite  the  scales  which  as  I  say 
are  so  hard  that,  if  the  harpoon  should  happen  to 
strike  them  fairly,  it  would  be  a  wonder  if  it 
penetrated,  i  These  are  among  the  best  fish  of 
those  parts  because,  aside  from  being  very  well 
flavoured,  they  are  also  very  wholesome,  and  of  a 
firmer  quality  than  any  other  fish  in  the  country. 

There  is  also  another  species  called  tamoa- 
tds80  which  are  about  the  size  of  sardines  and 
grow  only  in  fresh  water.  These  fish  are  covered 
with  shells,  laminated  like  the  coverings  of  the 
tatus  which  I  mentioned  above,  and  are  very 
savoury;  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  land  hold 
them  in  much  esteem.  ,. 

i  There  is  also  a  species  of  very  small  fish  like 
xarrocos,  which  they  call  mayacus;61  these  are  so 
exceedingly  poisonous,  especially  the  skin,  that 
if  one  were  to  take  only  a  mouthful  he  would  die 
within  the  hour_i  for  there  is  no  remedy  known  in 
the  land  whicn  counteracts  or  delays  at  all  the  vio- 
lence of  this  death-dealing  venom.  Some  Indians 
of  the  country  risk  eating  them  after  skinning 
them  and  removing  the  whole  of  that  part  where 
they  say  the  poison  is  contained.  But  in  spite  of 
this  they  sometimes  die.  These  fish,  as  soon  as 
they  are  taken  out  of  the  water,  swell  up  so  that 
they  look  like  a  bladder  full  of  wind :  and  in  ad- 
dition to  this  characteristic,  they  are  so  tame  that 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  75 

one  may  catch  them  without  difficulty  with  the 
bare  hands ;  often  they  lie  so  quietly  by  the  blank 
that  any  one  seeing  them  would  be  tempted  to 
take  of,  and  even  to  eat  of  them  if  he  were  not 
aware  of  [their  poisonous  nature] .  I  do  not  re- 
call any  other  fishes  of  those  parts  which  deserve 
mention,  for  none  of  the  others,  as  I  have  said, 
differs  from  those  of  this  country  [Portugal] : 
a  great  number  of  them  are  of  the  same  species; 
but  they  are  more  savoury,  and  so  wholesome  that 
they  are  not  injurious  and  are  not  forbidden  to 
the  sick,  and  they  are  very  digestible  in  any  sort 
of  illness;  under  all  conditions  one  may  eat  of 
them  without  affecting  the  health. 

Nor  does  it  seem  to  me  entirely  out  of  place 
to  say  something  here  about  the  whales  and  the 
ambergris  which  they  say  comes  from  them. 
What  I  know  of  the  matter  is  this,  that  there  are 
many  whales  in  those  regions82  which  usually 
come  from  the  high  seas  to  the  coast  at  certain  sea- 
sons, rather  than  at  others,  and  that  at  this  period 
ambergris  comes  out  of  the  sea  in  greater  quan- 
tities and  is  cast  up  on  the  shore  of  those  prov- 
inces. Hence  many  hold  the  opinion  that  this 
ambergris  is  nothing  but  the  excretion  of  the 
whales;  and  that  is  what  the  Indians  call  it  in 
their  native  language,  without  knowing  any  other 
name  to  give  it.  /Others  say  that  it  is  the  sperm 


76  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

of  the  whales : !  but  what  is  considered  certain 
(leaving  these  and  other  erroneous  opinions 
aside)  is  that  this  liquor  is  created  at  the  bottom 
of  the  sea,  not  generally  all  over  but  in  certain 
parts  which  Nature  has  disposed  for  its  growth. 
Since  this  liquor  is  food  for  whales  it  is  affirmed 
that  when  they  eat  too  much  of  it  they  become 
drunk,  and  that  that  which  is  found  on  the 
beaches  is  the  excess  that  the  whales  vomit.  And 
if  it  were  not  as  explained  here,  and  if  it  should 
come  from  the  whales  in  any  other  manner  than 
above  described,  it  is  to  be  believed  that  in  Por- 
tugal it  could  be  obtained  in  the  same  way,83  for 
whales  are  common  to  the  whole  ocean.  And, 
moreover,  in  that  Province  of  which  I  speak  this 
has  been  proved  by  many  whales  which  have 
been  thrown  up  on  the  coast,  because  in  the  in- 
testines of  some  of  them  they  find  much  ambergris 
which  has  already  been  digested  because  it  had 
been  eaten  some  time  before.  And  in  others  they 
find  it  in  the  belly,  still  fresh  and  in  perfect  state, 
which  looks  as  if  the  whale  had  just  eaten  it  in 
the  hour  of  its  death.  Then,  too,  the  excretion 
in  that  part  where  nature  gets  rid  of  it  has  no 
resemblance  to  ambergris  and  does  not  appear 
any  less  digested  than  the  excretions  of  any  other 
animal.  Whence  it  is  clearly  shown  that  the 
first  opinion  is  not  true,  and  that  the  second  can 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  77 

not  be  either ;  for  the  sperm  of  these  whales  is  that 
which  they  call  balso**  of  which  they  find  a  great 
quantity  in  this  sea,  and  which  they  say  is  good 
for  wounds,  and  is  recognized  as  such  by  all  navi- 
gators. 

This  ambergris  when  it  is  fresh  out  of  the 
sea  is  soft  like  soap  and  has  almost  no  odour ;  but 
after  a  few  days  it  becomes  hard  and  has  the 
odour  we  all  know.  There  are  nevertheless  two 
species  of  amber ;  namely,  one  greyish  which  they 
call  gris,  and  the  other  black:  the  grey  is  very 
fine  and  is  estimated  at  a  great  value  everywhere 
in  the  world:  the  black  is  much  inferior  in  the 
quality  of  its  odour,  and  according  to  available 
information  it  is  of  little  use.  A  great  quantity 
of  both  has  already  been  obtained  from  that 
Province  and  is  being  obtained  today,  and  from 
it  some  of  the  inhabitants  have  become  rich,  and 
others  are  getting  rich,  as  is  well  known.85 
Finally,  as  God  has  destined  this  4»*ui  -f rem~all 
time  to  Christianity,  and  as  self-interest  attracts 
men  more  than  anything  else  in  life,  it  seems 
manifest  that  He  wished  to  attract  them  to  the 
land  with  this  wealth  from  the  sea,  until  they 
should  succeed  in  discovering  those  great  mines 
which  the  country  promises,  in  order  that  in  this 
manner  all  the  blind,  barbarous  people  who  in- 
habit the  land  might  absorb  the  light  and  knowl- 


78  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

edge  of  our  Holy  Catholic  Faith,  which  for  them 
[Portuguese]  would  mean  to  discover  greater 
mines  in  Heaven:  and  may  our  Lord  grant  that 
this  be  so,  for  His  glory,  and  the  salvation  of  so 
many  souls. 


THE  MARINE  MONSTER  AS  DEPICTED  IN  THE  ESCORIAL  MS. 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  79 


CHAPTER  IX. 

ABOUT  A  MARINE  MONSTER  THAT  WAS 

KILLED  IN  THE  CAPTAINCY  or  SAO 

VICENTE  IN  THE  YEAR  1564. 

The  appearance  of  the  fierce  and  frightful 
marine  monster,  which  was  killed  in  that  Province 
in  the  year  1564,  was  so  unusual,  and  human 
sight  so  unaccustomed  thereto,  that  although 
many  parts  of  the  world  have  news  of  it,  I  shall 
nevertheless  not  fail  to  repeat  it  again,  relating 
in  detail  all  that  happened.  For  in  truth  the 
greater  part,  and  in  fact  nearly  all  of  the  pictures 
which  have  attempted  to  show  its  horrible  aspect, 
are  erroneous,  and  besides,  the  facts  about  its 
death  are  told  in  different  ways,  there  being  only 
one  true  one,  the  following.86 

In  the.jCapJtaincy  of  Sao  Vicente,  it  being  al- 
ready night,  about  the  hour  when  every  one  was 
ready  to  go  to  sleep,  it  happened  that  an  Indian 
girl,  the  Captain's. slave,  left  her  house;  and  cast- 
ing her  eyes  over  the  plain  which  lies  between  the 
sea  and  the  town  of  the  Captaincy,  she  saw  the 
monster  walking  about  from  one  place  to  another, 
with  steps  and  movements  which  were  strange, 


80  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

and  braying  now  and  then  so  horribly  that 
half  out  of  her  wits  and  nearly  fainting,  went  Jo 
find  the  son  of  the  Captain,  whose  name  was 
Baltesar  Ferreira;  she  told  him  what  she  had 
seen,  it  seeming  to  her  to  be  an  apparition  of  the 
Devil.  But  as  he  was  a  man  as  judicious-  a&  he 
was  brave,  and  as  the  natives  were  worthy-  .of-lit- 
tle  credence,  he  paid  small  attention  to  her  words 
and  remained  in  bed,  and  told  her  to  go  out  again 
and  make  certain  what  it  was. "  'IJie^nTnjniaii 
woman  obeyed  his  command  and  went  out:  and 
she  returned  more  frightened  and  affirmed  and 
repeated  what  she  had  said  before;  namely,  that 
there  was  something  walking  about  that  was  so 
ugly  it  could  be  only  the  Devil  himself.  Then  he 
hastily  got  up,  and  seized  a  sword  that  was  close 
by  him  and  stepped  out  of  doors  clad  only  in  a 
shirt,  being  very  strongly  of  the  opinion  that  it 
must  be  a  tiger,  or  some  other  animal  known  in 
the  country,  and  that,  having  verified  it,  he  could 
persuade  the  Indian  woman  that  it  was  not  what 
she  thought.  Turning  his  eyes  in  the  direction 
she  indicated,  he  saw  indistinctly  the  bulk  of  the 
monster  on  the  beach,  without  being  able  to  dis- 
tinguish what  it  was  because  of  the  darkness 
which  prevented  him  and  because  the  monster 
was  something  never  before  seen,  entirely  differ- 
ent in  appearance  from  all  other  animals.  And 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  81 

approaching  a  little  so  that  he  could  see  it  better, 
he  was  perceived  by  the  monster  itself;  which, 
raising  its  head,  as  soon  as  it  saw  him,  started  for 
the  sea  whence  it  had  come.  From  this  the  youth 
knew  that  it  was  from  the  sea,  and  before  it  could 
reach  the  water  he  had  hastily  rushed  forward  to 
intercept  it.  Seeing  that  he  was  barring  its  path 
it  stood  upright  like  a  man,  resting  upon  the  fins 
of  its  tail ;  and  being  thus  face  to  face  with  it,  he 
gave  the  monster  a  sword  thrust  in  the  belly,,  and 
at  the  same  time  dodged  to  one  side  so  swiftly 
that  the  monster  could  not  fall  upon  him :  never- 
theless he  was  in  no  little  danger^  for  the  great 
flow  of  blood  which  came  out  of  the  wound  squirt- 
ed in  his  face  with  such  force  that  he  was  almost 
blinded.''  As  soon  as  the  monster  had  fallen  for- 
ward it  left  the  path  it  was  following;  andjthus 
wounded,  it  brayed  with  its  mouth  open,  and 
fearlessly  attacked  him  to  rend  him  with  teeth  and 
claws,  but  he  gave  it  a  large  cut  on  the  side  of 
the  head:  upon  this  the  monster  became  weak, 
and  giving  up  its  vain  encounter,  it  turned  once 
more  to  the  path  toward  the  sea.  During  this 
time  some  slaves  had  rushed  up  in  response  to 
the  cries  of  the  Indian  woman  who  was  looking 
on,  and  coming  up  to  the  monster  they  seized  it, 
when  almost  dead,  and  carried  it  from  there  to 
the  town  where  it  was  seen  the^next  day  by  all  the 


82  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

people  of  the  country.  Although  the  young  man 
had  shown  himself  so  courageous  on  this  occa- 
sion, thereby  gaining  a  very  great  reputation  in 
the  land,  nevertheless  he  came  out  of  this,  battle 
so  exhausted  and  so  upset  and  overcome  by  the 
sight  of  this  horrible  animal,  that  when  his  father 
asked  him  what  had  happened  to  him  he  was  not 
able  to  answer;  and  in  the  state  of  one  in  a  trance 
he  remained  a  long  time  without  saying  a  word. 
The  picture  of  this  monster,  which  may  be  seen 
at  the  end  of  this  chapter,  was  taken  from  life. 
It  was  fifteen  palms  long,  the  whole  body  covered 
with  hair,  and  on  its  muzzle  there  were  some  very 
silky  bristles  like  a  mustache.  The  Indians  .of 
the  country  call  it  in  their  language  Mpupidra,87 
which  means  demonio  dagoa  [water-devil]. 
Others  like  it  have  already  been  seen,  in  those 
regions ;  but  they  are  rarely  found.  And  thus 
there  must  be  many  other  monsters  of  different 
shapes  which  hide  in  the  vast  and  frightful  depths 
of  the  sea,  no  less  strange  and  wonderful:  for  one 
can  believe  anything,  however  difficult  it  may 
seem;  because  all  the  secrets  of  Nature  have  not 
been  revealed  to  man,  so  that  he  can  not  reason- 
ably deny  or  hold  as  impossible  things  which  he 
has  not  seen  or  of  which  he  has  no  knowledge. 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  83 


CHAPTER  X. 

ABOUT  THE  NATIVES  OF  THE  PROVINCE:  THEIR 

CONDITION  AND  CUSTOMS,  AND  HOW 

THEY  ARE  GOVERNED  IN  PEACE. 


that  we  have  treated  of  the  land  and 
of  the  things  in  it  that  are  created  for  man,  it 
seems  fitting  to  speak  here  about  the  natives  :  and 
in  this  category  we  shall  not  mention  all,  but  only 
those  who  inhabit  the  coast,  and  those  parts  of 
the  sertao  many  leagues  inland  with  whom  we 
have  communication.  Although  these  natives 
are  much  divided  and  have  many  different  names 
for  their  tribes,  still  they  are  one  in  their  appear- 
ance, their  condition,  their  customs  and  their 
heathen  rites.  And  if  they  differ  in  any  way  in 
those  regions,  it  is  so  little  that  it  is  not  necessary 
to  point  this  out  or  to  attend  to  such  matters 
among  the  more  notable  characteristics  which  are 
generally  common  to  all,  as  I  shall  now  relate. 

These  Indians  are  of  a  dark  brown  coloui 
with  sleek  hair;  the  face  is  flattened  and  some  of 
their  features  resemble  [those  of]  the  Chinese;88! 
for  the  most  part  they  are  well  set  up,  lusty  and 
of  good  stature;  a  very  brave  people  who  esteem(_ 


84  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

death  lightly,  daring  in  war  and  of  very  little 
prudence.  They  are  very  ungrateful,  inhuman 
and  cruel,  inclined  to  fight  and  extremely  vindic- 
tive.J  They  live  at  their  ease,  without  any  pre- 
occupation save  eating,  drinking  and  killing  peo- 
ple ;  and  so  they  grow  very  fat,  but  with  any  vexa- 
tion they  immediately  grow  thin  again.  Many 
times  their  imagination  has  such  power  over 
them,  that  if  one  desires  the  death  of  another  and 
suggests  to  him  that  he  will  die  on  a  certain  day 
or  on  a  particular  night  he  will  die  at  the  end  of 
this  period.  They  are  very  fickle  and  change- 
able; they  readily  believe  whatever  they  are  urged 
to  believe,  however  difficult  or  impossible  it  may 
be,  and  with  a  little  dissuasion  they  as  readily 
reject  it.  They  are  very  dishonest  and  given  to 
sensuality,  giving  themselves  up  to  their  vices  as 
though  they  were  without  human  reason:89  never- 
theless in  their  congress,  the  males  with  the  fe- 
males, they  have  due  reserve  and  show  a  certain 
,  modesty. 

The  language  spoken  along  the  whole  coast 
is  the  same,  although  there  is  a  difference  in  cer- 
tain words  in  some  places,  but  not  so  much  that 
they  fail  to  understand  one  another;  and  this 
as  far  as  the  twenty-seventh  degree:  from  there 
up  there  is  another  kind  of  aborigines  about 
whom  we  have  not  so  much  information,  who 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  85 

speak  another  language.    The  language  I  speak 

of,  the  one  common  to  the  coast,  is  very  soft  and 

easily  learned  by  any  of  the  tribes.     There  are 

some  words  of  it  which  are  employed  only  by 

females,  and  others  serve  only  for  the  males.     It 

lacks  three  letters ;  one  does  not  find  in  it,  namely, 

F,  nor  L,  nqrj?,  a  very  wonderful  thing,  for  they 

have  neither  Faith,  Law,  nor  .Ruler:   and  thus 

they  live  without  order,  [having  besides  no  idea 

of]  counting,  weights  or  measures.     They  adore  About  their 

nothing,  nor  do   they   believe   that   after    death  Religion 

there  is  glory  for  the  good  and  punishment  for 

the  wicked.     Their  belief  in  the  immortality  of 

the  soul  is  only  this,  that  their  dead  will   go 

through  a  future  life  wounded  or  cut  in  pieces 

or  in  the  condition  in  which  he  left  this  life. 

And  when  one  of  them  dies,  their  custom  is  to 

bury  him  in  a  hole  seated  on  his  feet  with  the 

hammock  beside  him  that  served  him  for  a  bed 

in  life.90    Then  for  the  first  few  days  his  relatives 

place  food  on  the  grave,  and  some  of  them  are 

even  accustomed  to  put  the  food  in  the  grave  at  the 

time  of  burial;  and  they  absolutely  believe  that 

they  eat  the  food  and  sleep  in  the  hammock  which 

is  with  them  in  the  grave.    These  people  have  no 

king  or  any  one  to  administer  justice,  except  a 

chief  in  each  village  who  is  like  a  captain,  whom 

they    obey   voluntarily    and   not   through    con- 


86  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

straint.91  When  he  dies  his  son  succeeds  him; 
his  only  function  is  to  lead  them  in  war  and  to 
give  them  counsel  as  to  how  they  should  conduct 
themselves  in  battle ;  but  he  does  not  punish  their 
evil  deeds  nor  command  them  against  their  wills. 
The  war  they  carry  on  today  amongst  themselves 
was  not  caused  by  conflict  of  laws  or  customs 
nor  on  account  of  greed  or  self-interest,  but  be- 
cause at  some  ancient  date  some  one  had  hap- 
pened to  kill  another,  as  occurs  today  (for  they 
are  very  revengeful  and  live,  as  I  have  said,  hav- 
ing absolutely  no  superior  whom  they  obey  and 
fear) ;  the  relatives  of  the  dead  man  formed  a 
league  against  the  killer  and  his  tribe,  and  they 
pursued  one  another  with  such  hatred  that  they 
became  divided  into  different  bands  and  re- 
mained enemies,  as  they  are  today.  In  order  that 
these  dissensions  might  not  spread,  and  that  they 
might  the  better  keep  peace  among  themselves  and 
become  stronger  against  their  enemies,  they  de- 
cided to  put  an  end  to  them  [the  dissensions]  by 
means  of  the  following  remedy:  when  it  does 
happen  that  one  kills  another,  the  relatives  of  the 
assassin  hold  court  over  him  and  then  drown  him 
in  the  presence  of  all.  In  this  way  the  friends  of 
the  dead  man  are  satisfied  and  both  parties  re- 
main in  friendly  relations  as  before.  But  as  this 
rule  is  voluntary  and  is  not  enforced  with  rigour, 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  87 

and  no  one  is  under  judicial  obligation,  nor  does 
every  one  wish  to  follow  this  proceeding,  they 
soon  get  into  the  way  of  dividing  themselves  into 
clans  and  rising  one  against  the  other,  as  has  been 
said. 

These  Indians  live  in  villages:  each  village 
has  seven  or  eight  houses  which  are  very  long 
like  a  rope  walk  or  warehouse,  constructed  of 
wood  almost  entirely,  and  covered  with  palm 
leaves  or  other  similar  forest  plants:  they  are 
filled  with  people  from  one  end  to  the  other,  each 
person  having  his  allotted  place  with  a  location 
for  the  hammock  in  which  he  sleeps:  thus  they 
are  side  by  side  in  rows ;  and  in  the  centre  of  the 
house  there  is  an  open  passage,  which,  like  the 
passage  way  in  a  galley,  is  used  by  everybody  to 
go  to  his  sleeping  quarters.  In  every  house  all 
live  together  in  harmony,  without  any  dissension 
amongst  them:  on  the  contrary,  they  are  so 
friendly  with  one  another  that  what  belongs  to 
one  belongs  to  all,  and  when  one  of  them  has 
something  to  eat,  no  matter  how  small,  all  his 
neighbors  share  in  it. 

When  any  one  goes  on  a  visit  to  their  vil- 
lages, as  soon  as  he  is  seated,  it  is  the  custom  for 
some  of  the  girls  with  dishevelled  hair  to  come  up 
and  receive  him  with  great  lamentation,  shedding 
many  tears,  asking  him  (if  he  be  a  native)  where 


88  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

"""  he  has  been  and  what  are  the  hardships  he  has 
endured  since  he  left  [home],  bringing  to  mind 
many  disasters  which  might  have  happened;  in 
a  word,  seeking  to  provoke  tears  by  using  the  sad- 
dest and  most  feeling  words  they  can  think  of. 
And  if  he  be  a  Portuguese,  they  curse  the  mis- 
fortune of  their  ancestors  who  were  not  fortunate 
enough  to  live  and  behold  a  people  so  valiant  and 
so  enlightened  as  are  the  Portuguese,  from  whose 
country  all  good  things  come,  indicating  some  of 
the  things  they  hold  in  most  esteem.  This  recep- 
tion that  I  have  described  is  so  customary  amongst 
them  that  it  is  a  miracle  if  they  omit  it,  except 
when  there  is  malice  toward  those  who  come  to 
visit  them,  or  when  they  are  planning  some 
treachery. 

The  affectations  and  adornments  which  they 
use  consist  of  having  the  lower  lip  pierced  and  a 
very  long  stone  put  in  the  hole.  Others  have 
their  faces  full  of  holes  and  stones,  thus  appear- 
ing very  ugly  and  disfigured :  this  is  done  to  them 
while  very  young.  They  are  also  accustomed  to 
pull  out  the  beard,  and  they  do  not  allow  hair 
to  grow  on  any  part  of  the  body  except  the  head, 
and  even  on  the  lower  part  of  it  they  pull  it  out. 
The  women  prize  their  hair  highly,  and  wear  it 
very  long,  clean  and  well  combed,  and  most  of 
them  wear  it  braided.  (Both  the  men  and  the 

V. 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  89 

women  are  accustomed  at  certain  times  to  stain 
themselves  with  the  juice  of  a  certain  fruit  called 
genipdpo,  which  is  green  when  it  is  squeezed  out, 
but  after  they  put  it  on  their  bodies  and  it  dries, 
it  becomes  very  black,  and,  however  much  they 
I  wash,  it  will  not  come  off  for  nine  days. 

r  It  is  their  custom  to  marry  the  women  who 
are  their  nieces,  the  daughters  of  their  brothers 
or  sisters;  these  are  considered  their  legitimate 
and  true  wives.  Fathers  of  the  women  can  not 
refuse  them,  nor  can  any  persons  other  than  their 
uncles  marry  them.  They  have  no  wedding  cere- 
mony or  any  usage,  except  that  each  man  takes  to 
himself  a  wife  when  he  arrives  at  a  certain  age 
which  is  about  fourteen  or  fifteen.92  Some  men 
have  three  or  four  wives,  but  they  esteem  the  first 
above  the  rest  and  she  enjoys  more  consideration 
than  the  others.  This  obtains  generally  among 
the  chiefs,  who  on  account  of  their  position  and 
the  dignity  that  accords  with  it  regard  it  highly 
thus  to  be  distinguished  from  the  others. 

There  are  some  Indian  women  who  deter- 
mine to  remain  chaste:  these  have  no  commerce 
'•))  with  men  in  any  manner,  nor  would  they  consent 
to  it  even  if  refusal  meant  death.93  They  give  up 
all  the  duties  of  women  and  imitate  men,  and  fol- 
low men's  pursuits  as  if  they  were  not  women. 
They  wear  the  hair  cut  in  the  same  way  as  the 


90  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

men,  and  go  to  war  with  bows  and  arrows  and 
pursue  game,  always  in  company  with  men ;  each 
has  a  woman  to  serve  her,  to  whom  she  says  she 
is  married,  and  they  treat  each  other  and  speak 
jwith  each  other  as  man  and  wife. 

The  first  act  of  all  other  Indian  women, 
after  giving  birth,  is  to  bathe  in  a  stream;  [after 
which]  they  seem  as  well  as  if  they  had  not  been 
in  travail:  and  they  do  the  same  thing  to  the 
child  which  they  have  borne.  In  their  stead,  their 
husbands  remain  in  the  hammocks  and  are  visited 
and  taken  care  of,  as  though  they  were  the  ones 
just  delivered.94  And  this  comes  from  the  fact 
that  the  women  have  great  esteem  for  the  fathers 
of  their  children,  and  are  extremely  anxious  after 
bearing  them  a  child  to  find  favour  in  their  sight. 

All  the  children  grow  up  quite  viciously, 
without  any  form  of  chastisement:  they  are 
nursed  up  to  the  age  of  seven  or  eight,  unless  the 
mothers  in  the  meantime  give  birth  to  another 
child,  which  occasionally  happens.  There  is  no 
education  among  them  to  which  they  give  atten- 
tion; and  they  are  not  occupied  with  any  other 
duties  than  securing  what  they  eat,  [in  company] 
with  their  fathers  under  whose  protection  they 
are  trained  to  a  point  when  each  one  is  able  to 
provide  for  himself,  without  expecting  any  other 
inheritance  or  legacy  in  order  to  become  rich, 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  91 

save  the  growth  which  Nature  universally  be- 
stows on  all  animals  not  endowed  with  reason. 
But  the  life  they  live  and  the  cultivation  of  their 
sustenance  are  [accompanied]  with  little  effort, 
and  are  much  easier  than  ours;  for  they  have  no 
property,  nor  do  they  try  to  acquire  it  as  .other 
men  do;  so  they  live  free  from  greed  and  inordi- 
nate desire  for  riches,  which  are  prevalent  among 

\other  nations:  [this  is  true]  to  such  an  extent 
that  neither  gold  nor  silver  nor  precious  stones 
nave  any  value  among  them,  nor  have  they  need 
/of  the  use  of  such  or  any  similar  objects.  They 

I  all  go  naked  and  with  bare  feet,  men  and  women 
alike,  nor  do  they  cover  any  part  of  their  bodies. 
The  beds  in  which  they  sleep  are  hammocks  made 
of  cotton  thread  which  the  Indian  women  weave 
on  a  loom  made  for  the  purpose :  these  hammocks 
are  nine  or  ten  palms  long,  and  are  attached  to 
cords  knotted  at  the  extremities,  so  as  to  make  a 
loop  at  each  end  by  which  they  are  hung  up,  and 
they  are  suspended  above  the  ground  about  two 
palms,  so  that  they  can  light  a  fire  underneath  to 
warm  themselves  at  night,  or  whenever  they  re- 
quire it.95  The  foods  which  they  plant  in  their 
fields  and  on  which  they  are  nourished  are  those 
Jvhich  have  been  mentioned  above,  namely,  man- 
dioca  [manioc]  and  milho  zaburro  [maize].  Be- 
sides these,  they  live  on  the  meat  of  many  kinds 


92  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

of  animals  which  they  kill  either  with  arrows,  or 
by  the  ingenuity  of  snares  and  pitfalls,  which  is 
their  usual  method  of  hunting.  They  live  also 
on  shell-fish,  and  fish  which  they  catch  along  the 
coast  in  flat  bottomed  boats  made  of  three  or  four 
logs  bound  together  in  such  a  way  as  to  resemble 
the  fingers  of  an  extended  hand;  these  will  carry 
two  or  three  people  or  more,  according  to  the  num- 
ber of  logs,  because  the  logs  are  very  buoyant  and 
support  a  great  weight  on  the  water.  The  logs 
are  fourteen  or  fifteen  palms  long  and  about  two 
or  three  in  circumference.  And  in  this  way  all 
the  Indians  live  without  owning  property  or  tilled 
fields  which  would  be  a  source  of  worry,  nor  have 
they  any  class  distinctions  or  ideas  of  dignities  or 
ceremonies,  nor  do  they  need  them:  because^all^ 
as  I  say,  are  in  every  respect  equal,  and  so  in 
harmony  with  the  conditions  that  they  all  live  ~ 
justly  in  that  country,  and  in  conformity  with  Hie~ 
laws  of  Nature. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  93 


CHAPTER  XI. 

ABOUT  THE  WARS  THEY  HAVE  WITH  ONE 

ANOTHER  AND  THE  MANNER  IN 

WHICH  THEY  ARE  WAGED. 

These  Indians  are  always  at  war  with  one 
another  and  thus  there  is  never  peace  among 
them,  nor  will  it  be  possible  (they  are  so  hateful 
and  vindictive)  to  prevent  these  disagreements 
among  them  by  any  method,  save  by  means  of 
Christian  Doctrine  by  which  the  Fathers  of  the 
Company  are  little  by  little  taming  them,  as  I 
shall  relate  farther  on.  The  arms  with  which 
they  fight  are  the  bow  and  arrow,  and  they  are 
so  skillful  with  these  that  it  is  a  marvel  for  one 
of  them  to  miss  his  mark  no  matter  how  difficult 
it  may  be.  They  are  extremely  rapid  in  shooting, 
and  especially  daring  in  danger,  and  bold  to  the 
last  degree  against  their  adversaries.  Whenever 
they  go  to  war  it  seems  to  them  they  have  victory 
assured,  and  that  none  of  the  company  is  destined 
to  die;  hence,  on  leaving,  they  say  that  they  are 
going  out  to  kill,  without  any  other  talk  or  con- 
sideration; nor  do  they  believe  that  they  can  be 
defeated.  Only  a  thirst  for  revenge,  without 


94  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

hope  of  spoils  or  any  other  interest,  moves  them 
frequently  to  go  in  search  of  their  enemies  at  very 
great  distances,  through  the  mountains,  the 
thicket,  deserts  and  difficult  paths.  Others  are 
accustomed  to  go  by  sea  from  one  region  to  an- 
other in  craft  which  they  call  canoas™  when  they 
desire  to  make  an  attack  near  the  coast.  These 
canoas  are  shaped  like  the  shuttle  of  a  loom  and 
made  of  a  single  log,  and  in  each  one  of  them 
there  are  twenty  to  thirty  rowers.  Besides  these, 
they  have  another  kind,  the  same  size  as  the 
others,  made  of  bark  from  a  tree,  which  ride  the 
waves  very  well,  for  they  are  very  buoyant  though 
less  safe;  because  if  one  of  these  capsizes  it  goes 
to  the  bottom,  while  if  one  made  of  wood  capsizes 
it  continues  to  float  under  any  circumstances. 
When  one  of  these  happens  to  capsize,  the  In- 
dians themselves  jump  into  the  sea  and  raise  the 
canoa  until  it  is  drained;  then  once  more  they  get 
in  and  continue  their  journey. 

All  their  combats  are  very  determined,  and 
they  fight  with  great  courage  without  any  defen- 
sive arms;  wherefore  it  is  a  very  strange  sight  to 
see  two  or  three  thousand  naked  men  on  opposing 
sides  shooting  with  bow  and  arrows  at  one  another 
with  loud  shouts  and  cries,  all  hopping  about  with 
great  agility  from  one  spot  to  another,  so  that  the 
enemy  may  not  take  aim  or  shoot  at  any  definite 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  95 

individual.  Nevertheless  they  fight  in  disorder, 
and  often  countermand  one  another's  orders  to  the 
point  of  quarrelling,  because  they  have  no  captain 
to  restrain  them  or  other  military  officers  whom 
they  must  obey  at  such  times.  But  although  they 
lack  organization  of  this  sort,  on  the  other  hand, 
they  give  much  consideration  to  the  engagement 
and  are  very  cautious  in  choosing  the  proper  time 
to  make  an  assault  on  the  village  of  their  enemies; 
they  are  accustomed  to  make  these  attacks  at  night 
at  the  hour  when  least  expected.  When  it  so  hap- 
pens that  they  are  not  able  to  enter  a  village  im- 
mediately, being  impeded  by  a  stockade  which 
the  enemy  have  built  about  it  for  defense,  they 
build  another  stockade  about  the  village  a  little 
way  from  the  first:  this  they  advance  each  night 
ten  or  a  dozen  steps  until  the  day  arrives  when  it 
is  close  to  the  stockade  of  their  enemies,  often  so 
close  that  they  can  break  one  another's  heads  with 
their  clubs  which  they  hurl  at  one  another.  But 
for  the  most  part  those  in  the  village  get  the  best 
of  the  fight,  and  usually  the  attackers  turn  back 
defeated  to  their  own  country  without  obtaining 
the  victory  they  had  intended,  and  without 
triumphing  over  their  enemies;  and  this  because 
they  do  not  have  defensive  arms  or  other  neces- 
sary equipment  to  entrench  themselves  when  they 
lay  siege  to  their  enemies,  and  to  protect  them- 


96  HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

selves  against  them,  and  also  because  they  have 
many  omens,  and  anything  which  mystifies  them 
is  enough  to  cause  them  to  withdraw  from  the 
undertaking :  they  are  so  inconstant  and  pusillani- 
mous in  this  respect,  that  often,  departing  from 
their  own  country  with  great  determination,  de- 
sirous of  exercising  their  cruelty,  they  happen  to 
meet  a  certain  bird,  or  any  similar  thing  which 
they  consider  of  evil  portent,  and  they  do  not 
proceed  with  the  enterprise,  but  then  and  there 
hold  a  consultation  and  decide  to  turn  back,  with- 
out a  single  dissenting  voice  in  the  company 
against  this  decision.  If  any  one  should  misuse 
the  omens  he  could  easily  be  frightened  at  all 
times,  although  they  may  be  very  close  to  winning 
a  victory;  for  it  happens  that  a  besieged  village 
is  sometimes  almost  ready  to  surrender  when  a 
parrot  within  will  speak  certain  words  which 
they  consider  inspired;  they  raise  the  siege  and 
flee  without  waiting  for  the  success  which  time 
promised  them,  believing  without  doubt  that  if 
they  did  not  do  so,  they  would  all  perish  at  the 
hands  of  their  enemies.  But  aside  from  Jhis 
pusillanimity  to  which  they  are  subject,  they  are 
very  bold,  as  I  have  said,  and  are  so  confident  in 
their  valour  that  there  are  no  opposing  forces  so 
powerful  as  to  frighten  them,  or  to  make  them 
deviate  from  their  barbarous  and  /Vindictive  Jen- 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  97 

On  this  subject  I  shall  relate  a  few 
notable  instances  that  happened  among  them, 
leaving  out  many,  enough  to  fill  a  large  volume 
if  it  were  my  intention  to  write  about  them  in  the 
same  detail  as  each  of  the  following. 

f>(  I  In  the  Captaincy  of  Sao  Vicente,  Jorge 
Ferreira  being  Captain  at  the  time,  it  happened 
that  there  was  an  attack  on  a  village  not  far  from 
the  Portuguese  settlement,  and  during  the  assault 
they  killed  the  son  of  the  head-man  of  the  vil- 
lage. And  because  [the  son]  was  well  liked  and 
beloved  by  all,  there  was  no  one  who  did  not 
weep  for  him,  showing  with  tears  and  lamenta- 
tions how  sorry  they  were  for  his  death.  But  the 
father,  ashamed  and  affronted  for  not  yet  having 
taken  vengeance,  asked  all  those  that  loved  him 
to  conceal  the  loss  of  his  son,  saying,  that  he 
wished  they  would  cease  their  weeping;  [which 
they  did.]  Three  or  four  months  after  the  death 
of  his  son,  he  ordered  his  people  to  make  the 
necessary  preparations,  because  it  seemed  to  him 
a  favourable  and  suitable  time  for  his  purpose: 
and  they  all  got  ready  forthwith.  And  a  few 
days  later  he  led  them  into  the  territory  of  his 
enemies  (which  was  about  three  days'  journey) 
where  they  lay  in  wait  near  the  village  in  an  am- 
bush in  which  they  could  do  the  most  harm  to 
their  enemies:  as  soon  as  night  fell,  the  chief 


98  HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

himself  left  the  company  with  ten  or  twelve  se- 
lected archers  in  whom  he  had  the  most  confi- 
dence, and  with  them  he  went  right  into  the  vil- 
lage of  the  enemy,  who  had  affronted  hinu^and 
leaving  them  apart,  alone  with  no  one  to  follow 
him,  he  began  to  spy  about  among  the  houses, 
with  great  caution  lest  they  should  hear  him :  and 
from  the  conversation  they  held  one  with  another 
he  soon  learned  the  name  and  dwelling  of  the 
man  who  had  killed  his  son;  and  to  complete  his 
vengeance,  he  went  to  the  outside  of  the  house 
where  the  man  was  located,  and  when  he  was 
quite  certain  that  it  was  the  very  man,  he  stretched 
himself  out  on  the  ground  waiting  for  everybody 
to  go  to  sleep.  As  soon  as  he  saw  the  opportune 
moment  to  get  his  revenge,  he  very  softly  broke 
through  the  palm  thatch  with  which  the  house 
was  covered,  and  entering  went  straight  up  to  the 
murderer  whose  head  he  cut  off  very  swiftly  with 
a  cutlass  which  he  carried  for  this  purpose.  This 
done  he  seized  the  head  and  rushed  away  to  save 
himself-j  The  enemy  who  by  this  time  had  rushed 
up,  hearing  the  struggle  and  convulsions  of  the 
dying  man,  recognizing  that  there  were  enemies 
about,  started  to  pursue  them.  But  as  the  chief's 
men  were  all  ready  on  guard  where  he  had  left 
them,  they  killed  many  as  they  came  out  of  the 
houses,  jand  then  they  withdrew  defending  them- 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  99 

selves  as  far  as  the  ambush,  where  all  the  others 
rushed  out  against  their  pursuers  with  much  im- 
petuosity and  killed  many  more.  With  this  vic- 
tory they  retired  to  their  own  land  well  pleased 
and  very  contented.  The  chief  took  with  him 
the  head  of  his  enemy,  and  upon  arriving  in  his 
village  the  first  thing  he  did  was  to  go  to  the  mid- 
dle of  the  square  in  the  village  where  he  impaled 
the  head  on  a  stake  in  the  sight  of  all,  speaking 
these  words:  "Now,  my  companions  and  friends, 
that  I  have  avenged  the  death  of  my  son,  and  have 
brought  here  before  your  eyes  the  head  of  the 
man  who  killed  him,  I  give  you  permission  to 
weep  for  him  as  much  as  you  wish :  for  up  to  now, 
you  would  have  been  right  had  you  wept  for  me, 
because  it  seemed  to  you  that  this  vengeance  was 
delayed  through  my  neglect,  or  that  having  for- 
gotten it  by  reason  of  great  affliction,  I  no  longer 
intended  to  take  it,  I,  who  am  the  one  most  deeply 
affected  by  his  death."  And  from  that  day  on, 
that  chief  was  always  much  feared  and  his  name 
became  renowned  in  the  whole  country. 

r>j  Another  instance,  not  less  worthy  of  admira- 
tion, occurred  between  Porto  Seguro  and  Spirito 
Sancto  during  the  war  in  which  they  killed 
Fernao  de  Sa,  son  of  Mem  de  Sa,  at  that  time 
Governour  General  of  those  regions.  The  Portu- 
guese having  captured  a  village  with  the  aid  of 


100          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

some  Indians  friendly  toward  them,  who  fought 
with  them,  these  Indians  came  to  one  of  the 
houses  to  take  the  enemy  prisoners,  as  they  had 
done  in  the  others.  But  they  [the  enemy],  de- 
termined to  die,  would  let  no  one  enter :  and  those 
outside,  realizing  their  determination  not  to  give 
themselves  up  under  any  circumstances,  told  them 
that  if  they  did  not  come  out  at  once  they  would 
certainly  set  fire  to  the  house.  And  our  Indians, 
seeing  that  the  threat  was  unavailing,  rather  than 
go  into  the  house,  determined  to  kill  as  many  of 
them  as  they  could,  set  fire  to  it :  and  from  within 
the  burning  house  the  chief,  seeing  that  there  was 
no  hope  of  salvation  nor  of  revenge,  and  that  they 
were  all  beginning  to  burn,  rushed  out  with  great 
fury  and  attacked  another  chief  who  was  walking 
outside  in  front  [of  the  house],  one  of  his  ene- 
mies, with  such  fury  that  the  latter  could  not  free 
himself  from  his  grasp;  he  dragged  him  toward 
the  house,  and  threw  himself  and  the  other  into 
the  fire  where  they  were  both  burned,  with  all  the 
others  of  whom  not  one  escaped. 

At  about  the  same  time  and  in  the  same 
place,  a  Portuguese  gave  such  a  sword  blow  to 
an  Indian  as  almost  cut  the  latter  in  two:  the 
Indian  falling  to  the  ground  as  though  almost 
dead,  before  expiring,  seized  a  spear  that  hap- 
pened to  lie  in  front  of  him,  and  threw  it  at  the 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  101 

man  who  had  mortally  wounded  him,  saying: 
"Receive  this  my  will  which  I  am  not  able  to 
carry  out,  for  this  is  all  I  can  do  to  you  by  way 
of  revenge."9  Whence  one  may  truly  infer,  that 
there  is  nothing  which  so  torments  them  at  the 
hour  of  their  death  as  the  grief  they  have  at  not, 
being  able  to  wreak  vengeance  on  their  enemies. 


102          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 


CHAPTER  XII. 

ABOUT  THE  DEATH  THEY  METE  OUT  TO 

THEIR  CAPTIVES  AND  THE  CRUELTIES 

THEY  PRACTISE  UPON  THEM 

One  of  the  customs  of  these  Indians  which 
is  most  repugnant  to  human  nature,  and  in  which 
they  seem  to  exceed  all  other  men,  is  the  great 
and  excessive  cruelty  which  they  employ  toward 
any  person  whatsoever,  not  of  their  tribe,  who 
may  fall  into  their  hands.  For  they  not  only  mete 
out  to  him  a  cruel  death,  at  a  time  when  they  are 
most  free  and  disengaged  from  all  passion;  but, 
moreover,  after  this,  in  order  completely  to 
satisfy  themselves,  they  eat  all  his  flesh,  thereby 
displaying  such  diabolical  cruelty  that  they  are 
even  worse  than  brute  beasts  who  have  no  reason 
and  were  not  born  to  exercise  clemency.98 

First,  whenever  they  capture  an  enemy,  one 
not  killed  in  active  combat,  they  take  him  to  their 
own  land,  so  that  they  may  all  take  vengeance 
on  him  according  to  their  taste.  As  soon  as  the 
people  in  the  village  have  news  that  they  are 
bringing  in  such  a  captive,  they  go  out  from  the 
village  for  about  half  a  league  where  they  wait 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  103 

for  him.  When  he  arrives  they  all  receive  him 
with  gross  insults  and  vituperation,  playing  upon 
flutes  which  it  is  their  custom  to  make  out  of  the 
leg  bones  of  enemies  whom  they  have  killed  in 
the  same  way.  And  as  they  enter  into  the  village 
after  having  walked  with  him  in  triumph  from 
one  place  to  another,  they  put  about  his  neck  a 
cotton  rope  made  for  the  purpose,  and  very  thick 
where  it  encircles  the  neck,  so  woven  and  tied 
that  no  one  can  do  or  undo  it  save  the  official  who 
made  it.  This  rope  has  two  long  ends  by  which 
they  tie  him  at  night  so  that  he  can  not  escape. 
Then  they  put  him  in  a  house,  and  next  to  the 
station  of  the  man  who  captured  him  they  hang 
up  his  hammock,  and  as  soon  as  he  [the  cap- 
tive] gets  into  it  all  the  insults  cease,  and  no  one 
abuses  him  further.  The  first  thing  they  pre- 
sent to  him  is  a  girl,  the  most  beautiful  and  hon- 
oured of  the  village,  whom  they  give  to  him  for 
a  wife:  and  from  that  day  on  she  is  responsible 
for  preparing  his  food  and  guarding  him,  and 
he  may  never  go  anywhere  unless  she  accompany 
him.  After  having  feted  him  for  a  year,  or  as 
long  as  they  desire,  they  decide  to  kill  him,  and 
during  the  last  days  before  his  death  they  pre- 
pare, for  the  celebration  of  the  carrying  out  of 
their  vengeance,  many  new  utensils,  and  make 
much  wine  of  the  juice  of  the  plant  they  call 


104          HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

aipim,  of  which  mention  has  been  made  above. 
During  this  time  they  erect  a  new  house  where 
they  put  the  prisoner.  On  the  day  in  which  he 
has  to  suffer,  very  early  in  the  morning,  before 
sunrise,  they  take  him  from  the  house,  and  with 
many  songs  and  much  dancing,  they  bathe  him  in 
a  stream.  And  as  soon  as  they  have  led  him  back 
to  the  village,  they  take  him  to  the  public  square 
in  the  centre  of  the  village  where  they  transfer 
the  rope  from  his  neck  to  his  waist,  with  one  end 
of  it  in  front  and  the  other  in  back;  and  at  each 
end  two  or  three  Indians  lay  hold.  They  leave 
his  hands  free  for  they  delight  in  seeing  him  de- 
fend himself  with  them:  and  they  place  within 
reach  some  hard  fruit  similar  to  oranges,  which 
they  have  among  them,  which  he  can  throw  and 
with  which  he  can  injure  whomever  he  wishes. 
The  man  who  is  appointed  to  kill  him  is  one  of 
the  bravest  and  most  distinguished  of  the  country, 
upon  whom  they  bestow  the  appointment  in  token 
of  their  esteem  and  as  a  mark  of  honour.  He 
feathers  his  whole  body  with  the  feathers  of  par- 
rots or  other  birds  of  various  colours.  Thus  at- 
tired, he  comes  upon  the  scene  with  an  Indian 
who  carries  his  sword  upon  an  earthen  vessel; 
the  sword  is  made  of  a  hard  and  heavy  wood  and 
is  shaped  like  a  club,  although  at  the  end  there  is 
a  resemblance  to  a  paddle.  Having  arrived  be- 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  105 

fore  the  prisoner,  he  takes  his  sword  and  twirls 
it  about,  first  one  way  then  another,  under  his  legs 
and  arms.  These  ceremonies  over,  he  withdraws 
a  bit  from  the  prisoner,  and  begins  to  make  a 
speech  in  the  manner  of  a  sermon,  saying,  that 
he  [the  captive]  should  show  himself  very  brave 
in  defense  of  his  person,  so  that  he  [the  execu- 
tioner] should  not  be  dishonoured,  and  so  that 
no  one  could  say  he  had  killed  a  weak  effeminate 
man  of  no  spirit,  and  that  he  [the  captive] 
should  remember  those  valiant  men  who  have 
died  that  way  at  the  hands  of  their  enemies,  and 
not  in  their  hammocks  like  weak  women  who  were 
not  born  to  achieve  such  honour  by  their  deaths. 
If  the  victim  is  a  spirited  man  and  is  not  dis- 
mayed by  this  incident  (as  sometimes  happens) 
he  replies  with  much  haughtiness  and  daring, 
that  he  should  be  killed  at  once  since  he  has  killed 
many  of  their  relatives  and  friends.  Neverthe- 
less he  is  aware  that,  as  they  are  taking  vengeance 
on  him  for  these  deaths,  just  so  will  his  tribe  have, 
like  valiant  men,  to  avenge  him;  and  they  will  do 
it  in  the  same  way  upon  him  [the  executioner] 
and  his  whole  tribe.  These  and  similar  words 
having  been  said,  which  they  employ  on  such  oc- 
casions, the  executioner  rushes  upon  him  with 
the  sword  raised  in  both  hands  as  though  he  were 
going  to  kill  him,  and  with  it  he  threatens  him 


106          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

many  times,  making  feints  as  though  he  would 
strike  him.  The  miserable  victim,  who  sees  above 
him  the  cruel  sword  in  the  grip  of  those  violent 
and  relentless  hands  of  his  arch-enemy,  with 
eyes  and  attention  fixed  upon  it,  vainly  defends 
himself  to  the  best  of  his  ability.  And  while  these 
attacks  are  going  on,  it  sometimes  happens  that 
they  come  to  grips  and  that  the  victim  maltreats 
the  executioner  with  his  own  sword.  But  this  is 
very  rare,  for  the  onlookers  rush  up  very  quickly 
to  free  him  from  his  hands.  As  soon  as  the  exe- 
cutioner sees  an  opportune  time,  he  gives  him 
such  a  blow  on  the  head  that  the  skull  is  shattered. 
There  is  an  old  Indian  woman  ready  with  a  large 
gourd  in  her  hand,  and  as  he  falls,  she  comes  up 
very  quickly  and  puts  it  under  the  head  to  catch  in 
it  the  brains  and  blood.  Having  finished  killing 
him  in  this  way,  and  having  cut  him  in  pieces, 
each  chief  who  is  present  takes  his  portion  to  re- 
gale the  people  of  his  village.  They  roast  and 
cook  every  part  of  him,  and  nothing  is  left  of 
which  the  people  in  the  community  do  not  par- 
take, every  one  save  the  man  who  killed  him;  he 
eats  nothing,  but  on  the  other  hand  orders  him- 
self scarified  over  the  whole  body,  because  they 
consider  it  certain  that  he  would  soon  die  if  he 
did  not  spill  some  of  his  own  blood  as  soon  as  he 
had  performed  this  duty.  They  are  accustomed  to 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  107 

smoke  an  arm  or  a  leg  or  some  other  part,"  and  to 
keep  it  some  months,  so  that,  when  they  wish,  they 
can  have  another  feast  with  the  same  ceremonies, 
in  order  to  renew  the  pleasure  of  their  vengeance, 
as  on  the  day  when  they  killed  the  victim.  And 
after  they  have  once  thus  eaten  the  flesh  of  their 
enemies,  their  hatred  is  confirmed  in  perpetuity, 
for  they  feel  this  insult  very  deeply,  and  for  that 
reason  they  are  always  trying  to  avenge  them- 
selves one  on  the  other,  as  I  have  said.  And  if 
the  woman  who  was  the  wife  of  the  prisoner  is 
found  to  be  with  child,  after  the  child  is  born 
and  weaned,  it  is  killed  and  eaten  without  there 
being  a  person  to  pity  so  unjust  a  death.  Its  very 
grandparents  (who  should  feel  the  most  grief) 
are  the  ones  to  aid  in  eating  it  with  the  greatest 
zest,  and  they  say  that,  as  it  is  the  son  of  its 
father,  they  are  taking  vengeance  on  the  father; 
for  they  believe  that  under  the  circumstances  this 
creature  derives  nothing  from  the  mother,  nor  do 
they  think  that  such  unfriendly  seed  can  blend 
with  her  blood.  It  is  only  with  that  object  in  view 
that  they  give  him  the  woman  to  live  with ;  for  in 
truth  they  are  such  [fiendish]  people  that  they 
would  not  be  completely  avenged  upon  the  father 
unless  they  put  into  execution  this  cruelty  upon 
the  innocent  son.  But  as  the  mother  knows  the 
end  which  her  child  must  suffer,  often  when  she 


108          HISTORY  or  THE  PROVINCE 

realizes  she  is  pregnant  she  kills  the  child  in  the 
womb,  so  that  it  will  not  see  the  light.  It  some- 
times happens  also  that  she  falls  in  love  with  her 
husband,  and  succeeds  in  fleeing  with  him  to  his 
country  to  save  him  from  death.  There  are  a  few 
Portuguese100  who  have  escaped  that  way  and 
who  are  still  living.  Nevertheless,  it  would  J>e  * 
impossible  for  one  to  escape  from  their  hands 
with  his  life  who  is  not  saved  by  this  means,  or 
by  some  occult  stratagem,  for  they  [the  Indians] 
are  not  accustomed  to  grant  life  to  any  captive,  • 
nor  would  they  give  up  their  hope  of  vengeance  i 
for  any  wealth  in  the  world,  whether  the  victim 
were  male  or  female.  Except  that  if  a  chief  or 
some  one  else  in  a  village  happens  to  marry  one  of 
the  female  slaves  of  the  enemy,  as  very  often  hap- 
pens, by  this  act  she  becomes  free,  and  they  agree 
not  to  take  vengeance  upon  her,  in  deference  to 
the  man  who  married  her.  But  as  soon  as  she  - 
dies  a  natural  death,  in  order  to  comply  with  the 
rules  of  their  cruelty,  (and  there  is  nothing  in 
this  to  give  offense  to  the  husband)  they  are  ac- 
customed to  crush  her  head,  although  in  rare 
cases  when  she  has  sons,  these  will  not  allow  any 
one  to  come  near  her,  and  they  stand  guard  over 
her  body  until  it  is  given  burial.103 

There  are   other   Indians   of   another   race 
found  in  those  regions,  even  fiercer  and  with  less 


or  SANTA  CRUZ  109 

reason  than  these.  They  are  called  Aimores,  and 
travel  along  the  coast  as  highwaymen,  and  they 
inhabit  the  region  from  the  Captaincy  of  Ilheos 
to  that  of  Porto  Seguro  whither  they  came  from, 
the  sertao  about  the  year  1555.  Their  reason  for 
living  in  this  part  of  the  country,  more  than  else- 
where, is  that  the  country  is  better  suited  to  their 
ends,  as  much  because  of  the  dense  woods  in 
which  they  are  always  lying  in  ambush,  as  for  the 
quantity  of  game  there,  which  is  the  principal 
food  on  which  they  are  maintained.  These 
Aimores  are  whiter  and  of  larger  stature  than  the 
rest  of  the  Indians  of  that  land,  and  their  lan- 
guage has  no  similarity  or  relationship  to  that 
of  the  others.  They  all  live  in  the  thick  woods 
like  brute  beasts,  without  having  villages  or 
houses  in  which  to  gather.  They  are  excessively 
strong,  and  carry  very  long  bows  which  are  thick 
in  proportion  to  their  strength,  with  arrows  to 
match.  These  brutes  [Aimores}  have  done  much 
harm  in  the  Captaincies  from  the  time  they  de- 
scended on  the  coast,  and  have  killed  some  Portu- 
guese and  slaves,  for  they  are  very  barbarous  and 
hate  everybody  in  the  land.  ;  They  do  not  fight 
in  the  open,  nor  have  they  sufficient  courage  for 
that]  they  hide  in  the  thicket  near  a  path,  and 
whefTany  one  passes  they  shoot  him  in  the  heart 
or  some  other  vital  spot  in  order  to  kill  him,  and 


I 


110          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

they  never  shoot  an  arrow  without  hitting  the 
mark,-  The  women  carry  thick  clubs  like  maces 
with  which  they  help  dispatch  people  when  the 
occasion  offers.  Up  to  now  no  means  of  destroy- 
ing this  perfidious  race  has  been  found;  because 
as  soon  as  they  see  an  opportune  moment  they 
make  an  attack  and  immediately  retire  very 
quickly  to  the  forest,  where  they  are  so  agile  and 
crafty  that,  when  we  think  they  are  fleeing  from 
their  pursuers,  they  leave  behind  them  some  of 
their  men,  who  hide  and  shoot  any  one  who  care- 
lessly goes  on ;  ii^this  way  they  kill  many  people. 
For  this  reason,fall  who  live  in  the  country,  In- 
dians and  Portuguese  alike,  fear  them  greatly^ 
consequently,  in  those  parts  infested  by  them,  no 
inhabitant  will  go  to  his  ranch  overland  without 
taking  with  him  fifteen  or  twenty  slaves  armed 
with  bows  and  arrows  for  his  protection.  Most 
of  the  time  they  wander  about  scattered  in  differ- 
ent places,  and  when  they  want  to  assemble  they 
whistle  like  birds  or  like  monkeys,  in  such  a  way 
that  they  understand  and  recognize  one  another 
without  being  recognized  by  any  other  person. 
They  do  not  spare  any  one's  life  even  for  an  hour, 
but  they  very  suddenly  and  swiftly  take  their  re- 
venge; so  much  so  that  often  while  the  person  is 
still  alive  they  cut  off  his  flesh  and  roast  and  eat 
it  before  his  very  eyes.  I  Finally,  these  savages 

/ 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  111 

are  so  harsh  and  cruel  that  words  are  lacking  to 
describe  their  cruelty.  The  Portuguese  have  al- 
ready taken  some  of  them :  but  as  they  are  so  bar- 
barous and  untractable,  they  have  never  been  able 
to  tame  them,  or  force  any  of  them  into  servitude, 
as  the  other  Indians  of  the  land  who  accept,  un- 
like these,  submission  to  captivity. 

There  are  also  certain  Indians  on  the  banks 
oLthe  Maranhao,  on  the  eastern  shore,  in  latitude 
about  two  degrees,  who  are  called  Tapuyas,  who 
say  they  are  of  the  same  race  as  these  Aimares, 
or  at  least  brothers  in  arms,  and  hence  they  do 
not  molest  one  another  when  they  meet.  These 
Tapuyas  do  not  eat  the  flesh  of  any  of  their 
enemies ;  on  the  other  hand  they  are  arch-enemies 
of  all  those  who  do  eat  flesh,  and  pursue  them 
with  mortal  hatred.  -Nevertheless  they  have  an- 
other rite  more  ugly  and  diabolical,  contrary  to 
nature  and  inspiring  great  disgust.  It  is  this: 
if  one  of  them  happens  to  be  so  sick  that  they 
despair  of  his  life,  his  father  and  mother,  brothers 
and  sisters,  or  any  other  near  relatives,  kill  him 
with  their  own  hands,  holding  that  they  have 
more  compassion  for  him  thus  than  if  they  per- 
mit death  to  hover  about  him,  slowly  consuming 
him  for  a  vague  length  of  time.  And  the  worst 
of  it  is,  they  roast,  cook  and  eat  all  his  flesh,  and 
say  that  they  should  not  allow  anything  so  low 


112          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

and  vile  as  earth  to  devour  the  flesh  of  any  one 
they  loved  so  much;  that,  since  he  is  their  rela- 
tive, there  is  so  great  a  bond  of  love  between  them 
that  the  most  honourable  sepulture  they  can  de- 
vise is  to  place  him  within  themselves  and  shelter 
him  forever  in  their  entrails. 

As  it  is  my  principal  intention  to  speak 
here  only  of  those  Indians  who  are  common  to 
the  coast,  and  who  have  communication  with  the 
Portuguese,  I  do  not  wish  to  delay  by  going  into 
the  details  of  some  of  the  rites  of  this  and  other 
nations  in  the  Province;  for  it  would  seem  to  me 
rash  and  imprudent  to  set  down  in  so  truthful  a 
history  what  by  chance  might  be  false  informa- 
tion, because  of  the  little  news  we  now  have  about 
the  greater  part  of  the  aborigines  who  live  far 
inland. 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  113 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

OF  THE  RESULTS  OBTAINED  THERE  BY 

THE  FATHERS  OF  THE  COMPANY  IN 

SPREADING  THEIR  DOCTRINE. 

In  all  the  Captaincies  of  that  Province  the 
Fathers  of  the  Company  of  JESUS  have  erected 
monasteries,  and  have  built  a  few  churches  in  cer- 
tain places  among  the  Indians  who  are  peace- 
able, where  some  of  the  Fathers  reside  in  order  to 
preach  their  Doctrine  and  to  make  Christians  of 
them:  they  all  accept  this  Doctrine  readily  and 
without  any  contradiction.  For,  as  they  have  no 
law,  or  anything  which  they  worship,  it  is  very 
easy  for  them  to  accept  ours.  And  on  the  other 
hand,  with  the  same  facility  they  turn  away  for 
the  most  trivial  reason  and  many  flee  to  the  sertao 
after  having  been  baptized  and  instructed  in 
Christian  Doctrine.102  Because  the  Fathers  have 
observed  their  inconstancy  in  this  respect,  and  the 
slight  capacity  they  have  for  observing  the  com- 
mandments of  the  Law  of  God  (for  it  is  among 
the  elders  that  the  seed  of  their  Doctrine  brings 
forth  the  least  fruit)  they  try,  especially,  to  plant 
the  Doctrine  among  the  children  whom  they 


114          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

raise  from  infancy  instructed  in  it.  And  in  this 
way,  they  have  hopes  that  with  time  (by  the  grace 
of  God)  the  Christian  religion  will  spread 
throughout  the  whole  Province,  and  that  some  day 
our  Holy  Catholic  Faith  will  flourish  as  univer- 
sally there  as  in  any  other  part  of  Christendom. 
And  in  order  that  the  fruit  of  this  Doctrine  might 
not  be  lost,  but  might  continue  to  grow,  the 
Fathers  themselves  decided  to  remove  occasions 
which,  on  our  part,  might  be  hindrances,  causes 
for  scandal,  or  prejudicial  to  the  consciences  of 
the  inhabitants  of  the  country.  Since  these  In- 
dians covet  certain  things  which  come  from  the 
Kingdom  of  Portugal,  namely,  shirts,  jerkins, 
iron  tools,  and  similar  things,  they  sell  one  an- 
other in  exchange  for  these  articles  to  the  Portu- 
guese; these,  on  the  other  hand,  capture  as  many 
as  they  want  and  do  them  many  injuries  without 
any  one's  checking  them  [the  Portuguese].10' 
But  now  there  is  no  longer  this  disorder  in  the 
land  or  the  traffic  in  slaves  as  formerly.  For, 
after  the  Fathers  saw  the  unreasonableness  with 
which  they  were  treating  the  Indians,  and  the 
slight  service  to  God  proceeding  from  these  acts, 
they  took  this  business  in  hand  and  prohibited,  as 
I  said,  the  many  assaults  which  the  Portuguese 
themselves  were  making  on  these  shores :  for  they 
were  burdening  their  consciences  heavily  by  seiz- 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  115 

ing  unlawfully  many  Indians  and  by  waging 
unjust  wars  upon  them.  And  to  avoid  all  this, 
the  Fathers  ordered  and  arranged  with  the  Gov- 
ernours  and  Captains  of  the  land  that  there 
should  be  no  more  trading  in  slaves  in  the  same 
way  as  in  the  past,  nor  were  any  Portuguese  to  be 
allowed  to  go  to  an  Indian  village  without  the 
permission  of  the  Captain  himself.  And  if  they 
disobeyed,  or  did  wrong  to  the  Indians  in  any 
way,  even  if  they  had  a  permit,  they  were  well 
punished  for  the  deed  according  to  the  crime. 
Aside  from  this,  in  order  that  there  may  be  more 
frankness  in  that  part  of  the  country,  whatever 
slaves  are  newly  come  out  of  the  sertao,  or  from 
one  Captaincy  to  another,  all  go  first  to  the  custom 
house  where  they  examine  them  and  ask  them 
questions :  who  sold  them  and  what  were  the  terms 
of  purchase;  for  no  one  has  the  right  to  sell  them 
save  their  fathers  (if  in  case  of  dire  necessity) 
or  those  who  have  captured  them  in  a  just  war; 
those  whom  they  find  acquired  illegally,  they  set 
at  liberty.  In  this  way  the  Indians  who  are  pur- 
chased are  fairly  acquired,  and  the  inhabitants 
of  the  land  do  not  fail  on  this  account  to  make 
good  progress  with  their  possessions. 

The  Fathers  have  done  many  other  benefi- 
cent and  pious  deeds  in  those  parts,  and  are 
continuing  to  do  so,  and  in  truth  one  can  not  deny 


118          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

great  and  populous  cities,  which  possessed  much 
riches,  and  very  long  streets  in  which  the  only 
occupation  was  working  in  gold  and  precious 

f  stones.rHere  they  remained  a  few  days  with  the 
inhabitants,  who  seeing  among  them  some  iron 
tools  which  they  carried  with  them,  asked  from 
whom  they  had  been  obtained  and  by  what  means 
they  had  come  into  their  hands.  They  replied 
that  there  was  a  certain  people  who  lived  by  the 
sea  toward  the  east,  who  wore  beards  and  were  of 
a  different  appearance  from  themselves,  from 
whom  they  had  gotten  these  things,  and  that 
these  were  Portuguese.  J  These  Indians  [the  in- 
habitants of  the  cities]  gave  similar  reports  about 
the  Castillians  of  Peru,  telling  them  [the  travel- 
ling Indians]  that  they  had  news  from  the  other 
sea-coast  that  there  was  a  similar  people  there, 

.  and  then  they  gave  them  discs  covered  with  sheets 
of  gold  and  set  with  emeralds:  and  they  asked 
them  to  take  these  [objects]  with  them,  in  order 
that  in  case  they  reached  their  own  land  [still 
possessing]  them,  they  should  tell  the  Portuguese 
that  they  wished  to  barter  such  and  similar  ob- 
jects with  them  [Portuguese]  for  the  iron  utensils, 
and  to  have  communication  with  them,  and  they 
[inhabitants  of  the  cities]  did  so  because  they 
were  ready  to  receive  them  [Portuguese]  with 
much  good  will.  After  this,  they  [travelling  In- 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  119 

dians]  left  there  and  came  to  the  River  of  the 
Amazons  where  they  embarked  in  canoes  which 
they  made:  and  after  navigating  thereon  more 
than  two  years,  they  arrived  in  the  Province  of 
Quito,  a  land  of  Peru  peopled  with  Castillians. 
The  latter,  seeing  a  new  people,  were  much  sur- 
prised, and  did  not  know  how  to  determine  whence 
they  had  come,  nor  for  what  reason.  But  soon  they 
were  recognized,  by  some  Portuguese  who  hap- 
pened to  be  in  that  country,  as  aborigines  from  the 
Province  of  Sancta  Cruz.  And  asked  by  them  the 
reason  for  their  coming,  they  related  the  matter  in 
detail,  making  known  all  that  had  happened  to 
them.  Thus  the  news  came  to  us,  both  through  the 
Castillians  of  Peru  where  these  discs  were  sold  for 
a  great  price,  and  from  the  Portuguese  who  were 
there  when  the  event  happened,  and  with  whom 
certain  people  in  Portugal  have  spoken,  people 
of  authority  and  worthy  of  credit ;  these  have  tes- 
tified that  they  have  heard  them  relate  all  this  in 
detail,  just  as  I  am  relating  it.  It  is  well  known 
that  all  these  riches  lie  within  the  land  belonging 
to  the  King  of  Portugal,  and  that  they  are  un- 
doubtedly nearer  to  the  towns  of  the  Portuguese 
than  to  those  of  the  Castillians.  This  is  clearly 
shown  by  the  short  length  of  time  the  Indians  took 
to  reach  there  [the  rich  cities],  and  the  great 
length  of  time  which  they  spent  going  from  there 


120          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

to  Peru,  which  was  two  years,  as  I  have  said. 
Aside  from  the  reliability  of  this  information 
which  we  have  from  these  channels,  there  are 
]  many  other  Indians  in  the  country  who  also  affirm 
Ltbat  there  is  much  gold  in  the  sertdo :  these  reports, 
although  emanating  from  people  of  little  trust- 
worthiness and  credence,  are  believed  in  that  re- 
gion, because  they  are  for  the  most  part  from  eye- 
witnesses, and  [Indians]  in  various  parts  of  the 
country  speak  [all]  in  the  same  tenor.  It  is 
primarily  a  matter  of  public  belief  that  there  is  a 
very  large  lake  in  the  interior  of  the  country,  in 
which  rises  the  river  Sao  Francisco  of  which  I 
have  treated:  in  this  [lake],  they  say,  are  many 
islands  on  which  many  cities  are  built,  and  there 
are  also  many  other  large  cities  on  the  shore, 
where  there  is  also  much  gold,  a  greater  quantity 
of  it  (they  affirm)  than  in  any  other  part  of  the 
Province.  Moreover,  inland  not  very  far  from 
the  Rio  da  Prata,  the  Castillians  have  discovered 

' 

a  mine  of  the  metal,  from  which  they  have  taken 
gold  to  Peru,  and  from  each  quintal  of  ore  they 
say  they  have  taken  five  hundred  and  seventy 
cruzados ;  and  from  another  source,  three  hun- 
dred and  more  [from  each  quintal] :  they  obtain 
also,  from  the  same  ore,  an  infinite  amount  of 
copper.  They  have  discovered  also  other  mines 
of  white  and  green  stones,  and  stones  of  other 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  121 

colours:  and  they  all  have  five  or  six  facets  like 

diamonds,  and  they  are  cut  by  Nature  as  if  it  had 

been  done  by  human  skill.104    These  stones  grow 

in  a  rock  the  size  of  a  cocoanut  which  is  entirely 

hollow,  with  more  than  four  hundred  stones  in 

the  interior,  stuck  into  the  shell  with  the  points 

projecting  inward.    Some  of  these  rocks  are  found 

in  an  imperfect  state;  because  they  say  that,  when 

it  is  time  for  them  to  burst,  they  do  so  with  as 

much  noise  as  though  a  whole  army  had  shot  off 

their  arquebuses:  and  so  they  find  many  which 

(as  they  say)   the  force  of  the  explosion  has 

caused  to  be  embedded  in  the  ground  to  the  depth 

of  one  or  two  estadios.™1     I  do  not  speak  here  of 

their  value,  for  at  the  present    time    it    is    not 

known :  but  I  do  know  that  of  these  and  of  other 

varieties  there  are  many,  and  very  fine  ones,  in 

the  Province,  and  many  metals,  from  which  one 

may  extract  infinite  wealth.     May  God  permit 

all  of  these  things  to  be  found,  even  in  our  days, 

so   that    this    wealth    may    greatly    augment 

the  crown :  and  we  hope  that  thus  (by  divine 

favour)  the  Kingdom  shall  soon  be  placed 

in  so  happy  and  prosperous  a  condition, 

that  more  can  not  be  desired. 

The  end. 

Printed  in  Lisbon,  in  the  office  of  Antonio 
Gonsalvez.    In  the  Year  1576. 


120          HISTORY  OF  THE  PROVINCE 

to  Peru,  which  was  two  years,  as  I  have  said. 
Aside  from  the  reliability  of  this  information 
which  we  have  from  these  channels,  there  are 
j  many  other  Indians  in  the  country  who  also  affirm 
Lthat  there  is  much  gold  in  the  sertdo :  these  reports, 
although  emanating  from  people  of  little  trust- 
worthiness and  credence,  are  believed  in  that  re- 
gion, because  they  are  for  the  most  part  from  eye- 
witnesses, and  [Indians]  in  various  parts  of  the 
country  speak  [all]  in  the  same  tenor.  It  is 
primarily  a  matter  of  public  belief  that  there  is  a 
very  large  lake  in  the  interior  of  the  country,  in 
which  rises  the  river  Sao  Francisco  of  which  I 
have  treated:  in  this  [lake],  they  say,  are  many 
islands  on  which  many  cities  are  built,  and  there 
are  also  many  other  large  cities  on  the  shore, 
where  there  is  also  much  gold,  a  greater  quantity 
of  it  (they  affirm)  than  in  any  other  part  of  the 
Province.  Moreover,  inland  not  very  far  from 
the  Rio  da  Prata,  the  Castillians  have  discovered 
a  mine  of  the  metal,  from  which  they  have  taken 
gold  to  Peru,  and  from  each  quintal  of  ore  they 
say  they  have  taken  five  hundred  and  seventy 
cruzados;  and  from  another  source,  three  hun- 
dred and  more  [from  each  quintal] :  they  obtain 
also,  from  the  same  ore,  an  infinite  amount  of 
copper.  They  have  discovered  also  other  mines 
of  white  and  green  stones,  and  stones  of  other 


OF  SANTA  CRUZ  121 

colours:  and  they  all  have  five  or  six  facets  like 

diamonds,  and  they  are  cut  by  Nature  as  if  it  had 

been  done  by  human  skill.104    These  stones  grow 

in  a  rock  the  size  of  a  cocoanut  which  is  entirely 

hollow,  with  more  than  four  hundred  stones  in 

the  interior,  stuck  into  the  shell  with  the  points 

projecting  inward.    Some  of  these  rocks  are  found 

in  an  imperfect  state;  because  they  say  that,  when 

it  is  time  for  them  to  burst,  they  do  so  with  as 

much  noise  as  though  a  whole  army  had  shot  off 

their  arquebuses:  and  so  they  find  many  which 

(as  they  say)   the  force  of  the  explosion  has 

caused  to  be  embedded  in  the  ground  to  the  depth 

of  one  or  two  estadios™     I  do  not  speak  here  of 

their  value,  for  at  the  present    time    it    is    not 

known:  but  I  do  know  that  of  these  and  of  other 

varieties  there  are  many,  and  very  fine  ones,  in 

the  Province,  and  many  metals,  from  which  one 

may  extract  infinite  wealth.     May  God  permit 

all  of  these  things  to  be  found,  even  in  our  days, 

so   that    this    wealth    may    greatly    augment 

the  crown :  and  we  hope  that  thus  (by  divine 

favour)  the  Kingdom  shall  soon  be  placed 

in  so  happy  and  prosperous  a  condition, 

that  more  can  not  be  desired. 

The  end. 

Printed  in  Lisbon,  in  the  office  of  Antonio 
Gonsalvez.    In  the  Year  1576. 


Treatise 
ON  THE 
J(and  o 

IN   WHICH   Is    CONTAINED 

INFORMATION    CONCERNING 

THE  CONDITIONS  IN  THOSE 

PARTS: 

BY 

Pero  de  Magalhaes 


Introduction 

Among  the  few  writers  in  Portugal  who  have 
dealt  with  Brazilian  affairs,  Pero  de  Magalhaes 
deserves  a  distinguished  place;  for,  going  over  to 
that  continent  something  like  seventy  years  after 
its  discovery,  he  remained  there  a  long  enough 
time  to  acquire  detailed  data  about  the  natives 
of  those  portions  of  the  land  nearest  to  our  settle- 
ments, about  their  customs,  and  about  some  of  the 
products  with  which  liberal  Nature  has  enriched 
that  country. 

Upon  his  return  to  the  Kingdom  (in  order 
to  urge  his  compatriots  to  settle  new  colonies  in 
that  fertile  region)  he  wrote  a  Relation  of  what 
he  had  seen  and  learned,  under  the  title  of  His- 
toria  da  prouincia  sacta  Cruz,  a  que  vulgarmete 
chamamos  Brazil,  a  book  which  today  is  exces- 
sively rare,  there  never  having  been  any  edition  of 
it  but  the  first,  printed  in  1576. 

Besides  this  opuscule  and  one  other  which  he 
printed  on  the  Orthography  of  the  Portuguese 
Language,  no  other  works  of  Pero  de  Magalhaes 
were  known,  when  chance  brought  to  light  the  one 
which  we  now  offer  to  the  public:  it  is  preserved 
in  manuscript  of  a  handwriting  contemporary 
with  that  period. 


126    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

From  the  dedication  which  accompanied  it, 
it  is  known  that  after  his  return  from  Brazil  the 
author  wrote  a  Tratado  of  all  that  he  had  seen 
there,  which  he  offered  to  the  King,  Dom  Sebas- 
tian, who  then  wielded  the  sceptre  of  the  Portu- 
guese Monarchy:  and  that  a  few  days  afterward 
he  offered  this  one  to  the  Cardinal,  Prince  Dom 
Henrique:  it  being  very  probable  that  after  the 
completion  of  both  he  undertook  the  last  one,  per- 
haps the  most  extensive  of  any:  which  for  that 
reason  he  destined  for  the  press,  and  dedicated 
to  Dom  Lionis  Pereira,  a  former  Governour  of 
Malacca,  through  the  intervention  of  the  great 
Luis  de  Camoes. 

In  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  manuscript  we 
offer  today  is  more  succinct  than  the  printed  ac- 
count, it  should  not  be  considered  lacking  in  in- 
terest, for  in  it  the  author  refers  to  some  particu- 
lars which  he  omitted  in  the  other,  and  even  when 
he  relates  the  same  facts,  it  is  not  only  with  a  dif- 
ference in  expression,  but  also  many  times  with 
a  difference  in  details.  The  reader  who  takes  the 
trouble  to  compare  these  two  works  will  easily  be 
convinced  of  their  difference  and  importance.108 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     127 


To  THE  VERY  EXALTED  AND  MOST  SERENE 

PRINCE,  DOM  ANRRIQUE,  CARDINAL, 

INFANT  OF  PORTUGAL. 

The  fact  that  a  few  days  ago  I  presented  another 
Summary  of  the  Lands  of  Brazil  to  the  King  our 
Master,  was  primarily  in  fulfillment  of  that  obligation 
which  we  all  owe  as  subjects  to  our  King:  and  for 
the  same  reason  it  seems  necessary  to  me  (very 
exalted  and  most  serene  Sir)  to  offer  this  as  well  to 
Your  Highness,  to  whom  is  due  all  praise  for  the 
increase  and  flourishing  condition  of  the  Kingdom: 
for  you  were  always  very  solicitous  in  increasing  the 
realm  and  keeping  its  subjects  and  vassals  in  perpetual 
peace.  Understanding  this  and  knowing  how  ac- 
ceptable to  Your  Highness  are  good  services  rendered 
to  the  realm,  I  communed  with  myself  as  to  what  I 
could  bring  from  those  parts  to  give  as  a  testimony 
of  my  pure  intentions;  and  I  found  that  a  greater 
service  (although  it  may  not  seem  so)  could  not  be 
expected  fvom  an  insignificant  individual  than  to  write 
this  Relation  on  the  Land  of  Brazil  (something  which 
until  noiv  no  one  has  undertaken),  so  that  here  in  the 
Kingdom  its  fertility  might  be  divulged  and  many 
poor  persons  might  be  induced  to  go  live  in  that  Prov- 
ince: for  in  this  way  will  the  Province  be  happy  and 
increase.  Because  Your  Highness  realizes  how  great 
a  service  to  God  and  the  King  our  Master  this  descrip- 
tion will  be,  I  determined  to  compose  it  with  the  in- 


128     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

tention  of  offering  it  to  Your  Highness;  its  ungracious 
reception  on  your  part  will  greatly  grieve  your  humble 
servant;  but  with  the  favour  of  your  acceptance  I 
shall  be  gratified,  beseeching  our  Lord  to  bestow  upon 
you  many  prosperous  years  of  life,  and  to  grant  that 
you  enjoy  perpetual  felicity  in  your  royal  state. 
Amen. 

The  humble  vassal  of  Your  Highness, 

Pero  de  Magalhaes,  etc. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     129 


PROLOGUE  TO  THE  READER. 

My  intention  in  this  Summary  (discreet  and 
inquiring  reader)  was  only  to  announce  in  few 
words  the  fertility  and  abundance  of  the  Land  of 
Brazil,  in  order  that  the  reputation  of  that  coun- 
try might  reach  many  persons  who  live  in  poverty 
in  the  Kingdom,  and  that  they  might  not  hesitate 
to  choose  it  for  their  relief:  because  the  land  it- 
self is  so  natural,  and  so  favourable  to  strangers, 
that  there  is  room  for  all,  and  to  every  one  is 
offered  relief,  however  poor  and  without  re- 
sources he  may  be;  and  the  country  is  constantly 
becoming  more  prosperous:  and  as  soon  as  the 
luxuriant  fields  (which  are  today  unsettled  for 
lack  of  people)  are  occupied  large  ranches  will  be 
established  there,  such  as  the  inhabitants  in  the 
land  have  already  established  in  the  fields  they 
possess:  moreover,  it  is  hoped  that  in  time  this 
Province  will  flourish  in  wealth  as  have  those  of 
the  Antilles  of  Spain:  for  it  is  certain  that  the 
soil  in  itself  is  very  rich,  and  has  in  it  many 
metals  which  till  now  have  not  been  discovered, 
either  because  there  were  no  people  in  the  land  to 
start  the  enterprise,  or  because  of  the  negligence 
of  the  inhabitants  who  do  not  care  for  this  work: 


130    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

whatever  the  reason  for  failing  to  do  it,  I  do  not 
know:  but  our  Lord  will  permit  the  discovery 
there  of  great  treasure  even  in  our  day,  as  much 
for  the  increase  and  service  of  Your  Highness  as 
for  the  advantage  of  the  vassals  who  wish  to  serve 
you. 

DESCRIPTION  or  THE  COAST. 

The  coast  of  Brazil  lies  toward  the  west  and 
runs  north  and  south.  From  the  first  settlement 
to  the  last  is  a  distance  of  three  hundred  and  fifty 
leagues.  There  are  eight  Captaincies,  all  of 
which  have  very  safe  harbours,  where  any  ships, 
no  matter  how  large  they  may  be,  can  enter. 
There  are  no  Portuguese  settlements  inland,  be- 
cause the  Indians  prevent  them :  moreover,  on  ac- 
count of  assistance  from  and  dealings  with  the 
Kingdom,  it  was  necessary  for  the  settlements  to 
be  near  the  sea,  to  facilitate  the  exchange  of  mer- 
chandise; therefore  they  all  live  by  the  coast. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     131 


[FIRST  PART] 

CHAPTER  I. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  or  TAMARACA. 

The  town  of  the  first  Captaincy,  and  the  old- 
est one,  is  on  an  island  called  Tamaraca,  very 
close  to  the  mainland :  the  island  is  three  leagues 
long,  and  two  wide:  the  Captaincy  has  a  coast- 
line of  thirty-five  leagues:  the  coast  to  the  north 
belongs  to  Dona  Jeronima  Dalbuquerque,  former 
wife  of  Pero  Lopes  de  Sousa,  who  has  appointed 
a  Captain  over  it.  Here  there  is  a  sugar  mill,  and 
now  two  more  are  building,  and  much  brazil- 
wood and  cotton.  There  may  be  about  one  hun- 
dred citizens.  In  this  Captaincy  there  is  much 
good  land  for  settling  and  establishing  ranches. 


132     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

CHAPTER  II. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  PERNAMBUCO. 

The  Captaincy  of  Pernambuco  is  five  leagues 
from  Tamaraca  toward  the  south,  in  the  altitude 
of  eight  degrees,  and  the  Captain  and  Governour 
is  Duarte  Coelho  Dalbuquerque.    There  are  two 
towns;  the  principal  one  is  called  Olinda  and  the 
other   Garassu,   which  is   four  leagues  inland. 
There  are  about  a  thousand  inhabitants  in  this 
Captaincy.     There  are  twenty-three  sugar  mills 
of  which  three  or  four   are   not  yet   completed. 
Some  mills  function  with  oxen,  and  these  are 
called  tripiches;  they  make  less  sugar  than  the 
others,  but  the  majority  of  them  in  Brazil  func- 
tion with  water.     Each  one  of  these  mills  makes 
three  thousand  arrobas  [of  sugar]  per  year.     In 
this  Captaincy  they  make  more  sugar  than  in  the 
others,  for  there  are  years  when  they  exceed  fifty 
thousand  arrobas,  although  the  yield  is  not  cer- 
tain but  depends  upon  the  crop  and  the  weather. 
This  is  one  of  the  rich  districts  of  Brazil;  there 
are  many  Indian  slaves,  which  are  the  principal 
commodity  of  the  region:  here  they  buy  them  and 
take  them  to  all  the  other  Captaincies,  because 
there  are  more  of  them  and  they  are  cheaper  than 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     133 

anywhere  else  on  the  coast:  there  is  much  brazil- 
wood and  cotton,  from  which  the  inhabitants  are 
getting  rich.  The  haven  where  the  ships  enter  is 
a  league  from  the  town  of  Olinda :  they  disembark 
on  the  beach,  and  also  in  a  little  river  which  flows 
right  up  to  the  city  itself.  More  ships  from  Por- 
tugal come  to  this  Captaincy  each  year  than  to 
any  of  the  others.  There  is  in  the  Captaincy  a 
monastery  of  the  Fathers  of  the  Company  of 
Jesus. 

RIVERS. 

There  are  two  mighty  rivers  as  far  as  the 
Bahia  de  Todos  los  Santos :  one  is  called  S.  Fran- 
cisco; it  is  in  ten  and  a  half  degrees;  it  enters 
the  sea  with  such  fury  that  its  waters  run  twenty 
leagues  into  the  ocean.  The  other  river  is  in 
eleven  and  two-thirds  degrees  and  is  called  Rio 
Real :  it  is  also  very  large  and  its  waters  run  far 
into  the  ocean. 


134     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  BAHIA  DE  TODOS  LOS 
SANTOS. 

The  Captaincy  of  Bahia  de  Todos  los 
Santos  is  one  hundred  leagues  from  Pernambuco, 
in  the  altitude  of  thirteen  degrees.  It  belongs  to 
the  King  our  Master,  and  there  reside  the  Gov- 
ernours,  Bishop  and  Ouvidor  Geral  of  the  whole 
coast.  This  is  the  part  of  Brazil  most  thickly 
populated  by  Portuguese.  There  are  three  towns, 
the  principal  one  of  which  is  the  City  of  Sal- 
vador: another  is  Villa  Velha  located  by  the  bar: 
this  was  the  first  settlement  in  the  Captaincy. 
Later  Thome  de  Sousa,  the  Governour,  built  the 
City  of  Salvador  half  a  league  farther  along 
the  Bahia  [bay],  as  it  was  a  more  suitable  and 
advantageous  location  for  the  inhabitants.  Four 
leagues  inland,  there  is  the  other  town  called 
Paripem.  There  are  about  eleven  hundred  in- 
habitants in  this  Captaincy;  and  eighteen  sugar 
mills,  some  recently  constructed.  They  also  get 
much  sugar,  although  the  inhabitants  give  more 
attention  to  cotton  than  to  cane  because  it  grows 
better  in  that  soil.  Within  the  city  there  is  a 
monastery  of  the  Fathers  of  the  Company  of 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     135 

Jesus,  where  they  have  a  school  for  teaching 
Latin  and  Moral  Theology.  Besides  this,  there  are 
five  churches  inland  among  the  free  Indians,101 
where  some  of  the  Fathers  live  to  Christianize  and 
to  marry  the  Indians,  so  as  to  prevent  concu- 
binage. 

The  Bahia  of  this  Captaincy  is  very  large 
and  beautiful,  three  leagues  wide  and  navigable 
fifteen  leagues  inland.  There  are  many  islands 
of  luxuriant  soil  which  produce  an  infinite 
quantity  of  cotton:  this  Bahia  divides  into 
branches  within,  with  many  arms  and  coves.  The 
inhabitants  of  the  region  all  use  it  to  go  by  boat 
to  their  ranches. 

RIVERS. 

Twelve  leagues  from  Bahia  de  Todos  los 
Santos,  there  is  a  river  called  Tinhareem,  where 
ships  going  to  the  other  Captaincies  gather.  Three 
leagues  up  it,  one  Bastiam  da  Ponte  has  a  sugar 
mill  near  which  are  many  fields  uncultivated  for 
lack  of  settlers,  which  will  give  a  profit  to  who- 
ever will  occupy  them.  Farther  on,  there  is  a 
river  called  Camamu  in  thirteen  and  two-thirds 
degrees,  up  which  any  ship  whatsoever  may  safe- 
ly sail  for  four  or  five  leagues:  beside  this  river 
are  many  fat  fields,  and  streams  of  water  which 
can  be  applied  to  the  sugar  mills,  all  of  which 


136    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

are  vacant  because  of  the  lack  of  people  to  settle 
them.  There  are  many  rich  islands  in  the  river 
well  suited  to  the  establishment  of  ranches.  There 
is  an  extremely  large  quantity  of  fish  in  it,  and  on 
its  banks,  of  game,  wild  hogs  and  deer:  here 
could  be  built  a  town  where  all  the  inhabitants 
might  live  in  plenty,  and  found  many  ranches. 
There  is  another  river  called  Rio  das  Contas,  in 
fourteen  and  a  half  degrees,  not  so  large  as  the 
last,  but  still  many  ships  may  enter  it  also.  In 
all  these  rivers  there  is  an  abundance  of  fish  and 
game. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     137 

CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  ILHEOS. 

The  Captaincy  of  Ilheos  is  thirty  leagues 
from  Bahia  de  todos  los  Santos,  in  fourteen  and 
two-thirds  degrees:  it  belongs  to  Francisco  Gi- 
raldes,  who  has  appointed  a  Captain.10*  There 
are  about  two  hundred  inhabitants.  Near  the 
town  there  is  a  river  where  the  ships  enter,  and 
which  divides  into  many  arms  within;  and  the 
inhabitants  use  canoas  in  which  to  go  about. 
There  are  eight  sugar  mills  in  this  Captaincy. 
In  the  town  there  is  a  monastery  of  the  Fathers 
of  the  Company  of  Jesus,  which  has  recently 
been  built.  Only  seven  leagues  inland  from  the 
city,  there  is  a  lake  of  fresh  water  three  leagues 
long  and  three  leagues  wide,  the  depth  of  which 
they  say  is  fifteen  fathoms  or  more.  There  runs 
out  of  it  a  small  stream  where  they  are  going  to 
have  skiffs.  There  is  an  outlet  from  this  lake 
into  the  river,  so  narrow  that  it  will  hardly  hold 
a  skiff,  and  when  one  has  entered  the  lake  one 
can  scarcely  distinguish  the  entrance.  There  is 
so  much  water  in  it  that  any  sailing  ship  whatso- 
ever may  navigate,  and  when  the  wind  blows  hard 
as  furious  waves  rise  up  as  on  the  seas  during  a 


138     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

storm.  There  is  an  infinity  of  fishes  large  and 
small:  many  manatis  [sea-cows]  grow  there 
which  have  the  muzzle  of  cows  and  two  flippers 
which  they  use  as  arms  to  swim  with:  they  have 
no  scales,  nor  any  other  resemblance  to  fish  save 
the  tail:  they  kill  them  with  harpoons:  they  are 
fat  and  so  large  that  some  weigh  thirty  or  forty 
arrobas.  It  is  a  very  savoury  fish,  and  resembles 
beef  absolutely,  and  tastes  like  it  too:  roasted  it 
seems  like  loin  of  pork,  or  venison;  it  is  boiled 
with  cabbage  or  cooked  like  beef:  no  one  who 
eats  it  believes  it  fish,  unless  he  knew  it  before- 
hand. The  females  have  two  breasts  for  suckling 
their  young  which  are  raised  on  milk  (a  thing 
not  occurring  with  any  other  fish).  They  are 
found  in  other  bays  and  rivers  on  the  coast,  and 
although  they  grow  in  the  sea,  they  are  accus- 
tomed to  drink  fresh  water,  and  assemble  in  this 
lake  or  where  some  stream  empties  into  the  sea. 
There  are  also  many  sharks  in  this  lake,  and 
alligators,  and  snakes,  as  well  as  other  different 
kinds  of  marine  monsters.  There  are  many 
fields  and  very  rich  ones  round  about  it,  and 
much  game:  and  in  the  stream  which  runs  out  of 
it,  innumerable  fish.  In  a  word,  this  Captaincy 
of  Ilheos  is  one  of  the  best  provided  of  all  Brazil 
with  food-stuffs. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     139 


CHAPTER  V. 

OF  A  RACE  OF  ABORIGINES  WHICH  is 

FOUND  IN  THIS  CAPTAINCY. 

Throughout  this  Captaincy,  as  far  as  Spirito 
Sancto,  there  is  found  a  certain  nation  of  Indians 
which  came  from  the  sertao  five  or  six  years  ago : 
they  say  that  other  Indians,  enemies  of  theirs, 
came  to  attack  them  in  their  country  and  destroy 
them,  and  those  who  fled  are  the  ones  who  are  on 
the  coast.  They  are  called  Aymores;  their  lan- 
guage is  different  from  that  of  the  other  Indians ; 
no  one  understands  them.  They  are  so  tall  and 
large  of  body  that  they  seem  almost  like  giants; 
they  are  very  fair,  and  do  not  resemble  the  other 
Indians  of  the  country,  nor  do  they  have  houses 
or  towns  to  dwell  in,  but  live  in  the  thicket  like 
brute  beasts:  they  are  exceedingly  powerful  and 
carry  very  long  bows,  thick  in  proportion  to  their 
strength,  and  the  arrows  likewise.  These  Indians 
have  done  much  damage  to  the  settlers,  since  they 
came  to  the  coast,  and  have  killed  some  Portu- 
guese and  slaves,  for  they  are  enemies  of  every- 
body. They  do  not  fight  in  the  open,  they  have 
not  the  courage  for  that,  but  hide  behind  a  tree 
near  a  path,  and  when  any  one  passes  by  they 


140    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

shoot  him  through  the  heart,  or  in  a  vital  place, 
and  never  miss  their  shot.  Finally,  they  have  no 
honest  dealing  with  any  one,  but  always  play  a 
treacherous  part.  Their  women  carry  fire-hard- 
ened clubs  with  which  they  fight.  These  Indians 
live  by  the  bow;  their  food  is  game,  insects,  and 
human  flesh:  they  build  fires  under  ground  so 
as  not  to  be  seen,  and  so  no  one  will  know  where 
they  are.  Many  rich  fields  near  this  Captaincy 
have  been  abandoned,  for  they  can  not  be  held 
by  land  to  his  ranch,  without  taking  with  him 
A  sure  means  of  destroying  them  has  not  been 
found,  because  they  have  no  fixed  dwelling  place, 
and  they  never  come  out  of  the  thicket.  When  we 
think  that  they  are  fleeing  before  those  who  pur- 
sue them,  they  remain  behind,  hidden,  and  shoot 
those  who  pass  heedlessly  by  them;  and  in  this 
way  they  kill  people.  All  the  Indians  of  Brazil 
are  their  enemies,  and  fear  them  greatly,  because 
they  are  so  treacherous  a  race:  consequently,  in  a 
region  where  they  are  to  be  found,  no  settler  goes 
by  land  to  his  ranch,  without  taking  with  him 
fifteen  or  twenty  slaves  armed  with  bows  and  ar- 
rows. These  Ay  mores  are  very  fierce  and  cruel: 
one  can  not  find  words  with  which  to  express  the 
cruelty  of  this  people.  They  do  not  travel  to- 
gether, but  scattered  in  every  direction:  when 
they  wish  to  assemble  they  whistle  like  birds  or 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     141 

like  monkeys,  and  in  this  way  they  communicate 
with  and  recognize  one  another.  The  Portuguese 
also  have  killed  some  of  them,  and  have  destroyed 
many,  especially  in  this  Captaincy  of  Ilheos,  for 
they  are  now  aware  of  their  craftiness  and  know 
their  malice. 


142     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 


CAPTAIN  VI. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  PORTO  SEGURO. 

The  Captaincy  of  Porto  Seguro  is  thirty 
leagues  from  that  of  Ilheos,  in  seventeen  and  a 
half  degrees.  It  belongs  to  the  Duque  Daveiro 
who  has  appointed  a  Captain.  There  are  three 
towns:  the  principal  one  is  Porto  Seguro,  which 
is  near  the  haven  where  the  ships  enter:  another, 
a  league  away,  is  called  Santo  Amaro:  another, 
Santa  Cruz,  which  is  about  four  leagues  to  the 
North.  There  may  be  two  hundred  and  twenty 
inhabitants.  There  are  five  sugar  mills.  There 
is  a  monastery  of  the  Fathers  of  the  Company 
of  Jesus :  the  Aymores  also  infest  this  Captaincy, 
and  injure  the  inhabitants  as  in  Ilheos.  It  is  a 
region  well  furnished  with  game,  and  they  catch 
many  fish  in  the  river  near  the  town. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     143 


CHAPTER  VII. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  SPIRITO  SANCTO. 

The  Captaincy  of  Spirito  Sancto,  of  which 
Vasco  Fernandes  Coutinho  is  the  Captain  and 
Governour,  is  fifty  leagues  from  Porto  Seguro,  in 
twenty  degrees.  There  is  only  one  sugar  mill, 
but  they  get  from  it  the  best  sugar  of  all  Brazil. 
There  are  also  much  cotton  and  brazil-wood  here. 
There  may  be  about  one  hundred  and  eighty  in- 
habitants. In  the  town  there  is  a  monastery  of 
the  Fathers  of  the  Company  of  Jesus.  It  [the 
Captaincy]  has  a  very  large  river  where  the  ships 
enter,  in  which  they  find  more  manatis  than  in 
any  other  river  of  the  coast.  In  the  sea  by  this 
Captaincy  they  kill  a  great  quantity  of  all  sorts 
of  large  fish;  in  the  river  as  well  there  is  abun- 
dance of  fish.  There  are  many  very  large  planta- 
tions in  this  Captaincy,  where  the  inhabitants  are 
well  provided  with  both  native  and  cultivated 
products.  And  when  the  Fortress  of  Rio  de 
Janeiro  of  this  same  Captaincy  of  Spirito  Sancto 
was  taken,  everybody  was  nourished,  and  those 
who  defended  the  place  were  always  provided 
with  the  necessary  food,  as  long  as  they  were  in 
the  country.109 


144     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

RIVERS. 

Beyond  this  Captaincy,  in  the  altitude  of 
twenty-one  degrees,  is  the  Rio  de  Paraiba;  it  is 
very  large  and  beautiful,  and  full  of  fish.  Near 
Cabo  Frio,  in  the  altitude  of  twenty-two  degrees, 
lies  Bahia  Fermosa,  where  one  could  found  a 
Captaincy  of  many  inhabitants,  and  where  many 
fields  are  useless  because  of  the  lack  of  settlers. 
There  are  many  other  rivers  in  these  regions, 
which  I  do  not  write  about  because  they  are  small 
and  unimportant,  and  because  it  was  my  inten- 
tion only  to  treat  of  the  most  notable  where  one 
might  establish  towns,  and  improve  the  surround- 
ing fields  near  the  coast  which  are  now  un- 
occupied. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     145 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  Rio  DE  JANEIRO. 

The  City  of  San  Sebastian,  Captaincy  of 
Rio  de  Janeiro,  is  sixty  leagues  from  Spirito 
Sancto,  in  twenty-three  and  a  third  degrees,  and 
belongs  to  the  King  our  Master.  There  are  about 
one  hundred  and  forty  inhabitants  in  it,  and  now 
new  settlers  are  coming  in.  It  is  the  richest  and 
most  fertile  region  in  Brazil.  The  fields  are 
choice,  and  there  is  much  water  power  for  the 
sugar  mills.  There  is  much  brazil-wood  from 
which  the  inhabitants  derive  good  profit.  This 
Captaincy  has  a  very  large  and  beautiful  river 
which  divides  into  several  branches,  and  all  the 
fields  on  its  shores  are  profitable,  either  for  rais- 
ing food,  or  for  sugar-cane  or  cotton,  for  the  soil 
is  very  fertile  and  the  best  of  all  in  Brazil.  In 
this  City  there  is  a  monastery  of  the  Fathers  of 
the  Company  of  Jesus,  whose  numbers  are  in- 
creasing in  the  country;  and  they  wish  to  see  the 
country  settled  with  numerous  inhabitants  be- 
cause, as  I  say,  the  lands  of  this  Captaincy  are 
broad,  and  they  know  how  advantageous  they  are 
for  the  poor  people  who  come  to  settle  on  them. 


146     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

In  time  there  will  be  large  ranches  there,  and  he 
who  goes  to  live  there  with  the  ambition  [of  own- 
ing one]  will  not  be  disappointed. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     147 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE  CAPTAINCY  OF  SAN  VICENTE. 

The  Captaincy  of  San  Vicente  is  seventy 
leagues  from  Rio  de  Janeiro,  in  twenty-four  de- 
grees. It  belongs  to  Pero  Lopes  de  Sousa,  who 
has  appointed  a  Captain  there.  This  Captaincy 
and  that  of  Rio  de  Janeiro  are  the  coolest  lands  in 
Brazil;  there  are  frosts  in  winter  time  about  as 
in  Portugal.  They  used  to  raise  wheat  in  this 
Captaincy ;  but  now  they  do  not  plant  it,  for  there 
are  other  food-stuffs  less  costly.  There  are  towns, 
and  a  fortress  which  is  on  an  island  near  the 
mainland,  four  leagues  to  the  north,  called  Briti- 
oga,  which  with  its  artillery  is  the  defense  of  this 
Captaincy  against  the  Indians  and  the  French. 
The  principal  town  is  called  Santos,  where  there 
is  a  monastery  of  the  Fathers  of  the  Company  of 
Jesus:  there  is  another  town  a  league  farther  on, 
beside  the  river,  called  San  Vicente:  there,  too, 
is  another  monastery  of  the  Fathers  of  the  Com- 
pany. Inland  ten  leagues  these  same  Fathers 
built  a  town  among  the  Indians  which  is  called 
Campo,110  where  there  are  many  inhabitants,  the 
majority  of  them  Mamelukes,  sons  of  Portuguese 
men  and  native  Indian  women.  Here  and  in 


148     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

other  Captaincies  these  Fathers  of  the  Company 
have  had  much  success,  and  have  secured  the  in- 
crease of  the  land ;  and  they  labour  to  Christianize 
the  Indians,  and  to  impose  peace  among  men. 
They  also  secure  the  restoration  of  liberty  to  the 
Indians    whom   some   of   the   inhabitants    have 
illegally  enslaved:  and  they  always  come  to  the 
assistance111  of  those  who  deviate  from  the  service 
of  God  or  of  Your  Highness.     There  may  be 
\  about  five  hundred  inhabitants  in  this  Captaincy, 
j  and  four  sugar  mills,  and  many  rich  fields  from 
/  which  the  inhabitants  get  much  food,  and  crops, 
and  all  live  in  plenty.    This  is  the  last  Captaincy 
in  this  region  of  Brazil. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     149 


[SECOND  PART] 

Or  MATTERS  COMMON  TO  THE  WHOLE 
COAST  or  BRAZIL. 

CHAPTER  I. 

THE  RANCHES. 

The  inhabitants  of  this  coast  of  Brazil  all 
hold  lands  in  fee  [sesmaria],  granted  and  guar- 
anteed by  the  Captains  of  the  land;  and  the  first 
thing  which  they  seek  to  obtain  is  slaves  to  work 
the  land  and  to  till  their  plantations  and  ranches, 
because  without  them  they  can  not  maintain 
themselves  in  the  country ;  and  one  of  the  reasons 
why  Brazil  does  not  flourish  much  more  is  that 
the  slaves  revolt  and  flee  to  their  own  land  and 
run  away  every  day;  and  if  these  Indians  were 
not  so  fickle  and  given  to  flight,  the  wealth  of 
Brazil  would  be  incomparable;  the  crops  from 
which  they  obtain  the  greatest  profit  are  sugar, 
cotton,  and  brazil-wood,  and,  because  there  is 
little  money  in  the  country,  they  pay  with  these 
the  merchants  who  bring  them  goods  from  the 
Kingdom;  thus  they  sell  and  exchange  one  mer- 
chandise for  another  at  its  just  value.  All  the 
inhabitants  of  this  country  have  plantations  of 


150    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

food-stuffs  and  sell  much  manioc  flour  one  to  the 
other,  from  which  they  also  derive  much  profit. 

The  majority  of  cattle  on  this  coast  are  oxen 
and  cows  of  which  there  is  great  abundance  in  all 
the  Captaincies,  because  there  is  much  grass  and 
the  country  is  always  covered  with  verdure ;  except 
in  Porto  Seguro  where  cattle  thrive  only  in  the 
first  year,  in  which  time,  they  say,  they  become  so 
fat  that  they  all  die  from  excessive  fat.  Of  goats 
and  sheep  there  are  very  few  up  to  the  present, 
but  now  they  are  beginning  to  multiply  again. 
Goats  breed  better  than  sheep  and  have  two  or 
three  young  at  a  time.  The  inhabitants  make 
money  from  this  kind  of  cattle  raising  also. 
There  are  mares  and  stallions,  too,  but  so  far 
they  are  dear  because  they  are  not  numerous  in 
the  land.  They  bring  them  from  Cabo  Verde  here 
and  they  succeed  very  well.  One  finds  also  on  the 
coast  much  ambergris  which  the  sea  throws  up 
in  nearly  every  instance  when  there  is  a  storm 
and  high  water.  Then  many  persons  send  their 
slaves  to  the  shore  to  collect  it  in  those  places 
where  it  is  usually  cast  up.  Often  it  happens  that 
they  thus  become  rich  upon  what  their  slaves  find, 
as  well  as  by  trading  in  it  with  the  free  Indians, 
[which  inures  to]  the  happiness  and  benefit  of 
each  one.  The  clothes  which  are  made  in  this 
country  are  of  cotton,  the  most  of  which  comes 


•1 

TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     151 

from  the  Kingdom;  there  are  also  many  Guinea 
slaves.1"  These  are  more  certain  than  the  In- 
dians of  the  country,  because  they  never  flee  as 
they  have  nowhere  to  go.  There  is  also  much 
breeding  of  hogs,  hens,  mallards  [adens],  and 
wild  ducks  [patos  da  terra].  These  are  the  stock 
and  crops  of  the  inhabitants  of  Brazil. 


152     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

CHAPTER  II. 

THE  CUSTOMS  or  THE  COUNTRY. 

As  soon  as  persons  who  intend  to  live  in 
Brazil  become  inhabitants  of  the  country,  how- 
ever poor  they  may  be,  if  each  one  obtain  two 
pairs  or  half  a  dozen  slaves,  which  might  cost 
somewhere  in  the  neighborhood  of  ten  cruzados, 
he  then  has  the  means  for  sustenance;  because 
some  fish  and  hunt,  and  the  others  produce  for 
him  maintenance  and  crops ;  and  so  little  by  little 
the  men  become  rich  and  live  honourably  in  the 
land  with  more  ease  than  in  the  Kingdom,  be- 
cause these  same  Indian  slaves  hunt  food  for 
themselves  and  in  this  way  the  men  have  no  ex- 
pense for  the  maintenance  of  their  slaves,  nor 
for  their  own  persons.  Most  of  the  beds  in  Brazil 
are  hammocks  hung  up  in  the  house  on  two  cords, 
and  one  stretches  out  in  them  to  sleep.  This  cus- 
tom they  took  from  the  native  Indians.  The  in- 
habitants of  these  Captaincies  treat  one  another 
very  well  and  are  more  lavish  than  the  people  of 
the  Kingdom,  both  in  eating  and  in  the  clothing 
of  their  persons.  They  enjoy  helping  one  another 
with  their  slaves,  and  they  favour  the  poor  new 
arrivals  in  the  country,  for  this  is  the  custom  in 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     153 

'T'  W 
these  parts;  and  they  perform  many  other  pious 

deeds,  as  a  result  of  which  all  have  the  means  of 
life  and  no  poor  ask  alms  from  door  to  door,  as 
in  the  Kingdom. 


\ 


154     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE  QUALITY  or  THE  SOIL. 

In  these  parts  of  Brazil  there  are  six  months 
of  summer  and  six  months  of  winter ;  the  summer 
months  are  from  September  to  February,  those  of 
winter  from  March  to  August ;  so,  when  it  is  win- 
ter in  the  Province  of  Brazil,  here  in  the  Kingdom 
it  is  summer,  and  the  days  are  almost  of  the  same 
length  as  the  nights,  increasing  and  diminishing 
only  one  hour.  In  the  winter  months  the  prevail- 
ing winds  blow  from  the  south  and  southeast, 
in  the  summer  from  the  northeast.  The  waters 
of  the  coast  always  run  with  the  wind ;  thus  it  is 
impossible  to  sail  from  some  of  the  Captaincies 
to  others  unless  one  wait  for  the  monsoons  when 
wind  and  water  move  in  the  same  direction,  be- 
cause, as  I  have  said,  the  winds  blow  six  months 
in  one  direction  and  six  in  the  other;  hence  fre- 
quently voyages  are  precarious,  and  when  ships 
sail  against  the  weather  they  run  much  risk,  and 
[are  obliged  to]  return  in  most  cases  to  the  port 
from  whence  they  set  forth.  Eight  days  before 
All  Saints  Day,  in  the  height  of  summer,  a  storm 
of  south  wind  arises  which  lasts  a  week.  Its  oc- 
currence at  this  period  is  so  certain  and  general 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     155 

that  some  ships  wait  for  it  to  make  their  voyages. 
It  is  always  warm  in  that  country,  almost  as  warm 
in  winter  as  in  summer;  the  viragao  of  the  pre- 
vailing wind  takes  place  at  about  midday:  this 
breeze  is  so  fresh  and  cool  that  one  no  longer 
feels  the  heat,  and  is  refreshed  in  body.  This 
wind  from  the  sea  lasts  till  daylight ;  then  it  turns 
warm  again  by  reason  of  the  vapours  of  the  land 
which  still  the  wind.  When  it  dawns  the  sky  is 
all  covered  with  clouds,  and  most  mornings  it 
rains  in  these  regions,  and  the  ground  remains 
covered  with  mist  because  there  are  many  clumps 
of  trees,  and  the  earth  draws  to  itself  all  moisture. 
And,  as  soon  as  the  prevailing  wind  dies  out, 
a  gentle  wind  begins  to  blow  from  inland  where  it 
arises,  until  the  sun  with  its  warmth  in  turn 
checks  it,  and  the  day  clears  up  again,  and  re- 
mains bright  and  serene ;  then  the  accustomed  sea 
breeze  starts.  This  land  breeze  is  very  dangerous 
and  unwholesome;  and  if  it  happen  to  continue 
several  days  many  people  die,  Portuguese  as  well 
as  native  Indians;  but  it  is  our  Lord's  will  that 
this  happen  rarely;  aside  from  this  evil,  it  is  a 
very  healthful  land  of  good  climate,  where  people 
find  themselves  well  disposed  and  live  many 
years ;  old  folks  especially  have  better  health  and 
appear  to  become  young  again,  and  for  this  rea- 
son some  of  them  do  not  wish  to  return  to  their 


156     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

native  lands,  fearing  that  thus  death  would  come 
to  them  sooner.  The  air  in  the  morning  is  very 
fresh  and  healthful ;  many  people  are  accustomed 
to  rise  early  to  take  advantage  of  it  at  its  best. 
The  land  itself  is  slack  and  lazy;  there  men  find 
themselves  a  little  weak  and  their  strength  less 
than  that  they  had  in  the  Kingdom,  on  account 
of  the  heat,  and  the  food  that  is  used  there.  This 
applies  to  people  who  are  new  in  the  land ;  but  in 
time,  after  they  become  accustomed  to  it,  they  are 
as  lusty  and  strong  as  if  this  land  were  their  na- 
tive country.  In  this  country  they  order  pork 
given  to  sick  people,  because  it  is  beneficial  in 
any  illness  and  harms  no  one ;  the  fish  also  has  the 
same  property  and  furnishes  much  nourishment 
to  the  ailing.  The  soil  is  very  rich  and  fertile, 
entirely  covered  with  exceedingly  high  leafy 
trees,  whose  verdure  persists  winter  and  summer; 
this  is  the  reason  for  its  raining  often  and  for  not 
having  cold  weather  to  harm  whatever  the  land 
produces.  The  shadow  beneath  these  trees  is 
dense  and  the  undergrowth  so  thick  that  the 
ground  never  receives  heat  or  light  from  the  sun, 
but  is  always  damp  and  oozing  with  fresh  water. 
The  drinking  water  of  the  country  is  very  health- 
ful and  sweet ;  however  much  of  it  one  may  drink, 
it  does  not  injure  one's  health.  The  most  of  it 
turns  at  once  to  perspiration  and  the  body  re- 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     157 

mains  free  of  fats  and  healthy.  Finally,  this  land 
is  so  delightful  and  temperate  that  one  never  feels 
cold  nor  excessive  heat. 


158     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  FOOD-STUFFS  OF  THE  COUNTRY. 

In  these  parts  of  Brazil  they  neither  sow 
wheat  nor  grow  any  other  food-stuff  of  this  King- 
dom; what  they  eat  there  in  place  of  bread  is 
manioc  flour,  which  is  made  of  the  root  of  a  plant 
called  mandioca  which  resembles  inhame  [yam] ; 
as  soon  as  they  get  it  out  of  the  ground,  it  is 
soaked  in  water  three  or  four  days  and,  after  it 
is  soaked,  they  crush  or  scrape  it  very  fine  and 
squeeze  the  juice  out  of  it,  so  that  it  remains  quite 
dry,  because  the  water  which  comes  off  it  is  so 
poisonous  that  any  person  or  animal  who  drank 
it  would  die  instantly.  After  they  have  cured  it 
thus,  they  put  a  large  earthen  vessel  over  the  fire, 
and,  as  this  warms  up,  they  pour  into  it  the  man- 
dioca and  let  it  cook  for  a  half-hour  in  the  heat; 
then  they  take  it  out  and  it  is  ready  to  eat.  How- 
ever, there  are  two  varieties  of  flour,  one  called 
"war-flour"  and  the  other  "fresh  flour;"  the  war- 
flour  is  very  dry  and  is  made  in  a  way  to  keep 
longer  and  not  spoil ;  the  fresh  flour  is  whiter  and 
more  substantial;  lastly,  it  is  not  so  hard  as  the 
other,  but  does  not  last  more  than  two  or  three 
days,  after  which  time  it  quickly  spoils:  of  this 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     159 

mandioca  they  make  another  kind  of  food  which 
is  called  beijus:  they  are  very  white  and  much 
thicker  than  breas  [wafers] ;  the  inhabitants  of 
the  country  use  these  a  great  deal  because  they 
are  very  healthful  and  more  easily  digested  than 
[European]  flour.  There  is  another  plant  that 
produces  a  root  called  hypim  [aypim]  of  which 
they  make  cakes  which  resemble  fresh  bread  in 
the  Kingdom;  and  this  root  is  also  eaten  roasted 
like  sweet  potatoes :  any  way  it  is  cooked  it  is  very 
tasty.  There  is  also  much  milho  zaburro  in  this 
land:  it  grows  in  all  the  Captaincies  and  of  it 
they  make  a  very  white  bread.  There  are  plenty 
of  inhames  and  sweet  potatoes  and  other  vege- 
tables in  the  land.  There  is  great  abundance  of 
shell-fish  and  fish  along  the  entire  coast;  with 
these  foods  the  inhabitants  of  Brazil  sustain 
themselves  without  making  an  outlay  to  diminish 
their  possessions. 


160    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  GAME  or  THE  COUNTRY. 

One  of  the  things  which  gives  much  suste- 
nance and  abundantly  furnishes  the  inhabitants 
of  this  land  of  Brazil  is  the  quantity  of  all  sorts 
of  game  found  in  the  forests;  the  native  Indians 
kill  it  either  with  arrows  or  with  the  ingenuity  of 
their  snares  and  pitfalls  by  which  they  are  ac- 
customed to  take  the  greater  part  of  it. 

There  is  much  deer  and  a  large  quantity  of 
wild  hogs  of  many  varieties;  there  is  one  variety 
of  small  ones  which  have  thick,  rough,  coarse 
hair;  these  have  the  navel  on  the  back;  many  of 
them  are  killed,  and  other  large  ones  which  have 
not  this  quality.  There  are  many  antas  which  are 
almost  as  large  as  cows;  they  graze  on  grass  like 
any  other  cattle  and  their  flesh  has  the  taste  of 
beef;  the  skin  of  this  animal  is  very  thick  and 
tough.  There  are  also  rabbits,  but  they  have  a 
different  kind  of  ears  [from  Portuguese  rabbits], 
smaller  and  round.  There  are  other  animals 
larger  than  hares  which  they  call  pacas  whose 
meat  is  also  very  savoury.  There  are  also  other 
animals  in  the  land  which  they  eat  and  consider 
the  best  game  in  the  forest.  They  are  called  tatus; 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     161 

'(/I 

they  are  about  the  size  of  rabbits  and  have  a 
shell  like  a  cdcado  [land-turtle],  but  divided  into 
many  jointed  laminations;  they  closely  resemble 
an  armoured  horse  and  have  a  long  tail  covered 
with  the  same  kind  of  shell;  their  muzzle  is  like 
that  of  a  sucking  pig,  and  they  obtrude  only  the 
head  beyond  the  shell;  their  legs  are  short,  and 
they  live  in  burrows;  their  flesh  has  almost  the 
taste  of  chicken;  this  game  is  highly  esteemed  in 
the  land.  There  are  also  many  forest  fowls  which 
the  Indians  kill  with  arrows,  and  many  large 
savoury  birds  better  than  partridges.  Of  these 
and  of  many  other  varieties  of  game  there  is  great 
abundance  in  Brazil. 


162     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Or  THE  FRUITS  OF  THE  COUNTRY. 

A  very  savoury  fruit  grows  in  the  land  of 
Brazil,  more  prized  than  any  other;  it  grows  on 
a  humble  stalk  close  to  the  ground;  it  has  spines 
like  thistles ;  its  fruit  grows  like  artichokes ;  it  re- 
sembles pine-cones  and  is  called  pineapple.  When 
they  are  ripe  they  have  an  excellent  odour;  they 
gather  them  at  the  proper  time,  and  with  a  knife 
cut  off  the  coarse  rind  and  carve  them  in  slices, 
and  in  this  way  they  are  eaten;  they  are  better 
in  flavour  than  any  of  the  fruits  which  grow  in 
the  Kingdom,  and  everybody  likes  them  so  much 
that  they  order  entire  fields  planted  with  them, 
resembling  thistle  patches;  they  bring  many  of 
these  pineapples  preserved  to  our  Kingdom. 
Another  fruit  grows  upon  large  trees  which  are 
not  planted,  but  grow  wild  in  quantities  in  the 
forest;  this  fruit  when  it  is  ripe  is  very  yellow; 
they  resemble  long  pear-mains  [pero  repinal] 
and  are  called  cashew;  they  are  very  juicy  and 
on  the  end  of  them,  on  the  outside,  there  grows 
a  nut  the  size  of  a  chestnut,  and  this  grows  before 
the  fruit  itself;  its  shell  is  more  bitter  than  gall; 
if  one  only  touch  with  it  the  lips,  the  bitterness 
lasts  a  long  time  and  causes  the  whole  mouth  to 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     163 

blister;  on  the  other  hand,  these  nuts  roasted  are 
much  more  palatable  than  almonds;  they  are 
extremely  hot  by  nature.  There  are  so  many  of 
these  nuts  in  the  land  that  they  measure  them  by 
alqueires  [bushels].113  They  also  have  a  fruit 
which  they  call  banana,  and  in  the  Indian  lan- 
guage pacovos;  there  is  a  great  abundance  of 
them  in  the  country;  they  resemble  cucumbers  in 
form  and  grow  on  very  tender  trees,  and  these  trees 
are  not  very  high  nor  have  they  branches,  but 
only  very  long,  broad  leaves ;  these  bananas  grow 
in  bunches;  some  are  found  which  have  more 
than  one  hundred  and  fifty  in  the  bunch,  and  often 
the  weight  of  them  is  so  great  that  it  causes  the 
trunk  of  the  tree  to  break  in  the  middle;  at  the 
proper  time  they  gather  these  bunches,  and  after 
they  are  gathered  they  ripen ;  as  soon  as  these  trees 
have  produced  fruit  they  cut  them  down,  because 
they  do  not  bear  after  the  first  time,  and  new 
shoots  come  up  from  the  root:  this  is  one  of  the 
best  and  most  palatable  fruits  of  the  country;  it 
has  a  skin  like  that  of  the  fig  which  is  taken  off 
before  eating,  and  if  one  eat  many  of  them  it  in- 
jures the  health  and  produces  fever  in  whosoever 
overindulges;  roasted  ripe,  they  are  very  health- 
ful and  they  order  them  given  to  sick  people; 
they  feed  the  major  part  of  the  slaves  of  the  coun- 
try on  this  fruit,  for  roasted  green  they  are  almost 


164     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

as  good  sustenance  as  bread.  There  are  two 
varieties  of  this  fruit,  one  small  like  borjassotes 
[borcejote,  hard-rinded  fig]  and  the  other  larger 
and  much  longer.  The  little  ones  have  within  a 
very  strange  thing;  namely,  when  one  cuts  them 
with  a  knife  in  the  middle  or  in  any  other  part, 
one  finds  in  them  a  sign  like  the  crucifix  which 
it  entirely  resembles.114  There  is  another  fruit 
called  fracazes,  which  are  like  meddlars,  and 
even  though  one  eat  many  of  them,  they  do  not 
harm  the  health.  There  is  a  native  pepper  which 
is  eaten  green;  it  burns  very  much.  There  are 
many  other  varieties  of  fruit  in  the  forest  which 
are  so  plentiful  that,  when  people  have  found 
themselves  in  the  forest  they  have  lived  on  them 
many  days  without  any  other  sustenance.  Those 
fruits  which  I  describe  here  are  the  ones  which 
the  Portuguese  esteem  most  highly,  and  are  the 
best  of  the  country.  Some  of  the  fruits  of  the 
Kingdom  grow  in  those  parts,  many  varieties  of 
melons,  cucumbers,  many  varieties  of  figs,  pome- 
granates, many  grape-vines  which  yield  grapes 
two  or  three  times  in  the  year;  as  soon  as  one  va- 
riety is  out  of  season  others  begin  to  yield.  And 
thus  Brazil  is  never  without  fruit;  there  is  an 
infinite  variety  of  lemons  and  oranges,  and  these 
thorny  trees  grow  very  well  in  the  land,  and  in- 
crease more  rapidly  than  the  others. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     165 


CHAPTER  VII. 

ON  THE  CONDITION  AND  CUSTOMS  OF 
THE  INDIANS  OF  THE  COUNTRY. 

It  is  impossible  to  enumerate  or  to  know  the 
multitude  of  barbarous  people  which  Nature  has 
sown  throughout  this  land  of  Brazil,  because  no 
one  can  safely  travel  through  the  sertao,  nor 
travel  overland  without  finding  villages  of  In- 
dians armed  against  all  peoples;  and  as  they  are 
so  numerous  God  granted  that  they  are  enemies 
one  against  the  other,  and  that  there  is  amongst 
them  great  hatred  and  discord,  because  other- 
wise the  Portuguese  would  not  be  able  to  live  in 
the  land,  nor  overcome  the  great  power  of  the  in- 
habitants. There  were  many  of  these  Indians  on 
the  coast  near  the  Captaincies;  the  whole  coast 
was  inhabited  by  them  when  the  Portuguese  be- 
gan to  settle  the  country;  but,  because  these  In- 
dians revolted  against  them  and  practised  much 
treachery  upon  them,  the  Governours  and  Cap- 
tains of  the  land  overthrew  them  little  by  little, 
and  killed  many  of  them;  the  others  fled  to  the 
sertao;  thus  the  coast  remained  unpopulated  by 
the  natives,  near  the  Captaincies;  however,  some 
Indian  villages,  peaceful  and  friendly  toward  the 
Portuguese,  were  left. 


166     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

All  the  people  of  the  coast  have  the  same 
language;  it  lacks  three  letters,  namely,  /,  I  and 
r,  a  fact  worthy  of  wonder  because  they  also  have 
neither  Faith,  Law,  nor  .Ruler;  hence  they  live 
without  justice  and  in  complete  disorder.  The 
Indians  go  naked  without  any  covering  whatever, 
the  males  as  well  as  the  females;  they  do  not 
cover  any  portion  of  their  body,  but  all  that  Na- 
ture gave  them  goes  uncovered.  They  all  live  in 
villages;  there  may  be  seven  or  eight  houses  in 
each.  These  houses  are  built  long  like  rope- 
walks  ;  and  each  one  of  them  is  filled  with  people, 
each  of  whom  has  his  stand  on  one  side  or  the 
other,  and  the  net  in  which  he  sleeps  hung  up 
there;  thus  they  are  all  together,  ranged  in 
order,  one  after  the  other,  and  in  the  middle  of 
the  house  there  is  an  open  aisle  for  passage.  As 
I  have  said,  there  is  among  them  no  king  nor  jus- 
tice, but  in  each  village  there  is  a  head-man  who 
is  like  a  Captain,  to  whom  they  give  voluntary 
obedience,  but  not  through  force;  if  this  head- 
man dies,  his  son  takes  his  place;  he  serves  no 
other  purpose  than  to  go  with  them  to  war  to  take 
counsel  with  them  as  to  the  method  they  should 
employ  in  fighting,  but  he  does  not  punish  their 
wrong-doing,  nor  does  he  command  them  in  any 
respect  against  their  wills.  This  head-man  has 
three  or  four  wives ;  he  has  the  greatest  considera- 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL     167 

tion  for  the  first  one  and  has  more  respect  for 
her  than  for  the  others;  they  do  this  as  a  matter 
of  position  and  dignity.  They  do  not  worship 
anything,  nor  do  they  believe  that  there  is  in  an- 
other life  glory  for  the  good  nor  suffering  for  the 
wicked;  they  all  believe  that  after  this  life  ends 
their  souls  die  with  their  bodies.  Thus  they  live 
like  beasts  without  thought,  without  regret  and 
without  restraint.  These  Indians  are  warlike 
and  wage  great  wars,  one  tribe  against  the  other; 
they  are  never  at  peace  with  one  another,  nor  can 
they  live  on  friendly  terms,  because  one  tribe 
fights  against  another,  many  are  killed,  and  so 
their  hatred  goes  on  increasing  more  and  more 
[with  each  encounter],  and  they  remain  real 
enemies  perpetually.  The  arms  with  which  they 
fight  are  bows  and  arrows;  whatever  they  aim  at 
they  hit ;  they  are  very  accurate  with  this  arm  and 
much  feared  in  war;  they  are  expert  in  its  use, 
and  are  much  inclined  to  fight;  they  are  very 
valiant  and  impetuous  against  their  adversaries; 
and  therefore  it  is  a  strange  sight  to  witness  two 
or  three  thousand  naked  men  on  opposite  sides, 
shooting  arrows  at  one  another  with  shrieks  and 
cries;  all  during  this  contest  they  are  not  still  a 
moment,  but  leap  from  one  place  to  another  with 
much  agility,  so  that  the  enemy  can  not  aim  at 
them  nor  shoot  at  any  particular  person :  some  of 


168     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

the  old  women  are  accustomed  to  gather  up  the 
arrows  on  the  ground  and  serve  them  while  they 
fight.  This  is  a  very  bold  people  which  fears 
death  but  little;  when  they  go  to  war,  it  always 
seems  to  them  that  victory  is  certain  and  that  none 
of  their  company  is  to  die;  and  when  they  leave 
they  say,  "We  are  going  out  to  kill,"  without  any 
other  thought,  nor  do  they  believe  that  they  them- 
selves can  be  conquered. 

They  spare  the  life  of  none  of  their  captives, 
but  kill  all  and  eat  them,  so  that  their  wars  are 
very  perilous  and  should  be  considered  seriously, 
because  one  of  the  reasons  which  have  been  the 
undoing  of  many  Portuguese  has  been  the  great 
indifference  with  which  they  regarded  fighting 
with  the  Indians,  and  the  small  concern  which 
they  felt  for  it;  and  so  many  of  them  have  died 
miserably  for  not  having  prepared  themselves 
as  they  should  have ;  among  them  there  have  been 
disastrous  deaths,  and  this  is  happening  at  each 
step  in  those  regions.  If  at  the  time  of  their  im- 
petuous rush  these  Indians  do  not  kill,  but  cap- 
ture some  of  their  enemies,  they  bring  them  alive 
to  their  villages,  whether  they  be  Portuguese  or 
of  some  enemy  Indian  tribe.  As  soon  as  they 
arrive  at  their  houses,  they  place  a  very  thick  rope 
about  the  neck  of  the  captive  in  order  that  he  may 
not  flee;  they  hang  up  for  him  a  net  in  which  to 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     169 

sleep,  and  give  him  an  Indian  girl,  the  most  beau- 
tiful and  honoured  in  the  village,  to  sleep  with 
him ;  she  is  also  charged  with  guarding  him,  and 
he  goes  nowhere  unaccompanied  by  her.  This 
Indian  girl  is  charged  with  providing  him  well 
with  food  and  drink;  and  after  they  have  kept 
him  in  this  way  five  or  six  months,  or  as  long 
as  they  please,  they  decide  to  kill  him.  They  cele- 
brate great  ceremonies  and  feasts  in  those  days, 
and  prepare  much  wine  on  which  to  get  drunk; 
this  is  made  of  the  root  of  a  plant  called  aypim 
which  is  first  boiled;  after  it  is  cooked,  some 
Indian  virgins  chew  it  and  spit  the  juice  into 
large  jars,  and  in  three  or  four  days  they  drink 
it.  On  the  morning  of  the  day  on  which  they  kill 
the  captive,  they  take  him  to  bathe  in  a  stream,  if 
there  is  one  near  the  village,  with  much  singing 
and  dancing;  when  they  arrive  with  him  in 
the  village  they  tie  about  his  waist  four  cords, 
one  stretching  in  each  direction,  with  three  or 
four  Indians  attached  to  each  end;  in  this  way 
they  lead  him  to  the  mi'ddle  of  the  plaza,  and  pull 
so  much  on  each  of  these  cords  that  it  is  impos- 
sible for  him  to  move  in  any  direction :  they  leave 
his  hands  free  because  they  enjoy  seeing  him  de- 
fend himself  with  them.  The  man  who  is  desig- 
nated to  kill  him  first  decks  his  whole  body  with 
parrot  feathers  of  many  colours ;  this  executioner 


170    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 

must  be  the  most  valiant  and  most  honoured  of 
the  country.  He  carries  in  his  hand  a  sword  of 
very  hard,  heavy  wood,  with  which  they  are  ac- 
customed to  kill;  and  he  comes  up  to  the  victim 
saying  many  things  to  him,  threatening  his  entire 
posterity  and  his  relatives:  having  insulted  him 
with  many  injurious  words,  he  gives  him  a  heavy 
blow  on  the  head  which  breaks  his  head  in  pieces 
and  kills  him  on  the  spot.  There  is  an  old  Indian 
woman  by  with  a  gourd  in  her  hand  who,  as  soon 
as  the  victim  falls,  approaches  very  quickly  and 
puts  this  to  his  head,  in  order  to  catch  the  brains 
and  blood.  Finally,  they  cook  or  roast  and  eat 
every  part  of  him,  so  that  none  of  him  remains. 
This  they  do  more  for  the  sake  of  vengeance  than 
on  account  of  hatred  or  to  satisfy  their  appetites. 
After  they  have  eaten  the  flesh  of  these  enemies, 
they  remain  more  confirmed  in  their  hatred;  be- 
cause this  injury  is  felt  keenly,  they  are  always 
desirous  of  taking  vengeance.  If  the  girl  with 
whom  the  captive  slept  is  pregnant,  they  kill  the 
child  she  bears,  after  it  is  weaned;  they  cook  it 
and  say  that  that  child,  boy  or  girl,  is  verily 
their  enemy,  and  therefore  they  are  very  desirous 
of  eating  its  flesh  and  taking  vengeance  upon  it. 
And  because  the  mother  knows  the  end  destined 
for  the  child,  often  when  she  is  pregnant  she  kills 
the  child  in  the  womb  and  produces  abortion.  It 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     171 

sometimes  happens  that  she  falls  so  deeply  in 
love  with  the  captive  and  becomes  so  enamoured 
of  him  that  she  flees  with  him  to  his  country,  in 
order  to  save  his  life ;  hence  there  are  living  today 
some  Portuguese  who  have  thus  escaped.  Many 
Indians  have  saved  themselves  in  the  same  man- 
ner, although  some  of  them  are  so  brutish  that 
they  do  not  wish  to  flee  after  they  have  been  taken. 
Once  there  was  an  Indian  already  tied  in  the 
plaza  to  be  killed,  and  they  gave  him  his  life ;  he 
did  not  desire  it,  but  wished  them  to  kill  him,  for, 
said  he,  his  relatives  would  not  consider  him 
brave,  and  all  of  them  would  avoid  him:  hence 
it  comes  about  that  they  do  not  fear  death;  and 
when  that  hour  arrives  they  are  imperturbable, 
and  show  no  sadness  in  that  pass.  Finally,  those 
Indians  are  very  inhuman  and  cruel;  no  piety 
moves  them;  they  live  like  brute  beasts  without 
the  order  or  concord  of  men ;  they  are  very  disso- 
lute and  given  to  sensuality,  yielding  to  vice  as 
though  they  lacked  human  reason;  although  they 
always  have  certain  reserve,  the  males  and  fe- 
males in  their  congress,  thereby  manifesting  a 
certain  sense  of  modesty.  They  all  eat  human 
flesh  and  consider  it  the  best  of  their  dishes,  not 
that  of  their  friends  with  whom  they  are  at  peace, 
but  that  of  their  enemies.  These  Indians  have 
this  quality,  that  whatever  they  eat,  however  small 


172     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

the  quantity,  they  must  invite  all  present  to  share 
with  them;  this  is  the  only  charitable  conception 
found  among  them.  They  eat  whatever  insects 
grow  in  the  country,  rejecting  none,  no  matter 
how  poisonous,  except  spiders.  The  male  In- 
dians have  the  custom  of  pulling  out  all  their 
beard,  and  do  not  allow  hair  to  grow  on  any  part 
of  the  body  except  the  head,  and  they  pull  it  out 
even  from  the  lower  part  of  this.  The  females 
pride  themselves  much  on  their  hair,  and  wear  it 
braided  with  ribbons.  The  males  are  accustomed 
to  wear  the  lips  pierced  and  a  stone  placed  in  the 
hole  for  decoration ;  there  are  others  who  have  the 
entire  face  full  of  holes,  thereby  appearing  very 
ugly  and  disfigured;  this  is  done  to  them  when 
they  are  children.  Some  of  these  Indians  also 
have  the  entire  body  painted  with  a  certain  dye, 
in  lines  of  many  patterns;  they  always  paint 
themselves  with  the  same  designs;  they  do  not 
wear  these  designs  unless  they  have  performed 
some  deed  of  valour.  Moreover,  the  males  as 
well  as  the  females  are  accustomed  to  dye  them- 
selves with  the  juice  of  a  fruit  which  is  called 
genipdpo;  this  is  green  when  squeezed  out,  and 
after  they  have  placed  it  on  their  bodies  and  it 
has  dried,  it  turns  very  black;  however  much  one 
bathes,  it  can  not  be  removed  for  nine  days :  they 
do  all  this  for  adornment.  These  Indian  women 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     173 

are  faithful  to  their  husbands  and  are  very 
friendly  with  them,  because  adultery  is  not  toler- 
ated. Most  of  the  men  marry  their  nieces,  the 
daughters  of  their  brothers  or  sisters;  these  are 
their  true  wives,  and  the  fathers  of  the  women 
can  not  refuse  their  request.  In  these  regions 
there  are  some  Indian  women  who  take  an  oath 
of  chastity,  and  hence  do  not  marry,  or  have  com- 
merce with  men  in  any  respect;  nor  would  they 
consent  to  it,  even  if  their  refusal  meant  death. 
These  give  up  all  the  functions  of  women  and 
imitate  the  men,  pursuing  the  functions  of  the 
latter  as  though  they  were  not  women;  they  cut 
their  hair,  wearing  it  in  the  same  way  as  the 
males ;  they  go  to  war  with  their  bows  and  arrows, 
and  hunt:  in  a  word,  they  always  go  in  company 
with  the  men,  and  each  one  has  a  woman  to  serve 
her,  who  provides  food  for  her  as  if  they  two  were 
married.  The  Indian  men  live  very  much  at 
ease;  they  think  about  nothing  except  eating, 
drinking,  and  killing  people;  for  this  reason, 
they  grow  very  fat,  and  when  anything  worries 
them  they  become  very  thin ;  if  any  one  is  vexed  at 
anything,  he  eats  earth;  and  in  this  way  many 
of  them  die  like  beasts.  All  are  prone  to  follow 
the  advice  of  the  old  women;  their  every  sugges- 
tion is  acted  upon,  and  is  believed  to  be  true; 
hence  it  occurs  that  many  inhabitants  will  not 


174    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

buy  the  old  women  [for  slaves] ,  so  that  these  will 
not  have  an  opportunity  to  cause  their  slaves  to 
flee.  When  these  Indian  women  give  birth,  their 
first  act  after  the  birth  is  to  wash  themselves  in 
a  river,  after  which  they  are  just  as  lusty  as  if 
they  had  not  given  birth.  Instead  of  the  woman, 
her  husband  remains  in  his  hammock,  and  is 
visited  and  treated  as  though  he  were  the  one  who 
had  given  birth.  When  one  of  these  Indians  dies, 
they  are  accustomed  to  bury  him  in  a  hole  seated 
upon  his  feet,  with  the  net  in  which  he  slept  at 
his  back,  and  then  for  the  first  few  days  they  place 
something  to  eat  over  the  grave.  There  are  many 
other  bestialities  practised  among  these  Indians 
which  I  shall  not  describe,  for  my  intention  was 
not  to  be  lengthy,  but  to  treat  this  entire  subject 
briefly. 

ABOUT  TRADE. 

These  Indians  have  no  possessions,  nor  do 
they  try  to  acquire  them  like  other  people;  they 
covet  only  a  few  articles  which  come  from  this 
Kingdom;  namely,  shirts,  jerkins,  iron  tools,  and 
other  things;  these  they  value  highly  and  ear- 
nestly desire  to  obtain  from  the  Portuguese :  in  ex- 
change for  these,  they  used  to  sell  one  another; 
the  Portuguese  used  to  obtain  many  of  them  by 
purchase,  and  used  to  seize  as  many  as  they 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     175 

wanted,  without  hindrance;  but  now  seizure  and 
purchase  are  no  longer  accomplished  as  they  used 
to  be,  for,  after  the  Fathers  of  the  Company  came 
to  these  regions,  they  took  in  their  hands  this 
business,  and  forbade  the  Portuguese  making 
raids  along  the  coast;  they  [the  Fathers]  heavily 
charged  the  consciences  [of  the  Portuguese]  with 
the  unjust  seizure  of  Indians,  and  the  causing  of 
unjust  wars;  hence  the  Fathers  commanded  and 
obtained  from  the  Captains  of  the  country  that 
slave  trading  [with  the  Indians]  should  cease, 
and  that  no  Portuguese  should  go  to  the  villages 
without  the  Captain's  permission.  And  all  slaves 
which  today  come  from  the  sertao,  or  from  the 
other  Captaincies,  are  first  taken  to  the  custom- 
house where  they  are  examined  and  questioned: 
who  sold  them,  how  they  were  purchased;  be- 
cause no  one  has  the  right  to  sell  them  except 
their  parents,  or  their  captors  in  a  just  war;  and 
those  who  are  found  to  be  wrongfully  acquired  are 
set  at  liberty:  in  this  way,  all  Indians  purchased 
today  are  legally  acquired,  and  the  inhabitants 
of  the  land  are  not  failing  on  this  account  to  in- 
crease their  possessions. 


176    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  WILD  BEASTS  OF  THE  COUNTRY. 

It  does  not  seem  inappropriate  to  me  in  this 
summary  to  discuss  somewhat  the  wild  animals 
that  grow  in  these  regions;  for  everything 
[imaginable]  exists  in  this  country;  nevertheless 
this  means  only  that  there  is  a  great  difference 
and  variety  of  animals  in  different  parts  of  the 
country.  There  are  in  these  parts  many  very  wild 
and  poisonous  animals,  principally  snakes  of 
many  species  and  different  names.  Some  of  them 
are  so  enormous  that  they  can  swallow  a  whole 
deer;  it  is  affirmed,  too,  that  this  snake  has  the 
following  property,  that,  after  having  eaten,  it 
bursts  at  the  belly,  and  all  the  flesh  of  its  body 
rots,  nothing  remaining  in  healthy  condition  ex- 
cept the  backbone,  the  head,  and  the  point  of  the 
tail ;  and,  after  it  has  remained  for  a  time  in  this 
condition,  little  by  little  the  flesh  begins  to  grow 
again,  until  it  is  covered  anew  with  flesh,  as  com- 
pletely as  before :  the  above  process  many  Indians 
have  seen  and  witnessed;  in  their  language  this 
snake  is  called  giboyossu.115  There  are  others  of 
a  different  variety,  much  larger  and  more  poison- 
ous; they  are  so  exceedingly  large  that  scarcely 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     177 

could  seventeen  Indians  lift  one  of  them  which 
they  killed  by  the  seashore  near  the  Portuguese 
[settlements] ;  this  snake  is  called  sucuriju.  An- 
other variety  of  them  which  they  call  boiteninga 
has  on  the  point  of  its  tail  a  thing  which  sounds 
very  much  like  a  rattle;  and  wherever  this  snake 
goes,  it  always  makes  this  noise;  it  is  one  of  the 
fiercest  serpents  of  the  land.  There  is  another 
one  which  is  called  hebijares;  it  has  two  mouths, 
one  in  its  head  and  the  other  in  its  tail,  and  it 
bites  with  both:  this  snake  is  white  and  very 
short;  most  of  the  time  it  is  under  ground;  it  is 
the  most  poisonous  of  all ;  whoever  is  bitten  by  it 
can  not  live  many  hours;  nor  will  any  person 
bitten  by  the  others  live  more  than  twenty-four 
hours.  There  is  another  kind  which  have  no 
teeth  and  do  not  bite;  these  are  not  poisonous, 
nor  are  they  very  large;  they  are  called  japaranas. 
Some  men  affirm,  moreover,  that  they  have  seen 
serpents  in  this  land  with  very  large  wings,  and 
frightful,  but  they  are  rarely  found.  There  are 
many  large  alligators  in  the  rivers  of  fresh  water 
and  in  th^  thickets;  their  testicles  smell  better 
than  musk,  and  whatever  cloth  is  touched  by  them 
retains  the  odour  for  many  days.  The  fiercest 
and  most  harmful  of  the  beasts  in  the  land  are 
tigers;  these  animals  are  about  the  size  of  a 
heifer ;  they  go  to  the  cattle  corrals  of  the  inhabi- 


178     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

tants  and  kill  many  cattle,  and  they  are  so  fierce 
and  strong  that  they  can  strike  a  young  cow  or 
steer  a  blow  with  their  paw,  and  dash  its  brains 
out,  and  carry  it  off  to  the  forest.  Inland,  some- 
times, they  kill  and  eat  the  Indians  when  they 
are  famished;  they  climb  trees  like  cats;  there 
they  wait  for  game  to  pass  beneath  them  and 
pounce  upon  it;  and  in  this  way  nothing  can 
escape  them:  the  inhabitants  of  the  country  kill 
some  of  them  in  snares. 

The  entire  land  of  Brazil  is  overrun  with 
ants,  large  and  small ;  they  do  some  damage  to  the 
grape-vines  of  the  inhabitants  and  to  the  orange 
trees  in  their  orchards;  and  if  it  were  not  for 
these  ants  there  would  perhaps  be  many  vineyards 
in  Brazil;  although  they  are  of  small  necessity, 
because  so  much  wine  is  exported  from  the  King- 
dom that  this  country  is  always  well  provided 
with  wine. 

There  is  also  an  infinite  number  of  mos- 
quitoes, principally  along  the  river  banks,  among 
a  variety  of  trees  which  are  called  mangu  [man- 
grove];  no  one  can  endure  them;  in  the  forest, 
when  there  is  no  viragao,  they  are  very  plentiful 
and  torment  people  excessively.  There  is  also 
a  variety  of  rats  which  carry  their  young  hanging 
on  their  belly;  thus  attached,  they  grow  until 
they  are  large.  There  are  numerous  monkeys  of 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     179 

many  varieties,  as  is  already  known.  As  soon 
as  the  female  monkeys  give  birth,  the  young  ones 
fasten  themselves  to  their  backs,  and  always  go 
astride  their  mothers  until  they  are  well  grown; 
if  the  mothers  are  pursued  and  killed,  the  young 
do  not  wish  to  let  go  of  them.  There  are  also 
many  seals  and  capivaras  [water-hogs]  which 
grow  in  the  ocean  and  on  the  land.  Many  other 
animals  grow  inland  in  these  regions,  of  which 
it  will  be  impossible  to  know  or  write,  so  great  is 
their  number;  for,  the  land  being  very  large,  God 
has  created  in  it  many  kinds  and  forms  of  crea- 
tures. 


180    TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  or  BRAZIL 


CHAPTER  IX. 

Or  THE  COUNTRY  CERTAIN  MEN  OF  THE  CAP- 
TAINCY or  PORTO  SEGURO  WENT  TO  DIS- 
COVER AND  WHAT  THEY  FOUND  IN  IT. 

Inasmuch  as  it  was  my  intention  to  treat 
in  this  summary  only  of  those  things  which  are 
common  to  the  coast  of  Brazil  by  which  all  the 
inhabitants  of  the  country  benefit,  it  seems  to  me 
necessary  and  fitting,  in  justice  to  the  country, 
to  indicate  also  in  this  chapter  the  wealth  of 
metals  which,  they  affirm,  exist  inland,  all  of  this 
having  been  proven  by  the  persons  who  found 
and  examined  them  by  exploration;  and  this  is 
the  manner  in  which  the  discovery  took  place: 

Certain  Indians  arrived  in  the  Captaincy  of 
Porto  Seguro,  from  the  sertao,  giving  news  of  the 
existence  of  green  stones  in  a  mountain  range 
many  leagues  inland;  and  they  brought  some 
with  them  as  samples;  they  were  emeralds,  but 
not  of  very  great  value:  the  Indians  themselves 
said  that  they  were  plentiful,  and  that  this  moun- 
tain range  was  beautiful  and  resplendent.  As 
soon  as  the  inhabitants  of  this  Captaincy  were 
notified  of  the  fact,  fifty  or  sixty  Portuguese  made 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     181 

ready,  with  native  Indians,  and  left  for  the  sertao 
inland,  with  the  determination  of  attaining  the 
mountain  chain  where  the  stones  were.  There 
went  as  Captain  of  this  band  one  Martim  Car- 
valho,116  who  now  dwells  in  Bahia  de  Todos  los 
Santos;  they  went  inland  some  two  hundred  and 
twenty  leagues,  where  most  of  the  mountains  they 
found  and  observed  were  of  very  fine  crystal; 
the  entire  land  was  very  rugged,  and  there  were 
many  other  mountains  of  blue  earth  in  which 
they  [Indians]  assured  them  there  was  much 
gold,  because  *  *  *,11T  between  two  mountains: 
in  this  way  they  came  upon  a  river  which  flowed  at 
the  foot  of  one  of  them;  in  it  they  found  among 
the  grains  of  sand  some  little  yellow  grains  which 
the  men,  upon  biting  them,  found  soft;  but  they 
could  not  be  disintegrated.  Finally,  all  agreed 
that  these  grains  were  gold,  nor  could  it  be  any 
other  metal,  since  gold,  wherever  it  is  found,  oc- 
curs in  this  manner.  They  gathered  in  the  sand 
on  the  river  bank  a  handful  of  these  grains  which 
they  found  very  heavy,  which  was  also  a  proof 
that  it  was  gold;  but  they  could  not  make  the  test, 
because  this  was  desert  country  where  for  many 
days  they  suffered  great  hunger ;  they  had  nothing 
to  eat  except  grass,  and  a  snake  which  they  had 
killed.  They  went  on,  determined,  upon  their 
return,  to  go  again  into  this  country,  provided 


182     TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL 

with  food,  in  order  to  try  to  explore  the  mountain 
from  which  this  gold  was  washed  down  to  the 
river  bank.  They  found  in  the  forests  a  great 
quantity  of  c ana fistula;1'18  and  on  this  journey 
they  found  other  metals  which  they  did  not  know; 
nor  could  they  delay,  on  account  of  the  wars  the 
Indians  raised  against  them.  Some  Indians  gave 
them  news ;  according  to  their  report,  there  might 
be  about  one  hundred  leagues  to  the  mountain  of 
green  stones  which  they  were  seeking,  and  it 
was  not  very  far  from  there  to  Peru.  Finally, 
on  account  of  the  enemies  whom  they  feared,  and 
on  account  of  the  people  who  were  sick,  they 
turned  back  again  in  canoes  down  a  river  which 
is  called  Cricare;  there,  in  a  rapid,  was  lost  one 
canoe,  in  which  were  the  grains  of  gold  that  they 
were  bringing  back  as  samples. 

They  spent  eight  months  on  this  trip,  and, 
completely  worn  out,  they  returned  again  to  the 
Captaincy  of  Porto  Seguro. 

Those  who  survived  this  experience  affirm 
that  there  is  much  gold  in  those  regions,  accord- 
ing to  the  signs  and  samples  which  they  found, 
and  that  if  people  properly  prepared  should  re- 
turn thither  with  all  necessary  equipment,  taking 
with  them  experts  in  this  line,  they  would  dis- 
cover in  that  land  great  mines. 


TREATISE  ON  THE  LAND  OF  BRAZIL     183 

I  wished  to  write  more  minutely  about  the 
peculiarities  of  this  Province  of  Brazil;  but,  in 
order  to  satisfy  everybody  with  brevity,  I  have 
guarded  against  being  prolix;  for  the  praises  of 
the  land  demand  another  book,  more  copious  and 
of  greater  size,  in  which  could  be  explained  in 
detail  the  excellence  and  diversity  of  things  to  be 
found  there,  for  the  relief  and  profit  of  men  who 
go  there  to  live.  Inasmuch  as  the  happiness  and 
increase  of  this  Province  consists  in  being  popu- 
lated with  many  people,  there  need  be  no  poor 
people  in  the  Kingdom;  for  these  poor  people 
should,  with  the  assistance  of  Your  Highness,  go 
to  live  in  these  parts  where  all  men  live  in  plenty, 
and  free  from  the  hardships  suffered  in  the  King- 
dom. Thus  may  it  please  God  that  this  land  of 
Nova  Lusitania  shall  flourish;  and  may  it  con- 
tribute to  the  increase  of  the  crown  of  the  King- 
dom ;  and  may  the  Kingdom  be  envied  by  others ; 
for  we  shall  not  covet  other  peoples'  lands,  inas- 
much as  our  own  promises  such  richness  and 
prosperity  to  those  who  go  out  to  it  for  their  own 
good. 


Notes 


Notes 

1  The  XVI  century  name  for  the  Malaccan  Penin- 
sula. 

2  Achem  was  a  king  of  one  of  the  tribes  in  the 
Malaccan  Peninsula. 

8  Refers  to  the  attempt  of  the  Spaniards  to  settle 
in  Santa  Catarina,  near  the  mouth  of  the  La  Plata, 
and  of  the  French  to  settle  in  Rio  de  Janeiro,  Pernam- 
buco,  and  other  places  along  the  coast. 

4  Dom  Manuel  the  Fortunate  reigned  in  Portugal 
1495-1521. 

8  Pedro  Alvarez  Cabral,  or  Pedralvarez  Cabral, 
or  more  correctly,  Pedro  Alvares  de  Gouvea,  is  sup- 
posed to  have  been  born  in  1467;  he  died  in  1526.  He 
came  of  an  old  and  distinguished  family  of  the  lesser 
nobility.  The  castle  of  Belmonte  had  been  in  the  pos- 
session of  the  Cabrals  since  about  1400,  and  here  Pedro 
Alvarez  was  born  of  Fernao  Cabral  and  Izabel  de 
Gouvea.  He  was  a  second  son.  Save  of  his  trip  to 
India,  very  little  is  known  of  his  life. 

"There  is  perhaps  no  distinguished  discoverer  re- 
garding whose  life,  apart  from  his  discoveries,  we 
know  so  little  as  we  do  regarding  the  life  of  Pedral- 
varez Cabral.  We  know  only  that  he  was  the  son  of 
an  important  judicial  functionary,  that  he  was  one  of 
a  somewhat  large  family — there  were  four  sons  be- 
sides Pedralvarez,  and  two  daughters — that  his  wife 
Izabel  was  a  member  of  a  noble  family,  and  that  his 
wife,  two  sons  and  one  daughter,  or  two  daughters, 
survived  him."  James  Roxburgh  McClymont — 
Pedralvarez  Cabral,  his  progenitors,  his  life,  and  his 
voyage  to  America  and  India.  London,  1914. 


190  NOTES 

The  Brazilian  historian  Adolfo  Varnhagen,  Vis- 
conde  de  Porto  Seguro,  discovered  his  tomb,  a  slab  of 
marble  thirteen  palms  long  and  half  as  wide,  in  the 
sacristy  of  the  Convento  da  Grac,a,  Santarem.  On  it 
was  the,  following  inscription  in  Gothic  characters : 

"Aquy  Jaz  Pedralvarez  Cabral  e  dona  Isabel  de 
Castro  sua  molher,  cuja  he  esta  capella  he  de  todos 
seus  Erdeyros  aquall,  depois  da  morte  de  seu  marydo 
foi  camareira  mor  da  infante  dona  Marya  fylha  de  el 
rey  do  Joao  nosso  snor  he  terceiro  deste  nome." 

6  There  was  probably  more  interest  and  pomp  in 
the  departure  of  the  fleet  commanded  by  Cabral  than 
in  that  of  any  fleet  which  had  so  far  sailed  on  a  voy- 
age of  exploration.  The  remarkable  accounts  of  India 
brought  back  by  Da  Gama  in  the  preceding  year  were 
accountable  for  the  vast  preparations  for  this  expe- 
dition. Both  Joao  de  Barros,  in  his  Asia,  and  Damiao 
de  Goes,  in  his  Chronicle  of  King  Emanuel,  give  a 
detailed  account  of  the  ceremonies  which  took  place 
at  Belem  on  the  day  before  the  departure  of  the  fleet 
and  the  day  of  its  departure,  presided  over  by  the  King 
of  Portugal  and  the  Bishop  of  Lisbon.  After  an  open- 
air  mass  at  which  the  Bishop  of  Lisbon  officiated,  the 
banner  of  the  Order  of  Christ  was  blessed  and  raised 
and  presented  by  the  King  himself  to  Pedro  Alvarez 
Cabral.  On  the  ninth  of  March,  the  day  of  sailing, 
nearly  the  entire  population  of  Lisbon  assembled  on 
the  shores  to  bid  farewell  to  the  fleet  of  thirteen  ves- 
sels, a  remarkably  large  fleet  for  the  period.  The 
names  of  the  commanders  as  recorded  by  de  Barros 
are:  Pedro  Alvarez  Cabral,  in  command;  Sancho  de 
Thoar,  second  in  command;  Simon  de  Miranda; 
Ires  Gomez  da  Silva;  Vasco  de  Athaide;  Pero  de 


NOTES  191 

Athaide  nicknamed  Inferno;  Nicholao  Coelho,  who 
had  made  the  trip  to  India  with  Vasco  da  Gama; 
Bartholomeu  Diaz,  who  discovered  the  Cabo  de  Boa 
Esperanga;  Pero  Diaz,  his  brother;  Nuno  Leitao; 
Caspar  de  Lemos;  Luis  Pires;  Simon  de  Pina.  Mc- 
Clymont  suggests  that,  as  several  of  the  Chroniclers 
give  other  names  of  commanders  as  well  as  those 
mentioned  above,  one  must  accept  all,  which  would 
bring  the  number  of  vessels  up  to  seventeen. 

The  earlv  authorities  are  not  entirely  agreed  as  to 
whether  the  fleet  became  separated  on  account  of  the 
storm  or  otherwise.  Joao  de  Barros,  Damiao  de  Goes 
and  others  affirm  that  the  separation  of  the  fleet  was 
due  to  a  storm.  Antonio  Galvao,  in  his  Treatise  on 
the  Routes  to  India,  says  that  one  of  the  ships  lost 
its  way,  and  Pero  Vaz  de  Caminha,  secretary  to  the 
fleet,  and  an  eye-witness  to  the  events,  states  definitely 
(Letter  of  Vaz  Caminha.  Alguns  Documentos  do 
Archivo  Nacional  da  Torre  do  Tombo  dcerca  das 
Navegaqoes  e  Conquistas  Portuguezas.  Lisbon,  1892.) 
that  "Vasco  d'Athaide  with  his  ship  became  lost  from 
the  fleet,  although  there  was  no  heavy  weather  nor 
any  opposing  wind."  Pedro  Alvarez  Cabral  tried  to 
find  the  ship,  but  unsuccessfully.  Athaide  eventually 
returned  safely  to  Lisbon. 

7  In  accordance  with  the  opinion  of  cosmogra- 
phers,  manners  were  ordered  to  avoid  the  shoals  and 
calms  of  the  north  African  coast,  by  sailing  well  out 
to  sea,  proceeding  due  south  to  the  latitude  of  their 
destination,  and  then  sailing  east  until  they  reached 
the  African  coast.  This  emphasizes  the  fortuitous  cir- 
cumstances under  which  the  discovery  of  Brazil  was 
made. 


192  NOTES 

8  This  cape  was  originally  known  as  Cabo  dos 
Tormentos.    It  was  first  passed  by  Bartholomeu  Diaz 
in  1487 ;  he  was  in  command  of  one  of  Cabral's  vessels 
on  this    expedition,    and    was   lost    when    his    vessel 
foundered  in  a  storm  before  reaching  the  Cabo  de  Boa 
Esperanga. 

9  "On  Easter  Sunday  in  the  morning  the  captain 
determined  to  hear  mass  and  a  sermon  in  that  island, 
and  he  ordered  all  the  captains  that  they  take  their 
stations  in  the  boats  and   follow  him,  and  this  was 
done.     He  ordered  them   to    prepare   an    awning   on 
the  island,  and  under   it   to    erect   a    well    appointed 
altar;  and  there  before   all    of    us    he   ordered    high 
mass     to     be     celebrated.       Father     Frei     Amrique 
(Enrique)  was  the  celebrant  assisted  by  all  the  other 
Fathers  and  priests  who  were  there;  and  that  mass, 
according  to  my    opinion,    was    heard    by    everybody 
with  much  pleasure  and  devotion.     The  captain  had 
with  him  there  the  banner  of  Christ  with  which  he 
left  Belem,  and  which  throughout  the  service  stood 
erect  on  the  side  of  the  Evangel.     When  mass  was 
over,  the  Father  took  off  his  vestments  and  mounted 
in  a  high  pulpit,  and  we  all  knelt  upon  the  sand;  and 
he  preached  to  us  a  solemn  and  profitable  sermon  on 
the  history  of  the  Evangel;  at  the  end  of  it  he  spoke 
of  how  our  coming  and  how  the  finding  of  this  land 
coincided  with  the  Sign  of  the  Cross  under  whose 
auspices  we  had  come,  which  seemed  to  me  very  fitting 
and  created  much  devotion."     (Vaz  Caminha's  Letter. 
Op.  cit,  p.  108.) 

10  Vaz  Caminha  relates  (Letter  of  Vaz  Caminha. 
Op.  cit.,  p.  108)  that  after  mass  Cabral  summoned  a 
council  of  his  captains  at  which  Vaz  Caminha  attended 


NOTES  193 

as  official  secretary  to  the  expedition.  Here  Cabral 
proposed  to  send  back  the  provision  ship  under  Caspar 
de  Lemos  with  an  account  of  the  land  discovered,  so 
that  the  King  might  send  a  new  expedition  to  explore 
that  land  further.  In  this  proposal  all  the  captains 
concurred. 

11  Coelho  and  Vespucci  in  1501.    Vespucci  again 
in  1502.     It  is    sometimes    asserted    that    Christovao 
Jaques  was  sent  in  1503.    Fernao  de  Noronha  in  1504 
and   1506.     Alfonso  d'Albuquerque  in  1503,  Tristao 
d'Acunha  in  1505,  and  Francisco  d' Almeida  in  1506, 
all  three  on  their  way  to  India. 

12  Most  authorities  are  agreed  that  the  discovery 
of  Brazil  took  place  on  the  22nd  of  April.    According 
to  Vaz  Caminha's  account  (Letter  of  Vaz  Caminha. 
Op.  cit,  p.  108),  the  expedition  remained  about  ten 
days  on  the  Brazilian  coast.     Rohan   (Henrique  de 
Beaurepaire   Rohan.     Breve  Discussao    Chronologica 
acerca  da  Descoberta  do  Brazil.  In  Institute  Brazileiro, 
vol.  XXXIII,  pt.  iii.  p.  230)  has  attempted  to  har- 
monize the  date  given  by  Vaz  Caminha  in  his  letter 
with  the  story  of  the  origin  of  the  name,  by  suggesting 
that  the  error  occurred  when  the  calendar  system  was 
changed  from  the  Julian  to  the  Gregorian,  making  a 
difference  of  ten  days  and  some  hours.    This  change, 
however,  did  not  take  place  until  1582,  which  would 
be  too  late   to   account    for   the   statement    made   by 
Magalhaes. 

13  The  Order  of  Christ  was  created  in  Portugal 
in  1319  to  take  over  the  possessions  of  the  Order  of 
Knight  Templars  which  had  been  dissolved  in  that 
year.     The  head  of  this  ancient  organization  wielded 
vast  power,  and  gradually  the  office  fell  into  the  hands 


194  NOTES 

of  the  higher  nobility.  Prince  Henry  the  Navigator, 
brother  of  the  King  of  Portugal,  became  Grand  Master, 
and  during  his  administration  the  Order  reached  the 
highest  point  of  its  power.  He  received  from  the 
Pope  confirmation  in  his  office  and  suzerainty  over 
the  heathen  peoples  in  all  lands  he  had  discovered  or 
should  in  the  future  discover.  One  of  the  objects  of 
the  Order  was  to  carry  Christianity  among  the  heathen 
peoples,  and  for  this  purpose  a  tax  of  ten  per  cent 
was  levied  on  all  revenues  derived  from  the  new  lands. 
This  ten  per  cent  was  to  pay  the  expenses  of  main- 
taining the  cult  among  Christians  and  to  extend  it 
among  the  aborigines  in  Portugal's  new  possessions. 
Upon  the  death  of  Henry  the  Navigator,  the  Grand 
Mastership  passed  to  his  brother  the  King,  and  shortly 
thereafter  the  Pope  made  the  King  of  Portugal,  Joao 
II,  his  successor,  the  hereditary  Grand  Master  of  the 
Order.  It  is  important  to  bear  this  fact  in  mind  in 
studying  early  Brazilian  history,  for  most  of  the  acts 
of  the  King  of  Portugal  in  regard  to  Brazilian  colonial 
affairs  were  performed,  not  as  of  the  King,  but  as  of 
the  Grand  Master  of  the  Order  of  Christ. 

14r  The  evolution  of  the  name  of  the  country  now 
known  as  Brazil  is  very  interesting.  Amerigo  Ves- 
pucci made  three  voyages  along  the  coast  from  the 
Equator  southward,  and  his  fame  as  an  explorer  of 
those  regions  suggested  to  Waldseemuller  (Hyloco- 
milus)  that  the  continent  should  be  named  America 
after  him. 

Both  Vaz  Caminha  and  Joao  Physico,  eye-wit- 
nesses to  the  discovery  in  1500  by  Cabral,  called  the 
land,  now  known  as  Brazil,  Vera  Cruz,  a  fact  which 
has  led  some  writers  to  suggest  that  Sancta  Cruz  was 


NOTES  195 

originally  the  name  of  a  factory  established  near  Porto 
Seguro  in  1503,  and  that  this  name  was  applied  soon 
thereafter  to  the  whole  province.  In  early  French 
accounts  the  country  was  known  as  Terre  du  Bresil 
or  Terre  des  Papagaies,  and  the  hispanic  forms  of 
these  two  denominations  occur  very  early.  In  the 
Ruysch  Map  of  1508  the  land  is  called  Terram 
Bresiliam.  Among  the  Portuguese,  however,  the  name 
of  Provincia  da  Sancta  Cruz  persisted  through  cen- 
turies, and  even  today  a  Portuguese  will  understand 
if  you  talk  to  him  of  the  Terra  da  Sancta  Cruz. 

The  history  of  the  word  "brazil"  is  no  less  inter- 
esting, as  will  be  seen  upon  reading  the  following  note 
kindly  written  for  me  by  Professor  Leo  Wiener  of 
Harvard  University: 

HISTORY  OF  THE  WORD  BRAZIL 

In  a  letter  to  Rusticus  Monachus,  ascribed  to 
Jerome,  but  which  is  unquestionably  an  VIII.  century 
forgery  (See  L.  Wiener,  Contributions  toward  a  His- 
tory of  Arabic o-Gothic  Culture,  vol.  IV.  p.  160  f.), 
there  occurs  the  following  passage:  "Those  who  navi- 
gate the  Red  Sea,  in  which  we  wish  the  true  Pharao  be 
submerged  with  all  his  army,  with  many  difficulties  and 
perils  arrive  at  the  city  of  Axuma.  On  both  shores 
there  are  nomad  people,  nay,  the  most  ferocious  beasts 
live  there.  Always  prepared,  always  in  arms,  they 
carry  with  them  a  year's  supply  of  food.  Everything 
is  full  of  hidden  rocks  and  difficult  shoals,  so  that  the 
watch  and  guide,  sitting  in  the  crow's  nest  of  the  mast, 
directs  the  steering  and  maneuvering  of  the  ship.  It 
is  a  lucky  voyage,  if  after  six  months  they  can  reach 
port  at  the  above-said  city,  where  the  ocean  begins  to 


196  NOTES 

open  up,  over  which  one  can  scarcely  in  a  year  reach 
India  and  the  Ganges  River  (which  Holy  Writ  calls 
Phison),  which  glows  about  the  whole  land  of  Evila, 
and  is  said  in  its  stream  to  bring  down  all  kinds  of 
pigments.  Here  the  carbuncle  and  emerald  are  born, 
and  the  shining  pearls,  for  which  the  ambition  of  noble 
women  is  eager,  and  there  are  golden  mountains, 
which  it  is  impossible  for  men  to  reach,  on  account  of 
the  griffins  and  dragons,  and  monsters  of  enormous 
size,  in  order  that  we  may  learn  what  watchmen  avarice 
possesses."  (Migne,  Patrologia  latina,  vol.  XXII, 
col.  1073f.) 

Here  the  River  of  Paradise  is  placed  in  India, 
that  can  be  reached  by  the  Ocean  which  surrounds  the 
earth,  and  this  region  produces  the  emerald  and  the 
carbuncle.  An  uncertain  poet,  of  about  the  same  time, 
similarly  describes  Paradise,  "where  a  stream  of  pure 
water  flows  through  the  buildings,  which  with  its 
liquid  waters  irrigates  the  famous  gardens  and  cuts 
them  into  four  parts.  Rich  Phison  floods  it  with  its 
auriferous  waves,  and  from  its  rough  abyss  brings 
forth  the  famous  gems,  one  of  which  is  called  prasinus, 
the  other  carbunculus  or  dens"  (ibid.,  vol.  II,  col. 
1099.)  The  story  is  the  same  as  in  Jerome,  but  here 
the  emerald  is  called  prasinus,  while  the  carbuncle  is 
denominated  "burning." 

Here  we  meet  for  the  first  time  with  the  prasinus 
as  a  gem,  for  in  Pliny  the  prasium  is  a  cheap  kind  of 
green  stone.  The  Greek  prasion  means  "leek,"  and 
apparently  emphasizes  its  greenness,  since  prasinos, 
prasios  generally  refers  to  the  deep-green  colour  of 
many  plants,  but  we  have  two  very  ancient  references 
to  a  very  different  hue.  Plato,  in  the  Timaeus,  says 


NOTES  197 

that  auburn  with  black  produces  prasion  (XXX.  In 
R.  D.  Archer-Hind's  The  Timaeus  of  Plato,  London 
1888,  p.  253),  while  Democritus,  in  a  fragment,  says 
that  prasinon  arises  from  purple  and  woad,  or  from 
green  and  purple  (III.  38).  Indeed  the  emerald  is 
not  only  green,  but  in  the  proper  light  shows  a  purple 
or  red  scintillation,  and  it  is  apparently  this  that  the 
ancient  Greeks  had  in  mind  when  they  used  the  words 
prasinon  or  prasion. 

A  confusion  of  the  emerald  with  the  carbuncle, 
with  which  it  is  associated  in  the  reference  to  Paradise, 
is  apparently  of  an  extremely  early  origin,  for  the  old 
words  for  emerald,  Greek  smaragdos,  Sanskrit  mara- 
kata.  Hebrew  barqat,  all  go  back  to  a  root  represented 
in  Hebrew  by  baraq  "to  shine,  burn,"  while  Hebrew 
nopek  "carbuncle"  is  similarly  derived  from  a  root 
napak,  "to  shine,  burn."  It  is  also,  no  doubt,  a  borrow- 
ing from  the  Semitic  baraq  that  is  represented  in  Cop- 
tic mersh,  fresh,  persh  "yellow,  red,"  for  which  there 
seems  to  be  no  Egyptian  antecedent.  The  Arabic  it- 
self shows  the  evolution  from  "green"  to  "fiery  red" 
in  a  root  which  is  borrowed  from  or  related  to  the 
Greek  prasion. 

The  usual  "green"  root  in  the  Semitic  and  Hamit- 
ic  languages,  including  Egyptian,  is  waraq,  to  which 
unquestionably  is  related  Latin  vireo,  viridis,  etc.  But 
in  Arabic,  and  only  there,  there  arises  a  root  waras, 
in  which  the  changes  of  meaning  may  be  easily  ob- 
served. Here  warasa  means  "it  became  green,"  but 
wars  is  "a  certain  plant  of  a  yellow  colour,  resembling 
sesame,  with  which  one  dyes,  and  of  which  is  made  a 
liniment  called  gomrah  for  the  face,  existing  in  El- 
Yemen,  and  nowhere  else,  being  there  sown,"  and  Avi- 


198  NOTES 

cenna  says  that  it  is  "a  certain  thing  of  intensely  red 
colour,  resembling  powdered  saffron,  brought  from  El- 
Yemen,  and  said  to  be  scraped  or  rubbed  off,  or  to 
fall  off,  from  its  trees."  In  the  early  translation  of 
Avicenna  into  Latin,  the  Latinized  form  of  this  word 
is  mes;  in  Bellon's  translation  (A.  A.  Bellunensis, 
Avicennae  Liber  Canonis,  Venetiis  1582,  p.  132),  it  is 
written  gures.  In  the  Serapion,  an  Arabic  work  on 
medical  plants,  which  was  early  translated  into  Latin, 
and  was  later,  in  1497,  printed  at  Venice,  this  Arabic 
term  is  written  as  inrz  (P.  Guigues,  Les  noms  arabes 
dans  Serapion,  Paris  1905,  p.  114).  The  plant  from 
which  the  dye  was  derived  has  been  identified  as  the 
Mermecylon  tinctorium. 

We  have  already  passed  over  from  the  green  and 
red  stones  to  the  red  dye,  but  we  must  retrace  our 
steps,  and  once  more  emphasize  the  confusion  of  pra- 
sion  and  carbunculus  ardens,  which  led  in  a  tenth  cen- 
tury gloss  to  the  equation  brasas  carbones  (G.  Goetz, 
Corpus  glossariorum  latinorum,  Lipsiae  1892,  vol.  III., 
p.  598).  This  is  found  in  a  list  of  medical  terms,  and 
so,  no  doubt,  arose  from  the  medical  use  of  Arabic 
vres,  which  Avicenna  described  as  of  an  intensely  red 
colour.  This,  again,  gave  rise,  chiefly  in  the  Romance 
languages,  to  words  for  "a  burning  coal,"  hence  French 
braise,  Spanish  brasa,  Italian  bragia,  brascia  "burning 
coal,"  etc.  But  soon  a  more  important  use  for  the 
Arabic  and  Greek  words  for  "red"  represented  itself 
in  the  ever-growing  trade  in  logwood  imported  from 
Asia,  which  took  the  place  of  the  Mermecylon  tincto- 
rium. Already  in  the  eighth  century  the  Arabic  baq- 
qam,  the  name  of  the  sappanwood  (See  L.  Wiener, 
Contributions  toward  a  History  of  Arabico-Gothic 


NOTES  199 

Culture,  vol.  I,  p.  xxxff.),  was  applied  to  a  variety 
of  imported  timber  and  found  its  way  into  Gothic  as 
bagms,  into  German  as  Baum,  into  Anglo-Saxon  as 
beam,  originally  "hard  wood  in  log  form."  As  the 
main  colour  produced  by  the  sappanwood  was  the  al- 
ready popular  Greek  prasion,  prasinon,  Latin  prasi- 
num,  Arabic  warsi,  which  in  the  Latinized  form  be- 
came virz  or  vres,  it  is  no  wonder  that  we  early  find 
it  as  Italian  versino,  French  brasil,  etc.,  as  the  denomi- 
nation of  sappanwood  or  similar  imported  plant  dyes. 

Unfortunately  the  data  for  the  history  of  dyes  are 
exceedingly  scanty,  and  only  mere  guesses  are  possible 
here.  Pegoloti,  writing  in  the  first  half  of  the  four- 
teenth century,  speaks  of  domestic,  wild,  and  colombino 
brazil-wood,  and  in  another  place  of  colomni,  ameri, 
and  seni,  in  order  of  their  value.  It  has  been  shown 
that  colombino,  colomni  is  identical  with  coilumin  of 
Marco  Polo  and  refers  to  Kaulam  in  India,  where  the 
sappanwood  grows,  but  nothing  definite  has  been 
ascertained  in  regard  to  the  last  two.  (H.  Yule,  The 
Book  of  Ser  Marco  Polo,  the  Venetian,  Concerning 
the  Kingdoms  and  Marvels  of  the  East,  London,  1871, 
vol.  II.,  p.  315.)  They  are,  however,  much  older  than 
Marco  Polo's  time,  for  brasile  domesticum,  silvaticum 
is  already  recorded  in  the  twelfth  century.  (A.  Schaube, 
Handelsgeschichte  der  romanischen  Volker  des  Mit- 
telmeergebicts  bis  sum  Ende  der  Kreusziige,  Mun- 
chen  und  Berlin  1906,  pp.  157,  164.)  It  is  likely  that 
one  of  these  is,  or  both  are,  a  different  dye  stuff  from 
the  logwood. 

In  1402  Bethencourt  first  landed  in  the  Canary 
Islands.  On  Lancerote  "the  master  and  crew  of  the 
bark  were  moreover  very  anxious  to  secure  some  of 


200  NOTES 

the  produce  of  these  parts,  which  would  bring  them 
great  profit  in  Castile,  such  as  skins,  fat,  orchil  (our- 
solle), (which  is  very  valuable,  and  is  used  for  dye- 
ing), dates,  dragon's  blood,  and  many  other  things" 
(R.  H.  Major,  The  Canarian,  or,  Book  of  the  Conquest 
and  Conversion  of  the  Canarians  in  the  Year  1402, 
London  1872,  p.  64),  and  "orchil  (oursolle)  grows 
here,  and  a  large  and  profitable  trade  is  carried  on  in 
it."  (ibid.,  p.  139.)  In  Fortaventura  he  saw  a  plant 
"which  is  very  valuable,  called  orchil  (oursolle).  It  is 
used  for  dyeing  cloth  and  other  things,  and  is  the  best 
plant  for  that  purpose  that  is  known  anywhere;  and 
if  only  this  island  be  once  conquered  and  brought  into 
the  Christian  faith,  this  plant  will  prove  of  great  value 
to  the  lord  of  the  country."  (ibid.,  p.  134f.)  This 
orchil  is  scientifically  called  Lichen  roccella  and  grows 
abundantly  in  Madeira,  in  the  Canaries,  but  especially 
in  the  Azores.  It  is  a  greenish  grey  lichen  which 
grows  on  rocks  and  walls,  and  produces  beautiful 
violet  and  purple  colours.  (G.  Gravier,  Le  Canarien, 
livre  de  la  conquete  et  conversion  des  Canaries  (1402- 
142 2) par  Jean  de  Bethencourt,  Rouen  1874,  p.  57.) 
There  can  be  little  doubt  that  Bethencourt  here  uses 
a  derivative  of  vres,  read  as  ures,  employing  the  Arabic 
term  for  the  dye,  which  in  Italian  produced  verzino. 
It  is  only  since  Bethencourt's  time  that  the  word  found 
its  way  into  the  Romance  languages  as  French  orseille, 
Spanish  orchilla,  Portuguese  orzilha,  orzelha,  Italian 
orcigla,  as  the  designation  of  the  lichen. 

The  Canary  Islands  were  known  to  the  Genoese 
in  the  XIII.  century,  but  in  their  region  the  Fortunate 
Islands  had  been  placed  since  dim  antiquity  and  may 
have  been  known  long  before  their  settlement  by  the 


NOTES  201 

Genoese.  The  Arabs  obtained  their  story  of  these 
isles  from  the  Romans  and  named  them  Fortunans  (A. 
Millares,  Historia  general  de  las  Islas  Canarias,  Las 
Palmas  1893,  vol.  II,  p.  21),  which  is  obviously  the 
Latin  Fortunatus  written  in  Arabic,  where  t  and  n 
differ  from  each  other  by  a  dot.  But  the  Arabs  also 
translated  this  word  "happy"  into  their  own  language 
and  called  them  sa'ida,  which  without  the  vowel  signs 
would  read  sida.  This  led  to  the  confusion  with 
Spanish  and  Catalan  ciudad  "city,"  wherefore,  on 
Behaim's  Globe  Antillia  appears  as  the  Septe  Cidade 
(ibid.,  p.  16),  "The  Seven  Cities,"  which,  as  is  well 
known,  later  led  the  Spaniards  to  look  for  the  seven 
cities  in  the  west  of  North  America.  (J.  Mees,  His- 
toire  de  la  decouverte  des  lies  Azores  et  de  Vorigine  de 
leur  denomination  d'lles  Flamandes,  Gand  1901,  p.  30.) 
The  importance  of  this  lies  in  the  fact  that  ancient 
stories  of  a  western  world  passed  through  an  Arabic 
medium,  before  they  later  led  to  the  infusion  of  further 
Arabic  stories  in  the  discovery  of  America.  Thus, 
for  example,  the  story  of  the  remora,  which,  as  was 
shown,  evolved  from  the  cormorant  story,  and  a  sea- 
calf  story  through  an  Arabic  source  (L.  Wiener, 
Once  more  the  Sucking-Fish,  in  The  American  Natu- 
ralist, vol.  LV,  p.  165ff.)  is  based  on  the  fact  that  one 
of  the  islands  of  the  Azores  is  in  the  Catalan  Map  of 
1375  given  a?  "Insola  de  Corvi  Marini,"  while  an 
Italian  map  has  Vechi  marini  "sea-calves,"  and  this, 
passing  through  an  Arabic  source,  caused  Columbus  to 
indulge  in  the  remora  story.  Indeed,  XIV.  century 
Catalan  Maps  read  in  this  place  rays  marnos  (ibid., 
p.  80),  apparently  "marine  rays,"  that  is,  fishes  which 
are,  no  doubt,  a  corruption  of  the  reves  used  later  by 


202  NOTES 

Columbus  for  the  remora.  This  shows  that  Columbus 
or  his  friends  concocted  the  story  of  the  remora  from 
the  Catalan  Maps,  a  fact  which  is  again  brought  out  by 
the  name  Islabella  of  the  West  Indies,  which  is  merely 
a  repetition  of  the  Illabela  of  the  Azores  in  the  Catalan 
Maps. 

Similarly  the  Insulae  Purpureae  "Purple  Islands" 
of  Pliny,  who  gives  them  as  belonging  to  the  Canaries, 
led  the  Arabs  to  translate  this  by  "Islands  of  a  mate- 
rial from  which  purple  was  made,"  namely  "Islands  of 
Wars"  and  this  produced  the  Brazil,  Brasil,  Brazi, 
Bragir  of  the  XIV.  and  XV.  century  maps,  somewhere 
in  the  region  of  the  Azores.  It  is  doubtful  whether 
the  Insulae  Purpureae  of  Pliny  are  genuine,  since  so 
much  of  this  author  is  interpolated.  Most  likely  this 
is  already  a  Christian  myth,  based  on  the  classical  myth 
of  the  Island  of  the  Blessed.  This  is  proved  to  be  the 
case  from  the  inscription  on  the  Catalan  Maps  of  1375, 
which  reads  as  follows :  "The  Fortunate  Isles  are  situ- 
ated in  the  Great  Sea,  to  the  left,  touching  the  border 
of  the  West ;  they  are  not  far  out  to  sea.  Isidore  says 
so  in  his  XV.  book:  'These  isles  are  called  Fortunate, 
because  they  abound  in  everything  good,  corn,  fruits, 
and  trees.  The  pagans  thought  that  there  was  Para- 
dise, because  of  the  gentle  warmth  of  the  sun  and  the 
fertility  of  the  earth.'  Isidore  also  says  that  the  trees 
grow  there  at  least  one  hundred  and  forty  feet  high, 
and  bear  much  fruit  and  have  many  birds.  One  finds 
there  honey  and  milk,  especially  on  Goat  Isle,  so  called 
from  the  multitude  of  goats  found  there." 

This  makes  it  clear  that  at  first  the  western  islands 
were  supposed  to  contain  Paradise  and  this  was 
confused  with  India,  wherefore  the  Catalan  Maps  con- 


NOTES  203 

tinue  the  above  account  by  saying:  "The  pagans  of 
India  believe  that  their  souls,  after  death,  inhabit 
those  isles,  and  continue  to  live  there  eternally  on  the 
perfume  of  these  fruits.  They  believe  that  it  is  their 
Paradise,  but,  to  tell  the  truth,  this  is  a  fable."  (J.  A. 
C.  Buchon  et  J.  Tastu,  Notice  d'un  atlas  en  langue 
catalane,  in  Notices  et  extraits  des  manuscrits  de  la 
bibliotheque  du  roi  et  autres  bibliotheques -,  Paris  1841, 
p.  67f.)  That  this,  too,  went  through  an  Arabic  source 
is  shown  by  the  fact  that  the  Canary  Islands  were 
known  to  the  Arabs  as  Gezair  el  Khaledat  "islands  of 
eternity."  (A.  Millares,  op.  cit.,  p.  30f.)  But,  in 
Paradise  was  the  prasinus  "the  purple  stone,"  and  this 
led  to  the  "Purple  Isles,"  and  when  the  purple  was 
generally  connected  with  the  dye  plant  producing  pur- 
ple actually  found  there,  the  name  of  the  dye  stuff  was 

naturally  attached  to  one  of  these  western  isles. 
*        *        * 

Joaquim  Caetano  da  Silva  (Institute  Brasileiro, 
Vol.  29,  pt.  2,  p.  5)  has  pointed  out  the  early  use  of  the 
word  brazil  in  its  Italian,  French,  or  Spanish  form,  and 
variations  from  the  year  1151,  on.  It  is  frequently 
found  in  the  commercial  documents  of  the  Middle 
Ages  with  countless  variations,  such  as  bersi,  bersil, 
bersilicum,  brisil,  brisilh,  brisilien,  brisilicum,  brisi- 
lians,  brisolum.  The  Italian  forms  would  follow  these 
with  the  initial  letter  changed  to  v  instead  of  b. 

15  The  mention  of  Joao  de  Barros  as  a  source 
gives  the  opportunity  to  point  out  that  there  is  scarcely 
a  statement  made  by  Pero  de  Magalhaes  which  has  not 
been  made  at  an  earlier  date  by  other  travellers  in 
Brazil.  It  is  often  difficult  to  realize  that  Magalhaes 
speaks  as  one  who  has  been  to  Brazil,  although  the 
dedication  preceding  the  Tratado  makes  it  quite  clear 


204  NOTES 

that  he  visited  that  country.  Often  the  similarity  of 
his  text  to  the  text  of  the  letters  of  the  Jesuits,  or  to 
the  text  of  Joao  de  Barros,  is  striking. 

16  There  is  an  interesting  letter  in  existence  writ- 
ten by  Diego  Nunes,  a  Portuguese  in  the  service  of 
one  of  the  Peruvian  conquist adores.    It  is  dated  1538, 
and  in  it  he  requests  the  King  of  Portugal  to  send  out 
settlers  from  the  Algarbe  to  establish  a  colony  in  the 
region  which  he  calls  Machifalo.     He  tells  how  he 
had  gone  into  that  region  and  found  it  suitable  for 
settlement,  and  tells  the   King  how  many  men  and 
horsemen  and  how  much  ammunition  would  be  re- 
quired to  establish  a  colony.     Nunes  probably  was  in 
the  company  of  Captain  Gonsalo  Dias  de  Pineda,  who 
was  sent  by  his  chief,  Sebastian  de  Velalcazar,  to  ex- 
plore the  country  of  the  Quijos  and  Canelos,  toward 
the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Magdalena,  in  1536.    His  report 
to  Velalcazar  of  the  riches  of  the  country  inspired  Gon- 
salo Pizarro  to  attempt  an  exploration  in  1539  in  the 
same  region,  the  result  of  which  was  Orellana's  voy- 
age down  the  Amazon  in  1541. 

17  The    early    accounts    of    travellers    in    Brazil 
abound    in    references    to    the    healthfulness    of    the 
Brazilian  climate,  but  this  seems  to  be  mere  propa- 
ganda.   As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  letters  of  the  Jesuit 
Fathers  indicate  that  they  suffered  a  great  many  hard- 
ships due  to  illness.     One  must  bear  in  mind  that  the 
tenor  of  the  first  accounts  was  to  inspire  people  to  seek 
Brazil.     Cardim  (Narrative  Espistolar) ,  however,  as 
late  as  1590,  relates  that  in  Sao  Paulo  he  saw  four 
men  whose  combined  ages  totaled   500  years.     This 
would  accord  with  the  statement  that  Pigafetta  makes 
but  which  he  gives  at  second  hand ;  namely,  that  there 


NOTES  205 

are  many  who  are  125  years  old,  and  some  who  reach 
the  age  of  140  years.  The  Neue  Zeitung  also  states 
that  many  of  the  inhabitants  of  Brazil  attained  the  age 
of  140  years.  The  probability  is  that  the  older  Indians 
from  whom  they  had  information  regarding  their  age 
figured  by  generations  rather  than  by  actual  years, 
and  the  Spaniards  in  calculating  did  not  consider  the 
earlier  maturity  of  the  Indians.  We  also  have  state- 
ments from  the  earlier  travellers  that  the  Brazilians 
could  not  count  above  ten.  Moreover,  aborigines  of 
all  countries  have  the  appearance  of  great  age  by  the 
time  they  have  reached  seventy.  These  facts,  no 
doubt,  account  for  the  exaggerated  statements  made 
by  some  observers. 

Not  every  one  of  the  travellers  to  Brazil  was  so 
pleased  with  the  climate.  Luis  Ramires  (Letter  of 
Luis  Ramires.  Institute  Brasileiro.  Vol.  XV,  p.  14), 
speaking  of  a  point  on  the  coast  near  Sao  Vicente 
where  he  and  his  men  had  remained  thirteen  months 
and  a  half  to  build  a  ship,  relates  that  nearly  all  his 
people  fell  ill  before  the  ship  was  completed,  and  the 
illness  was  so  sudden  that  many  fell  on  the  spot,  a  few 
of  his  men  died,  and  nearly  all  were  sick,  either  while 
in  port  or  after  they  had  left. 

18  Viraqao  is  a  word  derived  from  the  verb  virar, 
to  turn,  as  does  a  weather-vane,  and  is  applied  to  the 
daily  winds  which  in  Brazil  blow  from  sea  to  land  in 
daytime,  and  in  the  opposite  direction  at  night  and  in 
the  early  morning. 

19  Sertdo  means  the  wooded  back-lying  interior 
of  a  region.     In  Brazil,  in  these  days,  it  means  the 
central  portion  of  the  country  within  the  rim  of  moun- 
tains which  parallel  the  coast. 


206  NOTES 

20  This  is  the  true  significance  of  the  name,  first 
applied    by    Orellana    because    he    had    fought    with 
women  in  the  upper  part  of  the  river  when  he  made 
his  voyage  of  discovery  in  1541. 

21  Maranhao  is  an   old    name    for   the   Amazon. 
In  Magalhaes'  description,  he  apparently  refers  to  the 
southern  mouth  of  the  Amazon,  which  flows  south  of 
the  island  of  Mara  jo  into  the  sea. 

22  I  have  not  been  able  to  identify  the  voyage. 
It  may  have  been  a  ship  from  the  expedition  sent  out 
by  Joao  de  Barros  and  Ayres  da  Cunha.     Or  Duarte 
Coelho  may  have  sent  out  some  one  to  explore.     Or, 
again,  it  may  have  been  an  expedition  under  Antonio 
Cardoso  de  Barros,  one  of  the  original  captains. 

23  This  lake  and  the  inhabitants  are  described  in 
the  last  chapter.     It  was  while  seeking  permission  to 
explore  this  inland  country  up  the  river  Sao  Francisco 
that  Gabriel  Scares  de  Sousa  spent  several  years  in 
Madrid  and  wrote  his  Tratado  Descriptivo  do  Brazil. 

24  Asuncion  was  founded  by  Juan  de  Salazar  y 
Espinosa  under  orders  from  Pedro  de  Mendoza,  Gov- 
ernour  of  the  Province  of  Paraguay,  in  1536. 

25  It  was  generally  believed  in  the  XVI  century 
that  there  was  a  large  lake  in  the  interior  of  the  coun- 
try, from  which  several  rivers  flowed  in  various  direc- 
tions.   The  elimination  of  this  lake  from  the  maps  did 
not  take  place  until  after  1700.     The  origin  of  this 
belief  was  probably  due  to  the  fact  that  in  the  rainy 
seasons  the  rivers  in  the  interior  of  Brazil  overflowed. 
Many  early  travellers   relate  coming  upon  vast   ex- 
panses of  water  due  to  these  overflows.     Federmann 
in  his  Journey  to  the  Oronoco  (Niclaus  Federmann — 


NOTES  207 

Indianische  Historia.  Hagenau,  1557)  describes  what 
he  thought  was  the  southern  sea  when  he  looked  from 
an  eminence  across  the  Oronoco  River  and  could  not 
see  the  other  bank.  He  adds,  however,  that  the  day 
was  hazy. 

28  The  following  incomplete  table  is  compiled 
from  notes  collected  for  my  third  volume,  which  have 
not  yet  been  finally  corrected.  The  most  interesting 
thing  to  note  is  the  apparent  injustice  of  the  grants  if 
one  judges  by  the  area.  The  King  surely  desired  that 
Martim  Affonso  should  profit  handsomely  from  his 
gift,  but,  actually,  the  territory  he  received  was  one  of 
the  smallest  allotted.  Undoubtedly  this  unfairness 
came  from  the  fact  that  there  were  very  few  data  re- 
garding the  geography  of  the  country  and  from  the 
fact  that  the  Line  of  Demarcation  had  not  been  located. 

27  The  Line  of  Demarcation  has  had  an  interesting 
history.  Upon  the  return  of  Columbus  from  the  New 
World  after  his  first  voyage,  Ferdinand  and  Isabella 
requested  of  the  Pope  the  suzerainty  of  the  new  lands 
just  discovered.  The  Pope,  Alexander  VI,  a  Spaniard 
and  supposedly  friendly  to  the  Spanish  King,  acceded 
and  decreed  the  famous  Bull  of  1493,  dividing  the 
world  into  two  zones  by  a  line  drawn  from  Pole  to 
Pole  one  hundred  leagues  west  of  the  Azores  and 
Cape  Verde  Islands.  His  right  to  do  so  was  face- 
tiously questioned  by  the  French  King,  Francis  I,  who 
when  informed  of  the  decree  asked  some  one  to  show 
him  Adam's  will.  The  Pope's  right  to  grant  suze- 
rainty over  all  lands  not  ruled  by  Christian  princes 
was  not  universally  accepted  among  the  contempo- 
raries, even  by  high  churchmen.  But,  having  obtained 
the  Pope's  sanction,  King  Ferdinand  was  satisfied. 


208 


NOTES 


Sgs 

* 

0 

o 

o 

§ 

8 

0 

8 

0 

8 

8 

o 

8 

i 

o 

0 

8 

*J| 

0 

*• 

0 

~ 

S3 

S 

S 

-    B   „ 

*3   *-    bj 

0 

w^ 

0 

\^ 

0 

w^ 

0 

S 

0 

g 

0 

rC 

0 

j 

Sis 
w<j-J 

N 

"g 

0 

Jg 

m 

* 

^. 

pj/ 

£ 

c 

tn 

IX 

H 

C 

^ 

j 

VJ 

~ 

PQ 

"S 

o 

0 

vD 

•0 

a 

p^ 

S 

^ 

s 

•f 

^ 

s 

jj 

t] 

ri 

ri 

^ 

J 

n, 

1 

la 

^ 

"-* 

Q 

0 

6 

o 

O 

£ 

0 

1 

s 

6 

Q 

c 

* 

-* 

s 

S 

fr. 
O 

Date  of  C 

i 

oc 

i 

! 

i 

d 

u 

3 

r-" 
N 

S 

"a 

0. 

o 

o, 

55 

s 

B 

PC 

0 

of  Province 

o  Amaro 

Vicente 

Sul  or  Goy 

rito  Santo 

0 

1 

0 

8 

.a 

1 

S 
S 

1 

nambuco 

M< 
I 

S 

>rt 

a 

n 

jj 

g 

1 

c 

I 

e 

•B 

8 

I 

£ 

4 

£ 

» 

s 

>—  i 

X 

2 

O 

E 

n 

otS 

c 

O 

M 

,, 

i 

w 

3 

c 

3 

tx 

tn 

u 

U 

•c 

h 

s 

5 

a 

0 

0 

j 

o 

a 

c 

E 

•s 

4 

£ 

= 

e 

e 
o 

"S 

S 

1 

3 
0 

•S 

0 

3  de  Sou 

es  Couti 

I 

redo  Co 

ira  Cout 

I 

and  Ayr 

E 

de  And 

X 

•a 

c 

land  in 

j  Pero  Lopes  de 

Martim  Affoni 

Pero  Lopes  de 

Martim  AfFons 

Pedro  de  Goei 

Vasco  Fernand 

Pero  do  Camp 

Jorre  de  Fieue 

Francisco  Pert 

Dnarte  Coelho 

Pero  Lopes  de 

Joao  de  Barros 

Cardoso  de  Ba 

FernSo  Alvarei 

Joao  de  Barros 

"includes  the 

NOTES  209 

Almost  immediately  King  John  II.  of  Portugal  pro- 
tested. His  protest  has  given  rise  to  much  discussion 
as  to  whether  the  Portuguese  had  made  prior  dis- 
coveries in  the  New  World.  At  any  rate,  the  new 
decree  of  the  Pope  was  in  violation  of  the  older  de- 
crees of  Popes  Nicholas  and  Calixtus,  who  had  granted 
to  the  King  of  Portugal  the  suzerainty  of  the  lands 
to  the  south  and  southwest  of  Portugal  which  might 
be  discovered.  The  fact  that  both  the  Pope  and  the 
Kings  of  Spain  acquiesced  in  a  revision  of  the  decree 
which  placed  the  line  370  leagues  to  the  east  of  the 
Cape  Verde  Islands,  a  revision  which  was  agreed  to 
under  the  treaty  of  Tordesillas  in  1494,  leads  one  to 
believe  that  the  reasons  submitted  by  the  King  of 
Portugal  were  cogent.  Columbus  was  in  the  New 
World  on  his  second  voyage  when  the  treaty  of  Tor- 
desillas was  signed,  and  although  the  King  informed 
him  of  the  terms  of  the  treaty,  it  is  not  recorded  that 
Columbus  ever  acquiesced  or  consented  to  them. 

There  were  many  attempts  made  to  locate  the  Line 
of  Demarcation,  and  for  that  purpose  both  Spain  and 
Portugal  appointed  their  best  cosmographers  and 
geographers  to  sit  in  council  and  determine  the  method 
of  locating  the  Line.  There  was  a  difference  of  opin- 
ion as  to  the  number  of  leagues  to  a  degree.  This  dif- 
ference varied  from  sixteen  and  one-third  to  twenty 
and  one-half.  While  it  was  possible  for  the  navigators 
of  those  days  to  determine  latitude  with  a  fair  degree 
of  accuracy,  it  was  not  possible  for  them  to  do  so  for 
longitude.  The  method  of  determining  longitude  was 
not  known  until  the  invention  of  the  telescope  in  1666. 
There  were  several  joint  attempts  made  by  Spain  and 
Portugal  to  settle  the  dispute,  but  for  one  reason  or 


210  NOTES 

another  no  decision  was  reached.  Between  1511  and 
1521  the  Kings  of  both  countries  seemed  content  to  let 
the  matter  rest,  but  Fernao  Magalhaes'  circumnavi- 
gation of  the  world  in  1520  immediately  raised  the 
question  of  where  the  Line  should  run  in  the  eastern 
seas,  and  the  whole  debate  was  started  again  over  the 
question  of  whether  the  Molucca  Islands  should  be- 
long to  Portugal  or  to  Spain. 

After  a  considerable  discussion,  an  agreement 
was  reached  whereby  the  Portuguese  took  the  Islands 
and  paid  Spain  350,000  ducats  as  indemnity.  So  far 
as  Brazil  is  concerned,  the  Line  of  Demarcation  was 
never  actually  traced,  and  if  it  had  been  the  country 
would  not  have  more  than  one-third  its  present  area. 
The  discussion  about  it,  however,  did  serve  to  keep 
alive  border  warfare  between  the  Spanish  colonies  in 
the  La  Plata  River  basin  and  in  Venezuela,  and  later 
between  the  French  settlers  in  Guiana  and  the  Brazilian 
colonists,  and  the  final  decision  as  regards  the  boun- 
daries of  Brazil  was  not  reached  until  within  the  last 
fifty  years. 

28  It  is  my  intention  to  give  in  another  volume  of 
this  work  a  translation  of  a  Carta  Regia  da  Doagao  and 
a  Foral  creating  a  Captaincy. 

29  Frei  Vicente  de  Salvador  in  his  history  writ- 
ten in  1627  states  that  "the  Portuguese  were  losing  a 
great  opportunity  for  increasing  their  wealth,  because 
they  had  not  undertaken  to  explore  the  interior  of  the 
country,  but  were  content  to  live  along  the  sea-coast 
like  crabs." 

30  The  son  of  the  original  Pero  Lopez. 

31  The   meaning  of   this   word   Paranambuco   is 
thus  given  by  Dr.  Cabral  (Annaes  da  Bibliotheca  Na- 


NOTES  211 

cional  de  Rio  de  Janeiro.  Vol.  VIII,  p.  215)  :  The 
Indian  word  para  meaning  "river,"  parana  meaning 
"large  river,"  similar  to  a  sea,  plus  mbug,  equivalent 
to  pug  meaning  "to  burst  forth,"  puka-mbuka,  "burst- 
ing forth."  Hence,  Paranambuco,  "the  bursting  or 
flowing  out  of  the  great  river." 

32  The  Ouvidor   Geral  is  the  principal   judicial 
official  in  the  country.    It  is  difficult  always  to  distin- 
guish clearly  the  functions  corresponding  to  the  vari- 
ous officials.    Usually  we  find  the  same  official  exer- 
cising both  judicial  and  administrative  functions. 

33  The  Indians  rose  and   killed   Coutinho  about 
1547,  which  was  one  of  the  immediate  reasons  why  the 
King  of  Portugal  created  the  Captain-Generalcy  of 
the  whole  Province.    Father  Nobrega  says  that  when 
he  arrived  there  with  the  first  Captain-General,  Thome 
de  Sousa,  there  were  forty-five  colonists  in  the  town, 
survivors  of  the  twelve  years  of  effort  of  Coutinho. 

84  The  Portuguese  used  the  following  words: 
povoaqao  to  mean  "settlement"  or  "village;"  villa  to 
mean  "town,"  and  cidade  to  mean  "city."  The  villa 
had  its  own  government,  but  no  charter,  and  resembles 
in  its  structure  the  New  England  town.  The  cidade 
was  raised  to  that  rank  by  the  receipt  of  a  special  char- 
ter granted  by  the  King  or  the  chief  magistrate  of  the 
country  in  which  it  was  located.  In  this  charter  were 
stated  certain  rights  and  privileges,  exemption  from 
taxation,  etc.,  which  its  citizens  might  enjoy.  A  bishop 
might  not  reside  in  a  villa,  but  might  in  a  cidade.  It 
was,  therefore,  necessary  to  grant  the  charter  to  the 
city  of  Salvador  de  Todos  os  Sanctos  before  the  arrival 
of  the  first  Bishop  of  Brazil,  who  came  out  in  1551. 


212  NOTES 

85  Rio  de  Janeiro:  the  city  of  Sao  Sebastiao 
founded  January  18,  1567.  Prior  to  that  time,  it  had 
been  in  French  hands.  Mem  de  Sa  drove  out  a  colony 
of  Villegaignon  in  1560,  and  his  nephew,  Estacio  de 
Sa,  in  1566  drove  out  other  Frenchmen  who  had  re- 
established themselves.  Cabo  Frio  had  always  been  a 
feitoria. 

36  A  fathom  equals  ten  palmos;  a  palmo  equals 
21.92  centimetres;  a  fathom,  then,  equals  about  six 
and  one-half  feet.  This  is  the  rock  of  which  Nicolas 
Barre  (Copie  de  Quelques  Lettres}  says: 

"In  the  middle  of  the  afore-mentioned  entrance 
(which  is  about  one-half  a  league  wide)  there  is  a  rock 
one  hundred  feet  long  and  sixty  wide,  on  which  M.  de 
Villegaignon  built  a  wooden  fort,  placing  there  a  por- 
tion of  his  artillery  to  prevent  the  enemy's  causing  him 
damage.  This  river  is  so  spacious  that  all  the  ships 
in  the  world  could  arrive  there  and  rest  safely  at 
anchor.  It  is  covered  with  fields  and  beautiful  islands 
always  clothed  with  green  woods.  On  one  of  them 
(which  is  within  cannon  range  of  the  one  he  has  for- 
tified) he  has  put  the  rest  of  his  artillery  and  estab- 
lished all  his  people." 

87  Martim  Affonso  received  promise  of  a  gift  of 
land  in  a  letter  from  the  King  of  November  20,  1530; 
but  the  choice  of  it  was  left  open.    He  was  to  make  a 
settlement  for  the  King  where  it  seemed  to  him  best, 
and  choose  his  land  later.     Finally  the  gift  of   Sao 
Vicente  was  confirmed  by  a  Foral  dated  October  6, 
1534. 

88  The  oldest  "city"  in  Brazil.     The  evidence  re- 
cently brought  forward  by  Medina  (Toribio  Medina 
— Nunes  de  Balboa.      Santiago,    1912)    shows    that 


NOTES  213 

there  was  a  town  in  Sao  Vicente  in  1529,  and  probably 
earlier.  In  all  likelihood  there  had  been  a  feitoria  at 
every  point  along  the  coast  where  the  first  settlements 
in  the  Captaincies  were  started. 

39  From  the  date  of  the  discovery  on,  the  French 
had  been  making  illegal  trading  voyages  to  the  coast 
of  Brazil.     As  the  Portuguese  population  increased, 
armed  force  was  resorted  to  to  prevent  their  coming, 
and   French  vessels  acted  as   pirate  ships  and  were 
treated  as  such.     A   few  years  after  the  period   in 
which  Magalhaes  wrote  his  history,  the  entire  coast 
of  Brazil  suffered  from  the  inroads  of  English,  as  well 
as  French,  pirates. 

40  Magalhaes  is  mistaken  in  this  statement.     The 
original  grantees  received  their  Captaincies  from  and 
owed  allegiance  to  no  one  but  the  King.     Twelve  or 
fifteen  years  of  experience  showed  that  this   system 
of  independent  governments  was  not  working  success- 
fully, because  of  the  lack  of  co-ordination  in  meeting 
the  resistance  which  the  Indians  offered  to  them,  as 
well  as  the  threats  of  the  French  to  found  colonies  in 
Brazil,  as  reported  to  the  Portuguese  King  through  his 
ambassador     at     Paris.      The    Captain-Generalcy    of 
Brazil  was  created  by  royal  act  on  January  7,  1549. 
By  this  act  the  King  withdrew  many  privileges  which 
he  had  formerly  granted  to  the  Captains,  but  he  in- 
creased tremendously   the   development   and   the   effi- 
ciency of  the  colony. 

41  The  government  of  Brazil  was  divided  into  two 
districts  by  royal  decree,  December  10,  1572,  and  was 
re-established  into  one  by  royal  decree  on  April  12, 
1577. 


214  NOTES 

42  The  mud  huts  of  South  America  were  usually 
made  of  wattle  with  the  interstices  filled  with  clay. 
In  this  respect  they  differed  from  the  adobes  of  Mexico 
and  the  Southwest  of  the  United  States,  which  are 
usually  made  of  bricks  of  clay  sun-baked,  cemented 
together  with  clay  of  the  same  nature,  moistened. 

43  These  allotments  were  granted  under  an  instru- 
ment called  sesmaria,  in  which  the  boundaries  of  the 
land  and  the  rights  of  the  cultivator  were  set  forth. 
In  Brazil  they  corresponded  almost  to  the  deeds  of  the 
same  period  in  England. 

44  There  is  little  doubt  that  slavery  was  the  major 
factor  which  caused  all  of  the  excesses  committed  in 
Brazil  for  the  next  two  centuries.     In    1550   Father 
Nobrega  wrote  as  follows: 

"In  this  country  the  majority  of  the  inhabitants 
have  their  consciences  heavily  weighted  down  because 
of  the  slaves  whom  they  hold  unjustly,  besides  the 
many  slaves  who  were  purchased  from  their  fathers 
and  whom  the  inhabitants  will  not  free,  but,  on  the 
contrary,  have  made  slaves  of  by  the  treachery  which 
they  employ  against  them ;  and  for  this  reason  few  of 
them  can  be  absolved,  for  they  do  not  wish  to  abstain 
from  such  a  sin,  nor  to  purchase  them,  although  in  this 
I  blame  them  greatly,  saying  that  the  father  has  not 
the  right  to  sell  his  son,  except  in  extreme  necessity, 
as  is  allowed  by  the  imperial  laws ;  and  in  this  opinion 
I  have  against  me  the  population  and  also  the  con- 
fessors in  the  country;  and  thus  Satan  has  all  these 
souls  in  his  power  in  such  a  way  that  it  is  very  diffi- 
cult to  deliver  them  from  these  abuses,  because  the 
men  who  come  out  here  find  no  other  means  of  liveli- 
hood than  by  the  work  of  their  slaves,  who  fish  and 


NOTES  215 

hunt  food  for  them,  and  slothfulness  rules  them  to  such 
a  degree,  and  they  are  so  given  up  to  sensuality  and 
various  vicious  habits,  that  they  are  not  disturbed  at 
being  excommunicated,  provided  they  keep  the  slaves." 
(Cartas  do  Bresil,  p.  79.) 

45  There  are  many  varieties  of  manioc  known  in 
Brazil,  but  the  one  most  used  is  manihota  utilissima. 
It  has  generally  been  considered  that  this  plant  and  its 
use  were  indigenous  to  America.  Professor  Wiener, 
however  (Africa  and  the  Discovery  of  America. 
Philadelphia,  1920),  shows  that  the  words  used  by  the 
natives  of  America  for  the  plant  are  nearly  all  of  Afri- 
can origin,  and  suggests  that  there  might  have  been 
pre-Columbian  contact  between  Africa  and  South 
America.  There  is  a  long  and  detailed  account  of  the 
planting  and  raising  and  the  preparation  of  this  plant 
for  food  purposes  in  Las  Casas — Apologetica  Historia 
de  Las  Indias  (p.  28  ff).  All  the  early  authors  refer 
to  manioc  and  maize  as  the  principal  vegetable  food- 
stuffs of  the  natives  of  the  New  World.  Nicolas 
Barre  says : 

"The  land  produces  only  millet  which  they  call  in 
our  country  bled  sarrazin,  with  which  they  make  a  wine 
together  with  a  root  which  they  call  maniel  which  has 
a  leaf  like  the  paeonia  mas;  and  I  thought  truly  that 
it  was  this.  It  grows  like  a  tree  of  the  height  of  san- 
bucus.  Of  it  they  make  a  soft  flour  which  is  just  as 
good  as  bread." 

48  It  seems  to  me  this  is  an  error,  and  that  the 
author  meant  thirty  months. 

47  The  translation  of  popular  food  names  is  most 
difficult,  for  there  are  no  exact  equivalents  in  foreign 
languages.  The  beijus  were  a  kind  of  cake  made  of  the 


216  NOTES 

manioc  flour  in  South  America  and  are  described  in 
Gabriel  Scares  de  Sousa's  Tratado  Descriptivo.  Obrea 
means  "wafer,"  and  the  nearest  English  equivalent  to 
filhos  is  "pancake."  Many  of  the  modern  tribes  of 
Brazil  use  a  three-legged  pottery  vessel  with  a  slightly 
concave  top  eighteen  inches  or  so  in  diameter,  the  legs 
of  which  are  about  a  foot  long,  in  which  they  cook 
their  manioc  paste  over  an  open  fire,  spreading  the 
paste  thinly  over  the  entire  surface  of  the  vessel  as  on 
a  griddle.  I  have  seen  the  same  process  on  a  flat  soap- 
stone  griddle  among  the  Hopi  and  Navajo  Indians  in 
the  Southwest;  only  in  that  area  the  paste  is  made  of 
ground  corn  and  water. 

48  Here  again  the  modern  Portuguese  and  the  old 
Portuguese  give  several  meanings  for  the  word.     It 
means  a  cake  made  in  a  loaf  like  pound  cake.     It  is 
applied  also  to  the  thin  round  loaves  of  bread  which 
are  cooked  in  the  mouth  of  a  brick  oven  used  by  the 
peasants  in  Portugal  while  the  oven  is   cooling  off 
sufficiently  to  put  the  batch  of  loaves  in  the  interior 
and  close  the  mouth.     These   bolos,  quickly  cooked 
this  way,  are  meant  to  be  eaten  at  once,  as  are  tea  bis- 
cuits or  any  of  the  other  hot  breads  which  are  served 
so  extensively  in  the  southern  portion  of  the  United 
States. 

49  Oviedo    (Sumario    de    la   Natural   y    General 
Istoria  de  las   Indias.     Toledo,    1526.      Fol.    xiv   a) 
states  that  the  introduction  of  bananas  into  the  Antilles 
took  place  in  1516. 

60  Piso  (G.  Piso  and  G.  Marcgraf — Historia 
Naturalis  Brasiliae.  Amsterdam,  1648)  describes  two 
or  three  species  of  the  tree,  and  states  that  the  Tapuyas, 
one  of  the  Indian  tribes,  used  the  shells  for  drinking 


NOTES  217 

cups  and  as  other  containers,  that  the  shredded  bark 
was  used  for  caulking  boats,  and  that  the  excessive 
use  of  the  nut  caused  the  hair  to  fall  out. 

51  There  is  a  typographical  error  in  the  text;  the 
initial  letter  should  be  t  and  not  g. 

52  Although  Piso  and  Barre  agree  on  the  pleasant 
taste  and  odour  of  the  fruit,  they  both  state  that  it 
is  indigestible. 

53  Pero  repinaldo  is  the  name  for  a  variety  of 
apple  which  is  very  long  and  slightly  concave  on  the 
sides.    The  word  for  "pear"  is  applied  to  it  on  account 
of  the  old  botanical  error  of  classifying  both  apples  and 
pears  under  the  genus  pirus. 

54  Piso  considered  the  cashew  and  its  tree  one  of 
the  most  valuable  products  of  Brazil,  the  wood  being 
among  the  best,  the  fruit  delicious  for  eating,  and  the 
oil  and  rind  of  the  nut  useful  for  medicinal  purposes. 
The  rind  of  the  nut  in  particular  was  useful  for  poul- 
tices for  application  to    ulcers    caused    by    the    small 
worms  (niguas)   that    entered    the    skin,    under    the 
finger  nails  especially,  which  were  one  of  the  greatest 
pests  of  all  tropical  America. 

56  Piso  relates  that  the  monkeys  spent  much  time 
in  the  branches  of  these  trees,  and  that  the  trees  when 
tapped  in  the  full  moon  would  yield  in  three  hours 
about  twelve  pounds  of  sap.  He  also  enumerates  many 
medicinal  uses. 

00  The  balsam  obtained  from  the  caborahiba 
comes  from  the  bark  rather  than  from  the  interior  of 
the  tree,  and  is  used  by  the  inhabitants  for  the  bites  of 
animals  and  poisonous  insects.  Frei  Vicente  de  Salva- 
dor (Annaes  da  Bibliotheca  National.  Vol.  18,  p.  13) 


218  NOTES 

relates:  "that  the  high  pontiff  has  declared  that  the 
balsam  of  the  caborahiba  tree  is  legal  substance  for  su- 
preme unction  and  chrism  and,  as  such,  it  is  mixed 
up  and  consecrated,  as  sacred  oil  when  that  of  Persia 
is  lacking." 

57  Obira  paramaqaci,  "wood  for  ills:"  I  have  made 
diligent  search  to  identify  this  tree  or  shrub,  but  so  far 
without  success.    Dr.  A.  Hamilton  Rice  suggests  that 
it  is  the  plant  used  by  natives  to  poison  fish  in  streams. 

58  It  should  be  noted  that  none  of  the  earliest  ac- 
counts of  Brazil  describes  the  tobacco  plant,  although 
there  are  a  few  references  to  it  as  used  by  the  natives 
for  ceremonial  purposes  about  1530-50. 

69  Bicho  is  used  by  the  Portuguese  to  indicate  any 
animal  or  insect  lower  than  a  quadruped.  It  is  also 
used  to  designate  small  quadrupeds  which  are  annoy- 
ing to  mankind,  such  as  rats  and  mice. 

60  The  importance  of  the  assistance  rendered  by 
horses  in  the  conquest  of  Spanish  America  appears  to 
be  entirely  unknown  in  the  early  accounts  of  Brazil. 
The  Indians  had  great  fear  of  horses,  and  the  Spanish 
conquistador ~es  taking  advantage  of  this  fear  told  them 
that  their  horses  were  gods  and  capable  of  all  sorts  of 
remarkable  feats.     Every  one  of  the  early  relations 
speaks  of  the  horse  as  being  the  most  important  and 
valuable  part  of  the  expedition.    The  raising  of  horses 
in  Brazil  seems  to  have  been  only  a  commercial  propo- 
sition in  the  XVI  century. 

61  The  peccary,  the  animal  "with  the  navel  on  the 
back,"  is  described  many  times  in  the  XVI  century 
literature  relating  to  America.     These  animals  were 
called  by  the  first  Spanish  travellers  puercos  monteses, 


NOTES  219 

and  the  object  which  the  early  observers  took  to  be 
the  navel  is  only  a  gland  giving  forth  a  disagreeable 
odour,  which  had  to  be  removed  immediately  after 
killing  to  prevent  the  contamination  of  the  flesh.  This 
gland  serves  the  same  purpose  with  these  animals  as 
the  musk  glands  of  the  musk  rat  and  the  musk  ox,  and 
the  odour  glands  of  the  goat. 

62  Capivara,  the  largest  known  rodent. 

63  Also  called  aguti. 

6*  There  is  another  version  of  this  story  in  An- 
chieta's  Latin  Letter  of  1560.  In  this,  the  tree  up  which 
the  Indian  climbed  stood  near  a  muddy  pool.  When 
the  Indian  fell  he  became  imbedded  in  the  mud,  but 
the  tiger  was  so  insistent  upon  obtaining  his  prey  that 
he  too  became  caught  in  the  mud,  and  in  the  morning 
when  the  Indians  came  back  he  and  his  victim  had  been 
suffocated  in  the  mud. 

65  Both  Piso  and  Anchieta  state  that  this  animal 
smells  very  badly.     Piso  adds  that  the  tail  dried  and 
triturated  is  used  by  the  inhabitants  of  America  for 
medicinal  purposes. 

66  The  Brazilians  called  it  alg  or  ai. 

67  This  was  the  variety  most  sought  for  exports. 
Pigafetta  mentions  them.     "There  are  also  a  variety 
of   monkeys   very   beautiful   to    see,    of    a   yellowish 
colour,  which  resemble  little  lions."     Several  of  them 
are  mentioned  in  the  cargo  of  the  ship  Bretoa,  1511. 

68  This  is  undoubtedly  the  snake  called  by  the 
natives  sucuryuba,  or  tapiiara,  about  which  Anchieta 
(Latin  Letter)  relates  the  following: 

"These  snakes,   they   say,   will   swallow  certain 
large  animals  and  are  called  by  the  Indians  tapiiara 


220  NOTES 

*  *  *  then,  as  their  stomach  is  not  able  to  digest 
it,  they  lie  on  the  ground  as  though  dead,  without 
being  able  to  move,  until  the  belly  decays  at  the  same 
time  as  the  meal.  Then  the  birds  of  prey  tear  out  the 
stomach  and  eat  it  with  its  contents,  after  which  the 
snake  much  disfigured  and  half  devoured  begins  to 
take  shape  again,  new  flesh  grows  and  skin  extends 
over  it,  and  it  comes  back  to  its  former  appearance." 

69  Anchieta  (Latin  Letter)   calls  these  jararacas 
and  says  that  they  are  encountered  everywhere,  even 
in    the    houses.      Although    these    snakes    are    very 
poisonous,  Anchieta  says  there  is  a  remedy  against 
their  poison  which  is  sometimes  successful;  and  the 
Indians  say  that,  if  a  man  once  escapes  death,  he  can 
be  bitten  in  the  future  any  number  of  times  without 
running  the  risk  of  his  life,  and  actually  the  man  bit- 
ten feels  less  pain  than  at  the  time  of  the  first  bite. 

70  Las    Casas     (Apologetica    Historia    Sumaria. 
Madrid,  1909,  p.  27),  says  "although  this  odour  is  very 
sweet,  it  is  so  penetrating  that  it  becomes  nauseating, 
taking  away  all  desire  for  food.     At  the  present  time 
I  have  some  of  it  which  has  been  in  my  possession 
more  than  sixteen  years,  and  is  as  strong  today  as 
though  it  had  just  been  obtained." 

It  is  not  the   testes   which   are   meant,   but   the 
musk  glands  located  near  the  cloaca. 

71  According  to  Piso,  the  skin  is  in  three  layers. 
But  the  writer's  intent  seemed  to  be  to  describe  the 
three  separate  folds  of  meat  which  in  a  roast  fowl 
would  naturally  appear  distinct.    To  any  one  who  has 
carved  the  breast  of  a  roast  turkey  the  meaning  will 
be  clear. 


NOTES  221 

72  According  to  Piso,  one  of  the  pheasant  species 
a  little  smaller  than  a  hen,  which  took  its  name  from 
its  peculiar  cry,  iacu,  iacu. 

73  Probably  a  species  of  wild  mallard  duck. 

7*  The  variety  of  parrots  from  Brazil  is  infinite, 
and  it  is  hardly  within  the  limit  of  this  book  to  iden- 
tify the  various  species  in  modern  terms.  Magalhaes' 
descriptions  are  scarcely  sufficient  to  enable  one  to  be 
scientifically  accurate  in  all  cases.  However,  here  are 
submitted  a  few  of  them:  Tupi  camindes,  called  by 
the  Portuguese  arara  vermelho,  (L)  "macrocercus ;" 
araras,  "macrocercus  macao;"  coricas,  "Psittachus 
aestivus;"  tuyns,  "Psittachus  Conurus;"  marcandos, 
"Psittachus  Illigeri." 

75  Hans  Staden,  in  his  Captivity  (p.  54),  says: 
"And  a  peculiarity  of  the  said  birds  Uwara  is  that 

when  they  are  young  the  first  feathers  which  they  grow 
are  whitish  gray,  the  next,  however,  when  they  become 
fledged  are  of  a  blackish  gray,  and  with  these  they 
fly  about  a  year.  After  which  they  become  as  red  as 
any  red  paint." 

76  Anchieta,  in  his  Latin  Letter,  calls  them  anhima. 
Piso  states  that  they  are  like  the  turtle-dove  in  this 
respect,  that  when  one  of  them  dies  the  mate  grieves 
to  death  over  its  companion. 

77  According     to     Piso    the    native    name    was 
nhandu-guagu.     He  says  that  they  are  much  praised 
as  food  by  the  inhabitants;  that  they  are  similar  in 
habits  to  the  ostrich,  but  their  feathers  are  not  so  fine. 
It  is  the  Emu  or  Rhea  Americana. 

78  Thevet  (France  Antarctic  que}  relates  how  the 
natives  used  the  leather  of  the  manatee  for  shields  and 


222  NOTES 

foot  wear  and  how  they  sought  a  stone  in  its  head 
which  cured  the  owner  of  calculus,  how  the  natives 
rendered  much  oil  from  them  with  which  the  African 
negroes  used  to  rub  their  bodies,  and  how  a  Spaniard 
had  taken  one  back  to  Spain  where  it  lived  thirty  years 
in  a  tank,  and  became  so  tame  it  would  eat  out  of  his 
hand.  Anchieta  (Latin  Letter)  says  the  native  name 
was  iguaragua. 

79  The  arroba  equals  about  32  pounds. 

80  Tamoatds,  called  in  Portuguese  peixe  do  matto, 
"forest  fish,"  or  soldado,  "soldier." 

81  This  is  a  fish  very  much  resembling  the  catfish, 
except  that  it  has  not  the  poisonous  spikes  and  the 
long  whiskers. 

82  Pero  Lopez  in    1532,   on   his   way   home,    en- 
countered so  many  whales  in  the  district  near  Rio  de 
Janeiro  that  he   says:    "they    (the   whales)    were    so 
large  and  so  numerous  in  this  locality  and  came  so 
close  to  the  ships  that  we  were  in  great  fear  of  them." 

83  Wiener  has  related  in  his  article  on  the  remora 
(Leo   Wiener — Once  More   the   Sucking-Fish.     The 
American  Naturalist.    Vol.  LV.    March- April,  1921) 
that  in  the  X  century  the  Arabs  used  to  hunt  whale 
with  the  sucking-fish  in  the  Indian  Ocean  to  get  am- 
bergris. 

84  I  have  not  been  able  to  find  a  correct  interpre- 
tation of  balso.    I  have  been  informed  that  this  is  the 
name  which  in  Portugal  is  given  to  a  plant  that  yields 
a  thick  gummy  juice  often  used  for  covering  wounds. 

85  Nobrega  (Cartas  do  Brazil)   relates  the  same 
facts  about  the  wealth  derived  from  the  trade  in  am- 
bergris, and  Cardim  (Narrativa  Epistolar)  mentions  a 


NOTES  223 

man  who  had  gathered  in  one  year  ambergris  to  the 
value  of  eight  thousand  crusados. 

86  I  have  met  the  account  of  this  marine  monster 
in  only  one  other  place,  namely,  in  the  History  of 
Vicente  de  Salvador,  in   1627,  where,  apparently,  it 
had  been  copied  from  Magalhaes. 

87  The  identity  of  this  animal,  if  the  incident  re- 
lated ever  did  occur,  is  problematical.    Young  Baltasar 
Ferreira  may  have  had  an  encounter  with  a  walrus  or 
a  sea-elephant,  or  some  similar  animal.     Anchieta,  in 
his  Latin  Letter,  mentions  a  "spirit"  which  the  natives 
called  Igpupiara;  that  is,  "he  who  dwells  in  the  water ;" 
and  he  adds  that  it  kills  the  Indians.    He  says : 

"Not  far  from  us  there  is  a  river  settled  by  the 
Christians,  and  which  formerly  the  Indians  used  to 
cross  in  their  small  canoes  which  they  make  of  the 
bark  of  a  single  tree  trunk,  and  where  very  often  they 
were  drowned  by  devils  before  the  Christians  came  to 
that  point." 

In  those  days,  however,  much  credence  was  placed 
in  the  existence  of  marine  monsters.  Thevet  relates : 

"I  do  not  wish  to  overlook  the  fact  that  it  was  told 
to  me  as  having  been  seen  near  the  Castle  of  Mina 
that  there  was  a  marine  monster  of  the  form  of  a  man, 
which  the  tide  had  thrown  up  on  the  beach.  And  that 
there  was  heard  also  the  female  who  returning  with 
the  tide  criea  aloud  and  grieved  at  the  absence  of  her 
mate,  a  thing  which  is  worthy  of  much  admiration." 

It  will  be  recalled  that  Columbus  gravely  asserts 
that  he  saw  sirens  during  his  first  voyage  to  America. 

88  Vaz  Caminha  says:  "Their  appearance  is  dark 
brown,  somewhat  reddish.    They  have  shapely  faces, 


224  NOTES 

shapely  noses,  and  shapely  figures,  and  they  go  naked." 

89  The  reader  is  referred  to  Gabriel  Scares  de 
Sousa    (Tratado   Descriptivo.     Chap.   CLVI)    for   a 
description  of  the  vices  and  sensuality  of  the  Tupin- 
nambas.    One  may  recall  that  the  earliest  accounts  of 
the  natives  of  this  continent  accused  them  of  sodomy. 
A  large  portion  of  Las  Casas'  defense  of  the  Indians 
was  to  show  that  this  charge  was  unfounded. 

90  Burial  in  a  sitting  posture  is  a  common  habit 
among  primitive  peoples,  and  the  custom  of  placing 
articles  of  daily  use  and  food  in  the  grave  or  on  the 
grave  is  so  wide-spread  that  it  needs  no  comment.    A 
reading  of  the    literature   of    the    ancient    Egyptians 
gives  one  the  best  idea  of  the  primitive  psychology 
underlying  these  customs. 

91  Nicolas  Barre  says:  "In  each  village  he  who 
has  been  the  most  valiant,  that  is  to  say,  he  who  has 
captured  and  killed  the  most  prisoners,  is  by  them  ap- 
pointed their  king.  *  *  *" 

92  Nobrega  relates  that  a  father  before  bestowing 
his  daughter  in  marriage  exacts  a  certain  amount  of 
labour  from  the  suitor.    He  does  not  state  the  term  of 
service. 

93  It  may  have   been    that    Orellana    during   his 
descent  of  the   Amazon    encountered    some   of    these 
women,  either  fighting  in  the  ranks  with  the  men,  or 
in  sufficient  number  by  themselves  to  be  noticed.    Hav- 
ing in  mind  the  stories  of  the  Amazons  of  antiquity, 
he  did  not  hesitate  to  give  the  same  name  to  the  native 
Brazilian  women  whom  he  encountered,  and  to  call 
the  river  the  "River  of  the  Amazons." 


NOTES  225 

04  The  origin  of  the  custom  of  the  couvade  (from 
French  "couver,"  to  brood)  is  lost  in  antiquity.  The 
early  Roman  historians  mention  its  prevalence  among 
many  of  the  so-called  barbarous  tribes,  and  since  then 
it  has  been  noted  by  travellers  and  explorers  in  nearly 
every  part  of  the  world.  In  the  so-called  civilized 
countries  of  today  it  appears  only  in  survivals  in  folk- 
lore. The  custom  has  been  observed  especially  among 
the  natives  of  Guiana,  as  well  as  in  other  parts  of 
South  America  and  in  North  America,  and  extensive 
accounts  are  readily  accessible  (Brett — The  Indian 
Tribes  of  Guiana:  their  Condition  and  Habits.  London, 
1868.  Lafitau — Moeurs  des  Sauvages  Ameriquains. 
Paris,  1724).  It  is  believed  the  custom  began  early  in 
tribal  development  during  the  period  of  change  from 
matriarchal  descent  to  patriarchal  descent,  when  the 
ceremony  was  tantamount  to  formal  acknowledgment 
of  the  paternity  of  the  child  on  the  part  of  the  father, 
and  the  acceptance  of  the  child  as  his  ward,  to  be 
properly  brought  up  by  him  and  instructed  in  tribal 
matters.  The  ceremony  was  usually  accompanied  by 
numerous  taboos,  abstention  from  animal  food,  so  that 
the  child  might  not  acquire  the  characteristics  of  the 
animals  eaten,  and  so  on. 

95  Cardim  relates   that    "the    Indians    are   accus- 
tomed to  have  a  fire  day  and  night,  summer  and  win- 
ter, because  fire  is  their  clothing  and  they  are  very 
miserable  without  fire." 

96  The  origin  of    the   word    "canoe,"    which    for 
many  years  was  considered  aboriginal  American,  is  so 
interesting  that  it  is  worth  while  to  recall  it  at  this  time. 
This  ghost  word  probably  resulted  from  the  careless- 


226  NOTES 

ness  of  a  XV  century  scribe,  who  while  transcribing 
a  MS.  of  Columbus's  Latin  Letter  misread  "scapha," 
the  Latin  word  for  "small  boat,"  as  "canoa,"  because 
of  the  similarity  in  appearance.  The  word  not  being 
understood  was  not  translatable  and  was  adopted  to 
indicate  boats  of  the  American  aborigines.  Subsequent 
travellers  to  America  introduced  it  among  the  Ameri- 
can aborigines.  The  word  became  popular  and  spread 
rapidly  over  North  and  South  America  in  those  re- 
gions where  there  was  Spanish  or  Portuguese  contact ; 
and  here  it  was  noted  by  later  explorers. 

97  This  is    equivalent    to     the    English    proverb 
"Take  the  will  for  the  deed." 

98  There  was  no  other  custom  of  the  natives  of 
Brazil  which  so  impressed  the  Portuguese  as  the  cus- 
tom of  anthropophagy,  or  cannibalism.     There  are, 
however,  people  who  hold  the  opinion  that  the  early 
accounts  are  quite  exaggerated,  and  that  the  use  of 
the  custom  was   very   slight,    if   not   entirely   absent. 
Pigafetta  relates  the  following  legend  about  the  origin 
of  this  custom  in  Brazil : 

"They  eat  human  flesh,  but  only  that  of  their 
enemies,  not  doing  it  habitually,  nor  because  that  flesh 
seems  of  superior  quality  to  others.  The  custom 
originated  in  the  following  tradition:  An  old  woman 
had  an  only  son  who  was  killed  in  combat  by  the 
enemies  of  his  country.  The  war  continued,  and 
shortly  afterwards  they  took  prisoner  the  man  who  had 
killed  the  young  man,  and  led  him  before  the  mother. 
She,  in  an  access  of  fury,  snapped  at  him  like  a  mad 
dog,  and  bit  him.  Later  on,  the  prisoner  succeeded 
in  fleeing,  and  having  come  up  with  his  own  people  he 
told  them  that  the  enemies  had  wished  to  eat  him  alive, 


NOTES  227 

and  showed  them  as  proof  the  tooth  marks  which  he 
had  on  his  shoulders.  From  that  time  on,  the  inhabi- 
tants of  that  district  began  to  eat  in  earnest  the  enemies 
which  they  took  prisoner,  who  in  their  turn  followed 
the  same  example." 

The  practice  of  cannibalism  has  been  noted  among 
nearly  all  peoples  at  some  time  or  other  during  their 
development.  The  underlying  idea  seems  to  be  that 
he  who  eats  the  flesh  of  an  enemy  gains  the  courage 
of  his  enemy  and  waxes  braver  than  before.  Hence, 
certain  parts  of  the  body  were  especially  sought,  the 
heart  for  instance,  as  it  was  considered  the  seat  of 
courage.  It  is  rarely  found  that  human  flesh  was 
eaten  because  of  a  fondness  for  its  flavour,  but  often 
in  times  of  scant  food  supply  it  was  indulged  in  faute 
de  mieux. 

99  In  an  unpublished  MS.  of  1570,  in  my  posses- 
sion, written  by  one  Pero  Lopez,  there  is  an  account  of 
the  Spaniards'  going  into  one  of  the  Indian  houses  in  a 
district  now  within  the  territory  of  the  State  of  Ecua- 
dor, and  finding  there  longuinazas,  smoked  meat  which 
a  vaquiano  (an  experienced  warrior)  told  them  was 
made  of  human  flesh. 

100  The  following  story  is  related  of  Jeronymo 
Albuquerque:  After  he  had  been  captured  in  war  with 
the  Indians  in  Pernambuco,  January  2,  1548,  his  life 
was  saved  by  the  daughter  of  the  chief,  who  became 
enamoured  of  him.     She  not  only  saved  his  life,  but 
was  the   medium   by   which    friendly   relations    were 
established  between   natives   and    Portuguese.      It   is 
a  story  very  similar  to  the  tale  of  Captain  Rolfe  and 
Pocahontas.     There  are  other  instances  in  the  litera- 
ture of  the  period. 


228  NOTES 

101  There  is  in  existence  a  great  number  of  ac- 
counts of    the   ceremony   of    eating   human    flesh   in 
Brazil,  substantially  the  same,  but  varying  in  the  de- 
tails.    The  earliest  one  I  have  come  on  is  that  con- 
tained in  the  letter  of  Luis  Ramirez,  written  from  Rio 
de  la  Plata,    July    10,    1528.      Next,   the   account   in 
Santongeois'   Cosmo  graphic,   1544;  then,   Father  An- 
chieta    (Letter),    1554;    Nicolas    Barre     (Copie    de 
Quelques  Lettres),  1556;  Antonio  Blasquez  (Letter}, 
1557;  Thevet  (France  Antarcticque) ,  1558.    It  would 
seem  from  Blasquez's  letter  that  he  was  an  eye-witness 
to  the  event.     Allusions  to  eating  human  flesh  occur 
very  much  earlier,  even  in  Columbus's  accounts  of  his 
voyages. 

102  Nicolas  Barre  says:  "I  believe  (if  God  does 
not  take  pity  on  them)   that  it  will  be  very  difficult 
to  reduce  them  to  Christianity,  and  only  with  hard 
labour  may  one  take  away  from  them  the  pitiable  habit 
of  eating  one  another." 

103  The  meaning  of  Magalhaes  is  this:  The  evil 
habits  and  manners  of  the  Portuguese  among  them- 
selves, especially  in  their  relations  with  the  Indians, 
not  only  placed  the  Portuguese  in  a  serious  position 
with  their  confessors,  but  also  set  a  very  bad  example 
to  the  Indians  whom  the  Jesuits  were  trying  to  con- 
vert.    The  Indians  "appreciate  our  clothes,  our  arms, 
and  everything  which  comes  from  our  country,  despis- 
ing gold,  silver  and    all    precious    stones    which    we 
esteem  greatly."     (Nicolas  Barre — Copie  de  Quelques 
Lettres.) 

Magalhaes  has  already  stated  that  the  road  to 
wealth  in  Brazil  was  the  possession  of  slaves.    If  they 


NOTES  229 

could  not  do  with  their  slaves  as  they  pleased,  they 
could  not  become  rich.  Hence  the  opposition  between 
the  Jesuits  and  the  colonists.  The  contention  between 
them  dealt  chiefly  with  the  method  of  acquiring 
slaves.  It  would  seem  that  the  most  humane  of  the 
Captains  obtained  their  first  slaves  by  offering  them 
articles  of  European  manufacture  in  exchange  for 
their  services  for  a  given  length  of  time.  The  word 
constantly  used  in  the  Portuguese  is  resgate,  which 
means  "ransom ;"  but  when  a  sufficient  number  of 
slaves  could  not  be  obtained  in  this  way  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  the  colonists,  they  sent  out  expedi- 
tions to  capture  others  and  made  treaties  with  one 
tribe  of  natives  whereby  they  would  purchase  from 
them  as  many  prisoners  as  they  could  bring  in.  This 
was  the  method  the  Portuguese  had  been  pursuing  in 
Africa  for  one  hundred  years.  At  no  time  had  the 
enslavement  of  the  Indians  been  specifically  authorized 
by  the  Portuguese  monarch,  although  it  was  tolerated 
until  later  than  the  year  1570.  In  the  case  of  one 
tribe,  the  Caete,  who  had  killed  and  eaten  the  first 
bishop  of  Brazil,  a  decree  was  issued  placing  them  in 
perpetual  slavery,  an  edict  which  was  not  capable  of 
enforcement  because  there  were  many  Indians  of  this 
tribe  living  peacefully  in  Jesuit  villages  near  the  set- 
tlements of  the  colonists.  Upon  the  representation  of 
the  Jesuits,  this  edict  was  nullified.  During  the  year 
of  great  pestilence,  1563,  many  Indians  preferred  to 
sell  themselves  into  slavery,  rather  than  starve  to 
death.  It  is  to  be  supposed  that  the  Portuguese  colon- 
ists succeeded  in  inducing  many  Indians  to  become 
slaves  for  a  term  of  years  on  agreement  of  giving 
them  freedom,  either  after  a  certain  amount  of  labour 


230  NOTES 

had  been  accomplished,  or  a  certain  time  served;  then 
when  the  period  was  up  they  refused  to  fulfill  their 
promise.  The  rights  of  the  Indians  and  of  the 
colonists  in  regard  to  the  enslavement  of  the  Indians 
are  confused,  and  all  that  can  be  gleaned  for  certain 
from  the  contemporary  accounts  is  that  the  Portuguese 
colonists  desired  to  exploit  unscrupulously  all  Indian 
or  negro  labour  and  that  the  Jesuits  were  opposed 
both  on  moral  grounds  and  on  the  grounds  of  right 
and  justice. 

104  I  have  seen  a  very  large  emerald,  over  two 
inches  long  and  an  inch  in  diameter,  with  twelve  sides, 
which  was  similar  in  appearance  to  those  Magalhaes 
describes;  although  the  facets  were  not  polished,  they 
were  as  flat  and  accurately  shaped  as  though  they  had 
been  mechanically  cut. 

105  The  word  estadio  means  "the  height  of  a  man," 
or  a  fathom.     The  word  also  means   125  geometric 
paces,  as  in  the  ancient  Greek. 

106  The  author  of  this  introduction  was  probably 
Jose  Maria  Dantas  Pereira,  secretary  of  the  Academia 
Real  das  Sciencias  of  Lisbon  at  the  time  the  Tratado 
was  printed. 

107  The  free  Indians  were  those  Indians  who  lived 
in  villages  under  the  protection  of  the  Jesuits,  who 
prevented  the  use  of  them  as  slaves  by  the  Portuguese. 

108  When  the  owner  of  a  Captaincy  did  not  wish 
to  take  personal  charge  of  the  administration  of  his 
property,  he  appointed  a  Captain,  logartenente,  who 
acted  as  his  agent  and  performed  the  greater  part  of 
the  functions    permitted    the    Captain.      He    was,    of 
course,  recallable  at  will. 


NOTES  231 

109  The  author  probably  refers  to  the  capture  of 
Rio  de  Janeiro  from  the  French,  about  1560,  under  the 
leadership  of  the  Governour  General,  Mem  de  Sa. 

110  Santo  Andre  de  Borda  do  Campo  was  founded 
as  second  villa  in  Sao  Vicente  by  Joao  Ramalho,  under 
authority  of  Martim  Affonso,  February  4,  1533. 

111  The  Jesuits  came  to  the  moral  assistance  of  all 
law-breakers,  striving  by  persuasion  or  force  to  con- 
vert them  to  a  proper  Christian  frame  of  mind. 

112  The  mention  of  African  slaves,  whenever  the 
culture  of  cotton  is  discussed,  is  to  be  noted.     Pro- 
fessor Wiener  (Africa  and  the  Discovery  of  America) 
has  shown  the  contact  between  the  African  negroes 
and  the  South  American  aborigines,  and  comes  to  the 
conclusion  that  this  contact  took  place  prior  to  the 
known  discovery  of  America  in  1492. 

113  A  dry  measure  equivalent  to  between  fourteen 
and  fifteen  litres. 

114  The  African  banana  is  known  as  musa  sapien- 
tium,  and  the  one  with  the  black  heart  resembling  a 
crucifix  was  a  variety  imported  from  China,  known 
as   musa   chinensis.     The   small   hard-rinded    banana 
resembles  the  borcejote,  a  fig  native  of  the  Algarve, 
southern  Portugal,  characterized  by  the  toughness  of 
its  skin. 

115  Giboya,  the  boa-constrictor. 

116  Martim  Carvalho  led  an  expedition  of  explora- 
tion during  the  years  1569-70.    All  we  know  of  this 
expedition  is  told  by  Magalhaes.     (See  Jose  Luiz  Bap- 
tista — Historia  das  entradas.     In  Institute  Brazileiro, 
1900.    Tomo  especial.    Pt.  II.,  p.  177.) 


232  NOTES 

117  Several  words  in  the  text  are  illegible.     The 
expedition  probably  found  some  grains  of  gold  in  the 
river-bed  between  two  mountains. 

118  The  cassia  fistula:  a  name  applied  to  the  clove 
cassia  in  Brazil,  the  fruit  of  which  had  a  clove-like 
odour  and  the  taste  of  cinnamon.     The  mention  of  it 
here  would  indicate  the  finding  of  spice,  which  was 
one  of  the  objects  of  exploration  in  the  New  World. 


Some  Bibliographical  Remarks 


Some  Bibliographical  Remarks 

The  translator  hopes  that  a  perusal  of  this  book 
will  have  aroused  in  the  reader  an  interest  in  the  early 
history  of  Brazil.  In  that  case,  the  appended  notices 
of  a  few  of  the  most  important  and  most  readily  ac- 
cessible works  on  that  period  will  be  of  assistance. 
A  consultation  of  the  works  indicated  will  serve  as 
the  first  step  in  the  pursuit  of  historical  material  re- 
lating to  early  Brazil. 

No  one  has  made  a  more  thorough  investigation 
of  the  early  period  of  exploration  than  Henry  Har- 
risse,  the  results  of  which  he  has  given  in  his  Dis- 
covery of  North  America.  London,  1892.  Equally 
important,  but  of  a  different  class,  is  the  collection  of 
Martin  Fernandes  de  Navarrete,  Coleccion  de  los 
viages  y  descubrimientos  que  hicieron  por  Mar  los 
Espanoles  desde  fines  del  Siglo  XV.  5  Vols.  Madrid, 
1825-37.  Of  the  earlier  writers,  one  should  not  omit 
the  work  of  the  Spanish  Chronicler  of  the  Indies, 
Antonio  de  Herrera,  Historia  General  de  los  Hechos 
de  los  Castellanos  en  las  Islas  i  Tierra  Firme  del  Mar 
Oceano.  4  Vols.  Madrid,  1601-15. 


238  BIBLIOGRAPHY 


XVI  CENTURY  WORKS  RELATING 
TO  BRAZIL 

1500  Letter  of  Pero  Vaz  de  Caminha.  To  the  King 
of  Portugal,  Dom  Manuel.  Signed:  "Deste 
Porto  Seguro  de  vossa  Ilha  da  Vera  Cruz. 
Hoje  Sexta  Feira  primeiro  dia  de  Maio  de  mil 
e  quinhentos."  The  original  is  in  the  Archi- 
ve Nacional  of  Portugal.  First  printed  incor- 
rectly in  Manoel  Ayres  de  Cazal's  Chorogra- 
phia  Brasilica.  Rio  de  Janeiro,  1817.  Trans- 
lated into  French  in  1822.  Correctly  re- 
printed in  1826  in  the  Collecgao  de  Noticias 
para  a  Historia  e  Geographla  das  Nagoes 
Ultramarinas.  Vol.  IV.,  No.  3.  The  text  I 
have  used  may  be  found  in  Alguns  Documen- 
tos  do  Archivo  Nacional  da  Torre  do  Tombo 
dcerca  das  Navegaqoes  e  Conquistas  Portu- 
guezas.  Lisbon,  1892.  The  text  of  this  let- 
ter exists  in  many  places. 

1500  Letter  of  Mestre  Joao,  Physico  d'ElRei,  Dom 
Manuel.  Dated:  "De  Vera  Cruz  ao  I  de 
Maio  de  1500."  Mestre  Joao  was  the  astrono- 
mer of  the  expedition.  His  letter  to  the  King 
was  sent  back  to  the  old  country  at  the  same 
time  as  the  one  of  Vaz  Caminha.  It  was 
copied  in  Lisbon  by  Adolf o  Varnhagen  and 
sent  to  Brazil  where  it  was  printed  in  the 
Revista  Trimensal  do  Instituto  Historico  e 
Geographico  Brazileiro.  Vol.  V.,  p.  342. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  239 

This  letter,  likewise,  exists  in  many  places;  I 
have  used  the  text  as  given  in  Alguns  Docu- 
mentos  mentioned  above. 

1500-02  Navegaqao  do  Capitao  Pedro  Alvares  Cdbral 
escrita  por  hum  Piloto  Portugues.  In  Col- 
lecgao  de  Noticias.  Vol.  II.,  No.  2.  The  origi- 
nal document  is  apparently  lost.  According 
to  J.  C.  Rodrigues — Catalogo  Annotado  dos 
Libros  sobre  o  Brasil,  Cabral's  account  was 
first  printed  in  the  Paesi  novamente  ritrovati 
of  1507,  whence  it  was  translated  into  Latin 
in  Grynaeus,  from  which  source  Ramusio  took 
it  and  turned  it  into  Italian.  The  Academia 
Real  das  Sciencias  of  Lisbon  translated 
Ramusio's  text  into  Portuguese  about  1820 
for  its  Collecgao  de  Noticias.  There  are 
many  editions  of  the  Paesi  printed  between 
1507  and  1525,  and  there  are  early  transla- 
tions of  it  into  Latin  and  German. 

1500-04  Voyages  of  Amerigo  Vespucci.  The  first 
dated  edition  of  the  Mundus  Novus  is  that  of 
1504,  but  some  of  the  undated  editions  may 
have  been  printed  in  1502  or  1503.  It  con- 
tains the  account  of  Vespucci's  voyage  of 
1501  to  Brazil.  The  texts  of  Vespucci  which 
I  have  used  are  those  found  in  Henri  Vig- 
naud — Americ  Vespuce.  Paris,  1917;  and 
the  reprints  of  the  early  editions  made  by 
Professor  Northup  at  Princeton  University — 
Vespucci  Reprints,  Texts  and  Studies.  Trans- 
lations by  George  T.  Northup.  Princeton 
University  Press.  1916. 


240  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1503-05  Paulmier  de  Gonneville — Relation  authentique 
du  Voyage  du  Capitaine  de  Gonneville  es 
Nouvelles  Terres  des  Indes.  Voyage  du 
Navire  I'Espoir  de  Honfteur.  The  best  ver- 
sion is  that  of  d'Avezac — Annales  des  Voy- 
ages de  la  geographie,  de  I'histoire  et  de 
I'archeologie.  Dirigees  par  V.  A.  Malte-Brun. 
Paris,  1869.  Tomes  II  and  III. 

Another  version  of  this  account  was 
written  by  Jean  de  Paulmier,  great-great- 
great-grandson  of  Paulmier  de  Gonneville's 
Brazilian  adopted  son,  and  is  entitled: 
Memoires  tovchant  I' Etablissement  d'vne 
Mission  Chrestienne  dans  le  Troisieme  Monde, 
Autrement  appelle,  La  Terre  Australe,  Meri- 
dionale,  Antartique,  &  Inconnue  *  *  *  Par 
vn  Ecclesiastique  Originaire  de  cette  mesme 
Terre.  Paris,  1663. 

1503-04  Giovanni  da  Empoli — Viaggo  fatto  nell'  India 
per  Giovanni  da  Empoli  fattore  su  la  nave  del 
Serenissimo  Re  di  Portogallo  per  conto  de 
Marchionni  di  Lisbona.  In  Giovanni  Batista 
Ramusio — Raccolta  delle  Navigatione  et 
Viaggi.  2nd  edition,  Vol.  I.  Venice,  1565. 
John  of  Empoli  was  on  the  expedition  of 
Albuquerque.  The  account  has  been  trans- 
lated from  Ramusio  into  Portuguese  in  the 
Collecqao  das  Nagoes  Ultramarinas.  Vol.  II., 
No.  6. 

1506  Jean  Denys — Un  navilio  d'Onfteur,  del  quale 
era  capitano  Giovanni  Dionisio  et  el  pilot o 
Gamarto  di  Roana,  primamente  v'ando,  e  nell 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  241 

anno  1508  un  navilio  di  Dieppe  detto  La 
Pensee  el  quale  era  di  Giovan  Ango,  padre  del 
monsignor  lo  capitano  e  visconte  di  Dieppa, 
sendo  maestre,  over  patron  di  detta  nave, 
Thomaso  Aubert.  Ramusio.  Vol.  III.  Har- 
risse  ascribes  this  trip  to  North  America,  "the 
same  latitude  as  France." 

1511  The  Log  of  the  Ship  Bretoa.  The  text  was 
first  given  by  Varnhagen  in  the  notes  of  the 
first  edition  of  his  Historia  Geral  do  Brasil. 
Rio  de  Janeiro,  1854;  and  as  an  appendix  to 
the  fourth  edition  of  his  Diario  de  Pero 
Lopes.  Rio  de  Janeiro,  1867. 

1515  Copia  der  Neuen  Zeitung  aus  Presillg  Landt. 
There  are  three  undated  early  editions  of  this 
work  known.  There  is  a  French  translation 
of  it  in  the  Archives  des  Voyages  of  Ternaux- 
Compans.  Vol.  II.  Paris,  1840;  and  the 
salient  points  have  been  translated  into  Portu- 
guese by  Varnhagen  in  his  Historia  Geral  do 
Brasil.  2nd  edition  (1880).  p.  87  ft. 

1515-16  Juan  de  Solis'  Voyage.  No  direct  account  of 
this  voyage  has  come  down  to  us,  but  all  the 
data  pertaining  to  it  have  been  collected  by 
Jose  Toribio  Medina  in  Juan  Diaz  de  Solis. 
Estudio  Historico.  Santiago,  1897. 

1519  Fernao  Magalhaes — The  First  Circumnaviga- 
tion of  the  World.  The  text  of  Pigafetta's 
account  of  this  voyage  will  be  found  in  the 
ably  edited  work  of  Carlo  Amoretti  entitled: 
Primo  Viaggo  Intorno  al  Globo  *  *  * 


242  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Milan,  1800.  The  six  contemporary  accounts 
of  the  voyage  have  been  translated  into  Eng- 
lish by  Lord  Stanley  of  Alderley,  under  the 
title  of:  The  First  Voyage  round  the  World 
by  Magellan.  London  (Hakluyt  Society), 
1874. 

1519  Juan  de  Enciso — Suma  de  Geografia.  Se- 
villa,  1519. 

1525-30  Loaisa's  Expedition.  Among  the  papers  re- 
printed by  Navarrete  in  his  fifth  volume, 
there  are  accounts  of  the  Ships  Sao  Gabriel 
and  Victoria  on  the  coast  of  Brazil  during  the 
years  1526-30. 

1526  The  Letter  of  Diego  Garcia,  who,  by  his  own 
statement,  made  a  voyage  to  Brazil  in  1512 — 
Memoria  de  la  navegacion  que  hice  este  viaje 
en  la  parte  del  mar  Oceano  dende  que  sali  de 
ciudad  de  la  Coruna,  que  alii  me  fue  entregada 
la  armada  por  los  oficiales  de  S.  M.  que  fue 
en  el  ano  de  1526.  In  Revista  do  Instituto 
Brasileiro.  Vol.  XV. 

1526-28  Discorso  d'un  gran  capitano  di  mare  Fran- 
cese  del  luogo  di  Dieppa.  Ramusio.  Vol.  III. 
The  "gran  capitano"  was  Jean  Parmentier  in 
the  service  of  Jean  Ango,  and  the  reference 
is  to  the  expedition  to  the  East  Indies  in  the 
Ship  La  Pensee,  from  which  Parmentier 
never  returned,  having  died  in  the  East  In- 
dies in  1530. 

1528  The  letter  of  Luis  Ramirez.  In  this  letter 
dated  "de  Rio  da  Prata,  10  de  Julio"  is  the 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  243 

first  occurrence  of  this  name  for  the  River. 
In  Revista  do  Institute  Brazileiro.    Vol.  XV. 

1530-32  Pero  Lopez  de  Sousa — Diario  da  Navegaqao 
da  armada  que  foi  a  terra  do  Brazil  em  1530 
sob  a  capitania  mor  de  Martim  Affonso  de 
Sousa,  escripta  por  seu  irmao,  Pero  Lopes  de 
Sousa.  First  printed  from  the  original  MS. 
preserved  in  the  Torre  do  Tombo,  by  Varn- 
hagen.  Lisbon,  1839. 

1535-54  Ulric  Schmidel  spent  nearly  twenty  years  in 
the  Rio  de  la  Plata  region  in  southern  Brazil. 
His  Vera  Historia  was  first  published  in 
Sebastian  Franck's  Weltbuch,  edition  of  1567. 
Printed  in  Latin  by  Hulsius  in  1599. 

1538  Letter  of  Diego  Nunes — Carta  de  Diego 
Nunes  escripta  a  D.  Jodo  III.  acerca  do  desco- 
brimento  de  Sertoes  aonde  podia  chegar  atra- 
vesando  a  terra  de  S.  Vicente.  Copied  by 
Varnhagen  and  reprinted  in  the  Revista  do 
Instituto  Brasileiro.  Vol.  II.,  p.  365. 

1540-44  Fr.  Caspar  Carvajal — Descubrimiento  del 
Rio  de  las  Amazonas  segun  la  Relacion  hasta 
ahora  Inedita  de  Fr.  Caspar  Carvajal,  por 
Jose  Toribio  Medina.  Seville,  1894. 

1541-45  Cabeqa  de  Vaca — Commentarios  de  Alvar 
Nunes  Cabega  de  Vaca,  adelantado  y  gover- 
nador  de  la  Provincia  del  Rio  de  la  Plata. 
Valladolid,  1555. 

1542-44  Jean  Alphonse  Saintongeois — Cosmographie 
avec  espere  et  regime  du  soleil  et  du  nord,  etc. 


244  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Original  MS.  in  Bibliotheque  Nationale  de 
Paris.  First  printed  in  1559,  Les  Voyages 
Avantureux  du  Capitaine  Jan  Alfonce  Sanc- 
tongeois,  Poitiers,  1559.  The  best  text  is  in 
G.  Musset — La  Cosmographie  d'Alphonse 
Saintongeois.  Paris,  1904. 

1543  Gonsalo  Fernandes  Oviedo — Relatione  delta 
navigatione  per  il  grandissimo  Hume  Marag- 
non  di  Gonsalo  Fernando  d'Oviedo.  Ramusio, 
Vol.  III. 

1547-49  Hans  Staden — His  account  first  published  in 
Marburg  in  1557,  entitled:  Warachtige  His- 
torie.  It  has  been  many  times  printed  in 
original  and  in  translation.  Sir  Richard  F. 
Burton  translated  it  for  the  Hakluyt  Society — 
The  Captivity  of  Hans  Staden.  London, 
1874. 

1555-65  Villegaignon's  Colony.  Nicolas  Barre — 
Copie  de  quelques  lettres  sur  la  Navigation 
du  Chevalier  Villegaignon.  Paris,  1557  and 
1558.  Disc  ours  de  Nicolas  Barre  sur  la  Navi- 
gation du  Chevalier  de  Villegaignon.  Paris, 
1558.  Histoire  des  choses  memorables  ad- 
venues  en  la  terre  de  Bresil,  par  tie  de  I'Ameri- 
que  Australe,  sous  le  gouvernement  de  M.  de 
Villegaignon,  depuis  I'an  1555  jusqu'a  I'an 
1558.  No  place,  1561.  Brief  recueil  ^de 
I' affliction  et  dispersion  de  Veglise  des  fideles 
au  pays  de  Bresil,  ou  est  contenu  sommaire- 
ment  le  voyage  et  la  navegation  faicte  par 
Nicolas  de  Villegaignon,  audit  pays  de  Bresil. 
No  place,  1565.  All  the  works  pertaining  to 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  245 

Villegaignon's  colony  may  be  found  in  Heu- 
lard.  Arthur  Heulard — Villegaignon,  Roi 
d'Amerique,  un  Homme  de  Mer  au  XVI 
Siecle.  Paris,  1897. 

1558  Andre  Thevet — Les  Singularites  de  la  France 
Antarcticque.  Paris,  1558.  There  is  a  mod- 
ern critical  edition  by  Paul  Gaffarel.  Paris, 
1878. 

1564  Padre  Manuel  de  Nobrega — Informagoes 
das  terras  do  Brazil  mandada  pelo  Padre  No- 
brega. In  Rcvista  do  Instituto  Brazileiro. 
Vol.  VI.,  p.  91. 

1568-78  Successes  da  Provincia  de  Sancta  Cruz  que 
vulgarmente  se  chama  Brasil.  Anonymous 
account  printed  for  the  first  time  in  the  Re- 
vista  do  Instituto  historico  e  geographico  de 
Sao  Paulo.  Vol.  III.,  p.  125.  The  editor  of 
the  article,  Dr.  Antonio  de  Toledo  Piza,  ex- 
presses the  opinion  that  this  was  probably  the 
work  of  a  Jesuit  priest  named  Pedro  Rodri- 
gues. 

1574  Pero  de  Magalhaes  de  Gandavo— Tractado 
da  terra  do  Brazil.  MS.  copies  in  the  British 
Museum  and  in  the  Academia  Real  das  Scien- 
cias  de  Lisboa.  First  printed  in  Collecgao  de 
Noticias.  Vol.  IV.,  No.  4. 

1576  Pero  de  Magalhaes — Historia  da  Provincia  de 
Sancta  Cruz.  Lisbon,  1576. 

1578  Jean  de  Lery — Histoire  d'un  Voyage  fait  en 
la  terre  du  Bresil,  autrement  dit  Amerique. 
La  Rochelle,  1578. 


246  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1578  Trabalhos  dos  Primeiros  jesuitas  no  Brazil. 
Anonymous.  No  date.  A  copy  of  a  MS. 
in  the  Public  Library  at  Evora.  Last  date 
mentioned  is  1578.  It  seems  like  a  XVI  cen- 
tury document.  Printed  for  the  first  time  in 
the  Revista  Trimensal  do  Institute  Brazileiro. 
Vol.  57. 

1578  A  letter  written  to  Mr.  Richard  Staper  by 
John  Whithall  from  Santos,  the  26th  of  June, 
1578.  Southey  quotes  Hakluyt's  text  in  his 
Supplementary  Notes,  and  Burton  in  his 
preface  to  Hans  Staden. 

1580  Pedro  Sarmiento  de  Gamboa — Relation  y 
derrotero  del  Viaje  y  Descubrimento  del 
Estrecho  de  la  Madre  de  Dios,  antes  llamado 
de  Magallanes.  MS.  in  Royal  Library, 
Madrid.  First  printed  in  Madrid,  1768. 

1584  Enforma^do  do  Brazil,  e  de  suas  Capitanias. 
Jesuit  MS.  discovered  by  Varnhagen  in  Lis- 
bon. It  was  printed  for  the  first  time  in  the 
Revista  do  Institute  Brazileiro.  Vol.  VI. 

1584  Principio  e   Origem  dos  Indios  do  Brazil  e 
seus  costumes  adoragao  e  ceremonias.  *  *  * 
Anonymous.     No  date.     Last  date  mentioned 
is  1584.    It  is  a  copy  of  a  MS.  in  the  Public 
Library  at  Evora  and  appears  to  be  of  the 
XVI  century.     Printed  for  the  first  time  in 
the  Revista  Trimensal  do  Institute  Brazileiro. 
Vol.  57. 

1585  Fernam  Cardim — Narrativa  epistolar  de  um 
viagem  e   Missao   Jesuitica   pela   Bahia,    etc. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  247 

The  original  is  in  the  Library  at  Evora.  It 
was  first  printed  by  Varnhagen  in  Lisbon  in 
1847.  Purchas  used  it  in  his  Pilgrimes,  but 
assigned  the  authorship  to  Manuel  Tristao. 
Do  principio  e  On  gem  dos  Indios  do  Brazil, 
e  de  seus  costumes,  adoragao  e  ceremonias. 
Rio  de  Janeiro,  1881. 

1587  Gabriel  Soares  de  Sousa — Tractado  descrip- 
tivo  de  Brazil.  First  printed  in  the  Collecgdo 
de  Noticias.  Vol.  III.  Then  edited  by  Varn- 
hagen, as  a  separate  book,  in  1839. 

In  addition  to  these  accounts,  there  are  many 
documents  in  the  form  of  letters  which  have  been  made 
accessible  in  such  serials  as  the  Revista  Trimensal  do 
Instituto  historico  e  geographico  brazileiro,  the  Re- 
vista  Trimensal  do  Instituto  historico  e  geographico  de 
Sao  Paulo  and  the  Annaes  da  Bibliotheca  Nacional  de 
Rio  de  Janeiro.  A  great  many  of  the  existing  MSS. 
apparently  have  not  yet  been  made  accessible  to  the 
student  in  North  America.  Many  of  the  town  and 
city  records  are  still  in  existence  in  the  original  MSS. 
in  Brazil.  There  are  undoubtedly  many  MSS.  in  the 
libraries  in  Portugal  which  escaped  the  search  of 
Varnhagen  and  others.  Particularly  interesting  would 
be  the  correspondence  of  Dr.  Gouveia,  Portuguese 
Ambassador  at  Paris,  with  his  sovereign,  and  the  let- 
ters of  the  Count  of  Castanheira  who  was  Prime 
Minister  to  John  III. 

One  of  the  most  important  sources  of  information 
of  the  customs  during  colonial  days  in  Brazil  are  the 
Jesuit  letters.  Father  Nobrega,  first  chief  of  the  Order 
in  Brazil,  was  a  prolific  letter  writer.  Some  of  his 


248  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

letters  were  reprinted  in  Spain  in  1565  under  the  title 
of:  Copia  de  unas  cartas  enviadas  del  Brasil,  por  el 
Padre  Manuel  de  Nobrega  de  la  Compania  de  Jesus 
y  otros  padres  que  estan  debaxo  de  su  obediencia,  al 
Padre  Maestre  Simon,  proposito  de  dicha  Compania 
en  Portugal  y  a  los  padres  y  hermanos  de  Jesus  de 
Coimbra.  Trasladadas  de  Portugues  en  Castellano. 
Recibidas  el  ano  de 


Others  also  appeared  in  various  early  editions  of 
the  Jesuit  Avisi,  in  Italian,  Latin  and  Spanish.  These 
letters  were  finally  printed  by  the  Bibliotheca  Nacional 
de  Rio  de  Janeiro  under  the  title  :  Cartas  do  Brasil  do 
Padre  Manoel  da  Nobrega.  1549-60.  Cartas  Jesuiti- 
cas.  I. 

There  is  also  another  volume  entitled:  Cartas 
Avulsas,  1550-68,  which  reproduces  the  letters  writ- 
ten by  other  Jesuits  than  Nobrega.  The  half-title  of 
this  volume  is  marked:  "Three  and  Four"  of  the 
series  Cartas  Jesuiticas,  which  may  indicate  still  others 
in  the  series  that  I  have  been  unable  to  locate. 

Next  to  Nobrega,  the  most  renowned  Jesuit  in 
Brazil  was  Father  Anchieta  from  whose  pen  we  have 
the  following  works:  Informagao  dos  casamentos  dos 
Indios.  In  Revista  do  Institute  Brazileiro.  Vol.  VIII.  ; 
Epistola  quamplurimam  rerum  naturalium.  First  pub- 
lished by  the  Academia  Real  das  Sciencias  in  1799, 
and  again  in  the  Collecgao  das  Noticias.  Vol.  I.,  No. 
3,  and  translated  into  Portuguese  in  the  Annaes  da 
Bibliotheca  Nacional.  Vol.  I,  p.  275  ft;  Arte  Gram- 
matica  da  lingua  mais  usada  na  costa  do  Brazil. 
Coimbra,  1595.  In  the  Annaes  a  great  many  of  his 
letters  are  printed  for  the  first  time. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  249 

Besides  the  works  mentioned  above,  which  can 
be  considered  as  primary  sources  of  information,  there 
are  a  few  important  secondary  sources  which  should 
be  mentioned  in  this  connection.  First  of  all,  the 
Portuguese  chroniclers: 

Caspar  Correa  (1500P-1561) — Lendas  da  India. 
Lisbon,  1858. 

Fernao  Lopes  de  Castanheda — Historia  do  descobri- 
mento  &  conquista  da  India  pelos  Portugueses. 
Lisbon,  1552-61.  There  is  an  English  transla- 
tion printed  in  London,  1582. 

Joao  de  Barros — Asia  de  Jodo  de  Barros,  dos  fectos 
que  os  Portugueses  User  am  no  descobrimento  e 
conquista  dos  mares  e  terras  do  Oriente.  Lisbon, 
1552. 

Antonio  Galvao — Tractado  *  *  *  dos  diversos  e  des- 
vairados  caminhos  por  onde  nos  tempos  passados 
a  pimenta  e  especiaria  veyo  da  India  as  nossas 
paries.  Lisbon,  1563.  There  is  an  English  edi- 
tion translated  and  printed  by  Richard  Hakluyt 
in  London,  1601. 

Damiao  de  Goes — Chronica  do  felicissimo  rei  Dom 
Emmanuel.  Lisbon,  1566. 

Jeronymo  Osorio — De  Rebus  Emmanuelis  Regis  Lusi- 
taniae  Invictissimi  Virtute  et  Auspicio  gestis  libri 
duodecim.  Lisbon,  1571. 

Pedro  de  Mariz  (Died  about  1615) — Dialogos  da 
varia  historia.  Coimbra,  1594. 

Luis  de  Sousa  (1559-1632) — Annaes  de  elRei  D.  Joao 
terceiro.  Lisbon,  1846. 


250  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Next  the  Brazilian  chroniclers: 

Fray  Vicente  do  Salvador — The  first  historian  of 
Brazil  born  in  the  country.  Descobrimento  do 
Brazil.  1627.  First  printed  in  the  Annaes  da 
Bibliotheca  National  de  Rio  de  Janeiro.  Vol.  13. 

Domingos  do  Loreto  Couto  (Period  of  1625-35) — 
Desagravos  do  Brazil.  First  printed  in  the  An- 
naes da  Bibliotheca  National  de  Rio  de  Janeiro 
Vol.  24. 

Padre  Simao  de  Vasconcellos — Chronica  da  Compan- 
hia  de  Jesus  do  estado  do  Brazil.  Lisbon,  1663. 
Noticias  curiosas  e  necessarias  das  cousas  do 
Brazil.  Lisbon,  1672. 

Fray  Raphael  de  Jesus — Castrioto  Lusitano.  Entre- 
presa  e  restauraqao  de  Pernambuco  e  das  Capi- 
tanias  confinantes.  Lisbon,  1679. 

Francisco  de  Brito  Freyre — Nova  Lusitania.  His- 
toria  da  Guerra  Brasilica.  Lisbon,  1675. 

Padre  Joao  de  Sousa  Ferreira — America  Abreviada. 
Suas  noticias  de  seus  naturaes,  e  em  particular  do 
Maranhao,  titulos  contendas  e  instrucgoes  a  sua 
conserva  e  augmento  nui  uteis.  *  *  *  1693.  In  /«- 
stituto  Brasileiro.  Vol.  56. 

Sebastiao  da  Rocha  Pitta — Historia  da  America  Por- 
tuguesa  desde  o  anno  de  1500  de  seu  descobri- 
mento  ate  a  de  1724.  Lisbon,  1730. 

Antonio  de  Santa  Maria  Jaboatao— Orbe  Serafico  novo 
Brasilico.  Parts  Primeira  da  Chronica  dos  frades 
menores.  Lisbon,  1761. 

Caspar  de  Madre  de  Deos — Memorias  para  a  historia 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  251 

da  Capitania  de  Sao  Vicente,  hoje  chamado  Sao 
Paulo  do  Estado  do  Brasil.    Lisbon,  1797. 

In  speaking  of  the  Brazilian  chronicles,  one  should 
not  omit  the  first  and  foremost  English  chronicler  of 
the  country,  Robert  Southey,  whose  History  of  Brazil 
is  a  valuable  work.  Those  who  wish  a  fuller  bibliog- 
raphy on  Brazil  are  recommended  to  consult  the  four 
following  catalogues: 

P.  Lee  Phillips — A  List  of  Books  relating  to  Brazil  in 
the  Library  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Washington,  1901. 

Charles  Chadenat — Bibliotheca  Braziliensis.  No.  38 
of  his  catalogue  entitled:  Le  Bibliophile  Ameri- 
cain.  It  contains  about  1760  items  ancient  and 
modern,  concerning  Brazil.  Paris  (ca.  1910). 

A.  L.  Garraux — Bibliographic  Bresilienne.  Catalogue 
des  Ouvrages  fran$ais  et  latins  relatifs  au  Bresil 
1500-1898.  Paris,  1898. 

J.  C.  Rodrigues — Bibliotheca  Brasiliense.  Catalogo 
annotado  dos  livros  sobre  o  Brasil.  Parte  I. 
Descobrimento  da  America:  Brazil  Colonial 
1402-1822.  Rio  de  Janeiro,  1907.  Contains  des- 
criptions of  over  2,600  items. 


Subject  Index 


Subject  Index 


Academia  Real  das  Sciencias:  Publishes  Magalhaes — 
Tratado  da  Terra  do  Brasil — I.  29.  Refers  to  the 
Historia  in  its  dictionary — I.  28. 

Achem,  King  of— II.    15,  189. 

Adornments  of  the  Indians — II.    88,  172. 

Aimoret—II.    109,  139. 

Aipim—ll.    45,  104,  159,  169. 

Alligators— II.    63,  177. 

Amazon,  The— II.    27,  224. 

Ambergris— II.    75  ff.,  222. 

Ananazes — II.    47. 

Anapurus  (a  variety  of  parrot) — II.    67. 

Autos— II.    55,  160. 

Ant-eater — II.    60. 

Antonio,  Nicholas:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    27. 

Ants— II.    178. 

Aranha,  Brito:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    37. 

Ardras — II.    68. 

Armadillos— II.    56,  160. 

Articles  of  trade — II.    174. 

Ascenfao  (Ascencion) — II.    30,  206. 

Bahia  de  Todos  os  Sanctos— II.    34  ff.,  134  ff. 
Bahia  Fermosa — II.    144. 
Balso—II.    77. 


256  SUBJECT  INDEX 

Banana — II.    163.    Brought  to  the  Province  from  the 

Island  of  Sao  Thome — II.    46. 
Baratta,  Manuel — I.    15,  16. 
Barbosa  Machado,  Diogo:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I. 

27. 
Barros,  Toao  de — II.    203.    Quoted  by  Magalhaes — II. 

24. 

Batata— II.    45. 
Beijus—ll.   45,  159,  215. 
Birds  of  prey — II.    65. 
Boa-constrictor — II.    62. 
Boiteninga  (a  serpent) — II.    177. 
Bolos— II.    45,216. 

Boundaries  of  Sancta  Cruz,  The — II.    25. 
Bow  and  arrow,  Skill  of  the  Indians  with  the — II.    93, 

167. 

Brazil:    Called  "Nova  Lusitania"— II.    183. 
Brazil,  Origin  of  the  word — II.    194  if. 
Brazil-wood— II.    23,  49,  131,  143,  145,  149. 
Britioga,  The  fort  of — II.    37. 
Brown  Library,  Catalogue  of  the  John  Carter:    Refers 

to  the  Historia — I.    35. 
Brunet:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    41. 
Burial  customs  among  the  Indians — II.    85,  174,  224. 

Cabo  Frio— II.    144. 

Caborahiba—ll.    50,  217. 

Cabral,  Pedralvarez— II.  20,  189  ff.  Departure  of  his 
fleet— II.  190.  Sends  news  to  the  King  of  Por- 
tugal—II.  22. 


SUBJECT  INDEX  257 

Cdcado—ll.    161. 

Cajus—ll.    47. 

Camamu,  The  River— II.    135. 

Camboropins — II.    73. 

Camindes — II.    68. 

Camoes,  Luis  de — I.    15, 16.    Poems  of.  . . . — II.    11  ff. 

Campo  Tourinho,  Pero  do — II.    36. 

Canafistula—Il.    182. 

Cannibalism — I.  46;  II.  170,  226,  227.  Ceremonial 
oftheTapuyas — II.  111. 

Canoa,  The  Indian— II.    94,  137,  225. 

Cape  of  Good  Hope,  The— II.    192. 

Capivara—ll.    54,  179,  219. 

Captaincies,  The of  Brazil— II.  208.  Establish- 
ment of — II.  31. 

Carvalho,  Captain  Martim — II.    181. 
Cashew— II.    47,  162,  217. 
Cerigoes—ll.    58. 

Chastity,  Vow  of.... among  the  Indian  women — II. 
89,  173. 

Children,  Raising  the— II.    90. 
Cidade—ll.    211. 
Citrus  fruits— II.    48. 

Climate  of  Brazil— II.    27,  154.    Healthfulness  of 

....—II.    155,  204  ff. 
Coati—ll.    55,219. 
Coelho,  Duarte — II.    33. 

Cole,  George  Watson:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    41. 
Copaiba— II.    49. 


258  SUBJECT  INDEX 

Coricas—ll.    68. 

Cotia—ll..  55,219. 

Cotton— II.    48. 

Coutinho,  Francisco  Pereira — II.    34. 

Coutinho,  Vasco  Fernandas — II.    37,  143. 

Couvadf,  The— I.    46;  II.    90,  174,  224. 

Cricare,  The  River— II.    182. 

Crops,  Principal.  . .  .of  Sancta  Cruz — II.    149. 

Customs  of  the  Portuguese  in  Sancta  Cruz — II.     152. 

Dalbuquerque,  Dona  Jeronimo — II.    131. 

Dalmeida,  Joao — II.    36. 

Daveiro,  Duque — II.    142. 

Davila,  Gil  Gonsales:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    25. 

Doyes— II.    67. 

Ducks— II.    67,  151. 

Dwellings  of  the  Portuguese — II.    40,  41. 

Eagles:    The  Indians  raise  them  for  their  feathers — II. 
65. 

Emus — II.    71. 

Endogamy,  The  Indians  practise — II.    89,  173. 
Escape  of  the  Portuguese  from  the  Indians — II.    108. 
Estates  of  the  Portuguese — II.    41. 

Execution  of  prisoners  among  the  Indians — II.    102  ff., 
170  if. 

Expeditions,  Exploring— II.    117  ff.,  180  ff. 
Expeditions,  Other  early.  . .  .to  Brazil — II.    193. 


SUBJECT  INDEX  259 

Farinha  de  guerra — II.    45,  158. 

Farinha  do  pdo — II.    44. 

Farinha  fresco. — II.    45,  158. 

Ferreira,  Baltesar — II.    80. 

Ferreira,  Jorge — II.    97. 

Field,  Thomas  W. :    Refers  to  the  Historia—l.    36. 

Figueiredo  Correa,  Jorge  de — II.    35. 

Filhos—Il.    45,216. 

Food-stuffs,  Cultivation  of.  . .  .among  the  Indians — II. 

91. 

Ford,  Dr.  J.  D.  M. :    Literary  Comment— I.    45  ff. 
Fracazes — II.    164. 
Fruits,  Abundance  and  variety  of — II.    43,  48,  164. 

GalosdoPeru—ll.    70. 

Game,  Abundance  of — II.    56. 

Garraux:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    41. 

Genipdpo,  Use  of  the  dye.  . .  .among  the  Indians — II. 

QQ     1  T\ 
oo,  1/J. 

Gerardcas  (serpents) — II.    63,  220. 
Giboyossu  (a  serpent) — II.    176. 
Giraldes,  Francisco — II.    137. 
Goards—lL    69. 

Gold,  Finding  of — II.     181.     Objects  of set  with 

precious  stones — II.    118. 
Golden  Chersonese — II.    13,  15. 
Government  of  the  Indians — II.    85,  166. 

Government  of  Sancta  Cruz:    Divided  into  two  juris- 
dictions—II.    40,  213. 


260  SUBJECT  INDEX 

Graesse:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    41. 

Grenville,  Thomas:     His  note  about  the  Historia — I. 

33. 
Guests,  Welcoming.  . .  .among  the  Indians — II.    87  ff. 

Hebijares  (a  serpent) — II.    177. 

Hemas—ll.    71. 

Herb  a  viva — II.    51. 

Herrera,  Antonio  de:    Uses  the  Historia — I.    22. 

Hipupidra—ll.    82,  223. 

Historia,  The:  Causes  of  its  rarity — I.  19.  Manu- 
scripts of .  . .  . — I.  48.  Number  of  copies  of.  ... 
— I.  17.  Its  use  by  the  official  chroniclers  of 
Spain — I.  18. 

Hitanhaem— II.    38. 

Horses  brought  from  the  Cape  Verde  Islands — II.    54. 

Houses,  Indian — II.    167. 

Hunting  and  fishing  among  the  Indians — II.    92. 

lacu — II.    66. 

Ibis,  Red— II.    69. 

Igarofu — II.    33,  132. 

Ilheos,  The  Captaincy  of— II.    35,  137  ff. 

Indians,  The:  Different  from  those  of  Guinea — II.  21. 
Their  fear  of  omens — II.  96.  Multitude  of  them — 
II.  165.  Their  receptivity  to  Christianity — II. 
22.  Similarity  of  physical  type;  resemblance  to  the 
Chinese — II.  83.  Their  vindictiveness  and  daring 
II.  84,  169. 

Inhame—ll.    44,  45,  159. 

Intoxicating  drink,  Preparation  of  their — II.    169. 


SUBJECT  INDEX  261 

Jaguars — II.    57. 

Japaranas  (a  serpent) — II.    177. 

Jesuits,  The— II.    113  ff.    Their  efforts  in  behalf  of  the 

Indians— II.    114,  115. 
Joao  III,  King  Dom— II.    31. 
Juromenha,  Viscondede:    Refers  to  Magalhaes — I.    35. 

Labret,  The:    Its  use  by  the  Indians — II.    174. 

Lake  of  El  Dorado,  Belief  in  the— II.    120. 

Language  of  the  Indians,  The — II.    84,  166. 

La  Popelliniere,  Lancelot  Voisin  de — I.    21. 

Leclerc:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    41. 

Leon  y  Pinelo,  Antonio  de:  Refers  to  the  Historia — I. 
25. 

Les  Trois  Monde s — I.    21. 

Line  of  Demarcation,  The— II.    31,  207  ff. 

Lopez  de  Sousa,  Pero  (Father) — II.    32. 

Lopez  de  Sousa,  Pero  (Son) — II.    33,  147. 

Luiz,  Jeronimo:  Designer  of  illustrations  for  the  His- 
toria— I.  42. 

Macaws — II.    68. 

Macucagods — II.    66. 

Magalhaes:    His  association  with  other  literary  men — 

I.    15.    HisRegras— I.    44,45. 
Maize — II.    45. 
Mamelukes— II.    39,  147. 
Manatee— II.    72,  138. 
Mandioca— II.    43,  158,  215. 
Mangrove— II.    73,  178. 


262  SUBJECT  INDEX 

Mangues—ll.    73,  179. 

Manioc— II.    43,  158,  215. 

Manuel,  King  Dom— II.    20,  189. 

Maranhao,  The  River— II.    28,  206. 

Marcandos — II.    69. 

Marine  Monster,  The— II.    79  ff. 

Marriage  customs  among  the  Indians — II.    89. 

Mass,  The  first celebrated  in  Brazil— II.    21,  192. 

Mayacus — II.    74. 

Milho  zaburro—II.    45,  159. 

Monkeys— II.    61,  180. 

Naming,  The. . .  .of  the  country — II.    22. 

Obird  paramafaci — 1 1 .    51. 
Obreas—ll.    45,  159,  215. 
Ocanho,  Joao  de — I.    15,  16. 
Ocus— II.    66. 
Olinda— II.    33,  132. 
On$as—Il.    57. 
Opossum— II.    58,  178. 
Order  of  Christ,  The— II.    23,  193. 

Pacas—ll.    55,  160. 

Paragoahi,  The  River— II.    30. 

Parakeet— II.    69. 

Paripe— II.    35,  134. 

Parrots,  Fondness  of  the  Indians  for — II.    67. 

Partridges — II.    67. 


SUBJECT  INDEX  263 

Peccary — II.    54. 

Pepper— II.    163. 

Pereira,  Dom  Lionis — II.    11,  13,  15,  16,  126. 

Pfrguifa—II.    59. 

Pernambuco,  The  Captaincy  of — II.    33,  132. 

Per os  repinaldos — II.    47,  217. 

Peru— II.    25,  28,  30,  182. 

Pigeons — II.    67. 

Pineapple— II.    47,  162. 

Pinto  de  Sousa:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    28. 

Ponte,  Bastiam  da — II.    135. 

Porto  Seguro,  The  Captaincy  of — II.     36,  142.     The 

Discovery  of.  . .  . — II.    21. 
Portuguese  lack  of  foresight  in  the  Indian  wars — II. 

168. 

Povoaqao — II.    211. 
Precious  stones — II.    121. 

Quaritch,  Bernard:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    40. 
Quito— II.    28. 

Ramiz  Galvao,  Benjamin  Franklin:  Refers  to  the  His- 
toria—I.  38. 

Rattlesnake,  The— II.    63,  177. 

Religion  of  the  Indians — II.    85,  167. 

Revenge,  The  Idea  of.  . .  .among  the  Indians — II.  86, 
93. 

Rio  da  Prata— II.    30. 

Rio  das  Contas— II.    136. 


264  SUBJECT  INDEX 

Rio  de  Janeiro,  The  Captaincy  of — II.    37,  145.    The 

Fortress  of —II.    143. 

Rio  de  Paraiba— II.    144. 

Rio  Real— II.    133. 

Rodrigues,  J.  C.:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    41. 

Sa,  Fernao  de— II.    99. 

Sa,  Mem  de—  II.    37. 

Sabin,  Joseph:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.     37. 

Sagois — II.    61. 

Salvador— II.    35,  134. 

Sancta  Cruz:  Favorable  for  settlement — II.  26.  Rea- 
son for  calling  the  country. . .  . — II.  22. 

Sancto  Amaro — II.    36,  142. 

Sanctos— II.    38,  147. 

Santo  Andre  de  Borda  do  Campo — II.    147,  231. 

Sao  Francisco,  The  River— II.  29,  133.  Its  wealth  in 
precious  stones — II.  29. 

Sao  Paulo— II.    38. 

Sao  Sebastiao,  The  city  of— II.    37,  145. 

Sao  Vicente,  The  Captaincy  of— II.  38,  147  8.  The 
town  of. . .  .—II.  38,  147. 

Sea-cows — II.    72. 

Sensitive  plant — II.    51. 

Sertao—ll.    117  ff.,  205. 

Sesmarias—II.    41,  149,  214. 

Slavery— II.    214,228. 

Slaves— II.  34,41,152.  Guinea. ..  .—II.  151,231. 
The  purchase  of.  . .  . — II.  175. 


SUBJECT  INDEX  265 

Sleeping  hammocks — II.    91. 

Sloth,  The— II.    59. 

Snakes— II.    176. 

Scares  de  Brito,  Joao:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    26. 

Sousa,  Martim  Affonso  de — II.    38. 

Sousa,  Thome  de— II.    34,  35,  134. 

Sousa  Farinha:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    28. 

Sousa  Viterbo,  F.  M.  de:    Refers  to  the  engravings  in 

the  Historia — I.    42. 

Spirito  Sancto,  The  Captaincy  of— II.    36  ff.,  143. 
Stockraising — II.    54,  150. 
Sucuriju  (a  serpent) — II.    177,  219. 
Sugar-cane — II.    48. 

Sugar  mills— II.    131,  132,  134,  137,  142,  143,  145,  148. 
Sylva,  Innocencio  Francisco  da:    Refers  to  the  Historia 

—I.    34. 

Tamaraca,  The  Captaincy  of — II.    32,  131. 

Tamendoas — II.    60. 

Tamoatds — II.    74. 

Tapir— II.    55,  160. 

Tapuyas — II.    111. 

Tatus—ll.    56,  160. 

Ternaux-Compans :    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    31.  His 

translation  of  the  Historia — I.    30. 
Thorpe,  T.:    Refers  to  the  Historia— I.    32. 
Tigers— II.    57,  177. 
Tinhareem,  The  River — II.    135. 
Tratado  da  Terra  do  Brasil — I.    24. 


266  SUBJECT  INDEX 

Turkeys— II.    70. 
Tuyns — II.    69. 

Varnhagen,  Adolfo:    His  criticism  of  the  Historia — I. 

36. 

Villa— II.    211. 
Villa  dos  Cosmos — II.    33. 
Villages,  Indian— II.    87. 
Villa  Velha— II.    35,  134. 
Vipers — II.    63. 
rirafao—II.    26,  155,  205. 
Voyage  of  exploration  of  1535 — II.    28. 

Warfare,  Indian— II.    94  ff.,  168  ff. 
Wars,  Origin  of  Indian — II.    86. 
Whales— II.    75  ff.,  222. 

Wiener,  Professor  Leo:    Article  on  the  History  of  the 
Word  Brazil— II.    195  ff. 

Wild  boar— II.    54. 

Winds,  Direction  of  the — II.    26. 

Winsor,  Justin:    Refers  to  the  Historia — I.    40. 

Yam— II.    158. 
Zabucdes — II.    46. 


Errata 

Vol.  I.,  page  15,  line  15 — For  Luis,  read  Lionis. 

Vol.  I.,  page  16,  line  14 — For  Mycaenas,  read  Maecenas. 


List  of  Members  of  the 
Cortes  Society 

Institutions 

AMERICAN  ANTIQUARIAN  SOCIETY 

Worcester,  Massachusetts 

AMERICAN  GEOGRAPHICAL  SOCIETY 

New  York  City 

AMERICAN  MUSEUM  OF  NATURAL  HISTORY 

New  York  City 

AMERICAN  PHILOSOPHICAL  SOCIETY 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

AYER  (EDWARD  E.)  COLLECTION,  NEWBERRY  LIBRARY 

Chicago,  Illinois 

BIBLIOTECA  NACIONAL 
Havana,  Cuba 

BIBLIOTECA  NACIONAL 
Mexico,  D.  F.,  Mexico 

BOSTON  ATHENAEUM 

Boston,  Massachusetts 

BOSTON  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 

Boston,  Massachusetts 

BRITISH  MUSEUM  LIBRARY 
London,  England 

BUFFALO  ACADEMY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCES 
Buffalo,  New  York 

BUREAU    OF    AMERICAN    ETHNOLOGY,    SMITHSONIAN 
INSTITUTION 
Washington,  D.  C. 


CADMUS  BOOK  SHOP 
New  York  City 

CINCINNATI  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 
Cincinnati,  Ohio 

CLARK  UNIVERSITY 

Worcester,  Massachusetts 

COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY 

New  York  City 

EXPLORERS  CLUB 

New  York  City 

FIELD  MUSEUM  OF  NATURAL  HISTORY 

Chicago,  Illinois 

HARVARD  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 

Cambridge,  Massachusetts 

LIBRARY  OF  CONGRESS 
Washington,  D.  C. 

NEW  HAMPSHIRE  STATE  LIBRARY 
Concord,  New  Hampshire 

NEW  YORK  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 

New  York  City 

NEW  YORK  STATE  LIBRARY 

Albany,  New  York 

OHIO  STATE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
Columbus,  Ohio 

OHIO  WESLEYAN  UNIVERSITY 
Delaware,  Ohio 

PAN  AMERICAN  UNION 
Washington,  D.  C. 

PEABODY  MUSEUM 

Cambridge,  Massachusetts 

PUBLIC  MUSEUM  OF  THE  CITY  OF  MILWAUKEE 

Milwaukee,  Wisconsin 

ROYAL  GEOGRAPHICAL  SOCIETY 
London,  England 

STECHERT  (G.  E.)  &  COMPANY 
New  York  City 


STEVENS  (B.  F.)  &  BROWN 
London,  England 

STEVENS  (HENRY  D.),  SON  &  STILES 
London,  England 

ST.  LOUIS  MERCANTILE  LIBRARY  ASSOCIATION 
St.  Louis,  Missouri 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Berkeley,  California 

UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS 
Urbana,  Illinois 

UNIVERSITY  OF  MICHIGAN  GENERAL  LIBRARY 

Ann  Arbor,  Michigan 

UNIVERSITY  OF  NEBRASKA  LIBRARY 
Lincoln,  Nebraska 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO,  STUDENTS'  BOOK  DEPT. 
Toronto,  Canada 

WATKINSON  LIBRARY 
Hartford,  Connecticut 

WESLEYAN  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 

Middletown,  Connecticut 

YALE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
New  Haven,  Connecticut 


Individuals 

BARRETT,  S.  A.,  Milwaukee,  Wisconsin 

BEER,  WILLIAM,  New  Orleans,  Louisiana 

BIGGAR,  H.  P.,  London,  England 

BIXBY,  W.  K.,  St.  Louis,  Missouri 

BLACKISTON,  A.  H.,  Canton,  Ohio 

BOWMAN,  ISAIAH,  New  York  City 

CHANDLER,  CHARLES  L.,  Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

CLEMENTS,  WILLIAM  L.,  Bay  City,  Michigan 

CONNOR,  MRS.  W.  E.,  New  York  City 

CORBACHO,  JORGE  M.,  Lima,  Peru 


CRONAU,  RUDOLF,  New  York  City 
CUSHMAN,  ELTON  G.,  Barrington,  Rhode  Island 

EBERSTADT,  E.  E.,  New  York  City 
EDWARDS,  FRANCIS,  London,  England 

GAMIO,  MANUEL,  Mexico,  D.  F.,  Mexico 
GANN,  THOMAS,  Belize,  British  Honduras 
GATES,  W.  E.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
GOUGH,  W.  A.,  New  York  City 
GRIBBEL,  JOHN,  Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

HARPER,  LATHROP  C.,  New  York  City 
HATCHER,  H.  T.,  New  York  City 
HA  WES,  HARRY  E.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
HAYNES,  W.  de  F.,  New  York  City 
HODGE,  FREDERICK  W.,  New  York  City 
HUNTINGTON,  ARCHER  M.,  New  York  City 
HUNTINGTON,  HENRY  E.,  New  York,  City 

INMAN,  ARTHUR  C.,  Boston,  Massachusetts 

JIJON  y  CAAMANO,  JACINTO,  Quito,  Ecuador 
JOYCE,  T.  A.,  London,  England 

KLEIN,  JULIUS,  Washington,  D.  C. 

LANGE,  OTTO,  Florence,  Italy 
LEE,  BERTRAM,  Paris,  France 
LOOMIS,  JOHN  T.,  Washingtoa,  D.  C. 
LOTHROP,  SAMUEL  K.,  Boston,  Massachusetts 
LOUBAT,  le  DUG  de,  Paris,  France 

MACKIE,  SEDLEY,  New  York  City 
McCURDY,  GEORGE  G.,  New  Haven,  Connecticut 
MEANS,  PHILIP  A.,  Boston,  Massachusetts 
MINER,  WILLIAM  H.,  St.  Louis,  Missouri 
MORLEY,  SYLVANUS  G.,  Washington,  D.  C. 


PALLISER,  MELVIN  G.,  New  York  City 

READ,  BENJAMIN  M.,  Santa  Fe,  New  Mexico 
ROBERTSON,  WILLIAM  S.,  Urbana,  Illinois 
ROSENBACH,  A.  S.  W.,  New  York  City 

SAVILLE,  MARSHALL  H.,  New  York  City 
SAVILLE,  RANDOLPH  M.,  New  York  City 
SCOTT,  HUGH  L.,  Princeton,  New  Jersey 
SHARPE,  HENRY  D.,  Providence,  Rhode  Island 
SPARKS,  RICHARD  D.,  Alton,  Illinois 
SPINDEN,  HERBERT  J.,  Cambridge,  Massachusetts 
STETSON,  JOHN  B.,  JR.,  Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
STEVENSON,  E.  L.,  New  York  City 
SWEET,  HENRY  N.,  Boston,  Massachusetts 

TOZZER,  ALFRED  M.,  Cambridge,  Massachusetts 

WAGNER,  HENRY  R.,  Berkeley,  California 
WINSHIP,  GEORGE  P.,  Cambridge,  Massachusetts 


Done  into  a  book  at  Philadelphia 
by  Innes  &?  Sons  for  the  Cortes 
Society,  the  whole  being  completed 
in  July,  Nineteen  Twenty-two 


Magalhaes  de  Gandavo,  Pedro  de 
The  histories  of  Brazil 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY